[go: up one dir, main page]
More Web Proxy on the site http://driver.im/

WO2016117543A1 - Vehicle steering system - Google Patents

Vehicle steering system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016117543A1
WO2016117543A1 PCT/JP2016/051407 JP2016051407W WO2016117543A1 WO 2016117543 A1 WO2016117543 A1 WO 2016117543A1 JP 2016051407 W JP2016051407 W JP 2016051407W WO 2016117543 A1 WO2016117543 A1 WO 2016117543A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
clutch
auxiliary clutch
arm
lever
steering
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2016/051407
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
晃司 清岡
隆也 稲岡
Original Assignee
株式会社神崎高級工機製作所
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2015008046A external-priority patent/JP6651098B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2015055211A external-priority patent/JP6528163B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2015069637A external-priority patent/JP6651099B2/en
Application filed by 株式会社神崎高級工機製作所 filed Critical 株式会社神崎高級工機製作所
Priority to CN201680017022.6A priority Critical patent/CN107406103B/en
Publication of WO2016117543A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016117543A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60KARRANGEMENT OR MOUNTING OF PROPULSION UNITS OR OF TRANSMISSIONS IN VEHICLES; ARRANGEMENT OR MOUNTING OF PLURAL DIVERSE PRIME-MOVERS IN VEHICLES; AUXILIARY DRIVES FOR VEHICLES; INSTRUMENTATION OR DASHBOARDS FOR VEHICLES; ARRANGEMENTS IN CONNECTION WITH COOLING, AIR INTAKE, GAS EXHAUST OR FUEL SUPPLY OF PROPULSION UNITS IN VEHICLES
    • B60K17/00Arrangement or mounting of transmissions in vehicles
    • B60K17/04Arrangement or mounting of transmissions in vehicles characterised by arrangement, location, or kind of gearing
    • B60K17/16Arrangement or mounting of transmissions in vehicles characterised by arrangement, location, or kind of gearing of differential gearing
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B62LAND VEHICLES FOR TRAVELLING OTHERWISE THAN ON RAILS
    • B62DMOTOR VEHICLES; TRAILERS
    • B62D11/00Steering non-deflectable wheels; Steering endless tracks or the like
    • B62D11/02Steering non-deflectable wheels; Steering endless tracks or the like by differentially driving ground-engaging elements on opposite vehicle sides
    • B62D11/06Steering non-deflectable wheels; Steering endless tracks or the like by differentially driving ground-engaging elements on opposite vehicle sides by means of a single main power source
    • B62D11/08Steering non-deflectable wheels; Steering endless tracks or the like by differentially driving ground-engaging elements on opposite vehicle sides by means of a single main power source using brakes or clutches as main steering-effecting means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B62LAND VEHICLES FOR TRAVELLING OTHERWISE THAN ON RAILS
    • B62DMOTOR VEHICLES; TRAILERS
    • B62D11/00Steering non-deflectable wheels; Steering endless tracks or the like
    • B62D11/22Endless track steering being effected by deflecting endless track rollers or the like
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F16ENGINEERING ELEMENTS AND UNITS; GENERAL MEASURES FOR PRODUCING AND MAINTAINING EFFECTIVE FUNCTIONING OF MACHINES OR INSTALLATIONS; THERMAL INSULATION IN GENERAL
    • F16DCOUPLINGS FOR TRANSMITTING ROTATION; CLUTCHES; BRAKES
    • F16D67/00Combinations of couplings and brakes; Combinations of clutches and brakes
    • F16D67/02Clutch-brake combinations
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F16ENGINEERING ELEMENTS AND UNITS; GENERAL MEASURES FOR PRODUCING AND MAINTAINING EFFECTIVE FUNCTIONING OF MACHINES OR INSTALLATIONS; THERMAL INSULATION IN GENERAL
    • F16HGEARING
    • F16H48/00Differential gearings
    • F16H48/20Arrangements for suppressing or influencing the differential action, e.g. locking devices
    • F16H48/22Arrangements for suppressing or influencing the differential action, e.g. locking devices using friction clutches or brakes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system.
  • a side clutch and a side brake are provided in each of a pair of left and right drive trains for distributing power to left and right axles (drive sprocket shafts).
  • a side-clutch / side-brake steering system with a provided configuration is known, for example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1.
  • a steering lever that can be tilted left and right from a straight traveling position as disclosed in Patent Document 1 is known.
  • the side clutch inside the turn is disengaged, the axle inside the turn is decelerated, and the vehicle turns slowly with a large turning radius.
  • the side clutch inside the turn will be disengaged, the side brake inside the turn will be applied, the axle on the inside of the turn will be greatly decelerated and then stopped, which will cause the vehicle to turn Make a sharp turn with a small radius (brake turn when the axle inside the turn stops).
  • an auxiliary clutch that functions as a limited slip differential mechanism is provided between the left and right axles, that is, between the left and right drive trains described above, and a certain amount of torque is transmitted between the drive trains.
  • the left and right axles are in a loose diff-lock state.
  • the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is made variable so that turning at a desired turning radius can be realized in response to changes in various conditions such as road surface conditions, and the auxiliary clutch is arbitrarily connected according to the judgment at that time by the operator. It is desirable to be operable to adjust the force (ie, the transmission torque between the left and right drive trains).
  • the side brake on the inner side of the turn is activated, and the auxiliary clutch is moved from the drive train on the outer side to the drive train on the inner side while the axle on the inner side of the turn is being braked. Since the torque is transmitted through the clutch, durability such as seizure due to frictional heat of the clutch tends to occur. On the other hand, even if the side clutch on the inside of the turn is disconnected, if the side brake on the inside of the turn is operated in a state where torque is transmitted to the drive train on the inside of the turn via the auxiliary clutch, the frictional heat of the side brake on the inside of the turn is still It becomes easy to cause image sticking.
  • the phenomenon such as seizure related to the durability of the auxiliary clutch and the side brake, which may occur when the auxiliary clutch is engaged and the side brake is operated at the same time, increases as the engaging force of the auxiliary clutch increases (that is, The larger the amount of transmission torque, the more pronounced it becomes.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system configured to solve the above problems.
  • a vehicle steering system is provided with a side clutch and a side brake in each of a pair of parallel drive trains for distributing power to a pair of axles, and turns according to the operation of the steering operation tool.
  • the inner side clutch is disengaged and the side brake is operated.
  • an auxiliary clutch for changing the joining force for transmitting torque between the pair of drive trains and an auxiliary clutch operating tool for increasing the joining force of the auxiliary clutch are provided.
  • a check mechanism is provided to prevent the side brake operation and the increase in the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch from being performed simultaneously.
  • the restraining mechanism is configured to operate the steering operation tool when the auxiliary clutch operation tool is operated so as to increase a joining force of the auxiliary clutch.
  • the side brake inside the turn is configured not to operate.
  • auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch to a predetermined value.
  • the auxiliary clutch operating tool is operated to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch from the predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means.
  • the check mechanism when the steering operation tool is operated so as to operate the side brake on the inside of the turn, the check mechanism is independent of the operation of the auxiliary clutch operation tool. The joining force of the auxiliary clutch is not increased.
  • auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch to a predetermined value.
  • the auxiliary clutch operating tool is operated to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch from the predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means.
  • the side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system is a state in which the side clutch is disconnected from the drive train outside the turn in the drive state with the side clutch being engaged through the auxiliary clutch during the turning of the vehicle.
  • By transmitting the torque to the drive train inside the turn it is possible to avoid an excessive speed reduction of the axle inside the turn on soft ground or the like.
  • By providing the check mechanism it is possible to avoid the situation where the operation of the side brake inside the turning and the increase of the joining force of the auxiliary clutch are avoided at the same time, and the durability of the side clutch and the auxiliary clutch can be improved.
  • the auxiliary clutch operating tool in which the operator impairs the durability of the side clutch or the auxiliary clutch despite the vehicle turning by the operation of the steering operating tool by the check mechanism in the vehicle steering system according to the first aspect. Even if this operation is performed, the operation of the side brake inside the turn is avoided, so that the situation where the side brake is operated while the joining force of the auxiliary clutch is being increased is avoided.
  • the operator can operate the auxiliary clutch operation tool to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch.
  • the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is held at a predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means, and the engagement force is applied to the drive train inside the turning with the side clutch disengaged. Torque is transmitted from the drive train outside the turn through the auxiliary clutch in the state set to the value, and it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the speed of the axle inside the turn on soft ground as described above.
  • the auxiliary clutch operation tool arbitrarily determines the engagement force from the predetermined value. It will be applied as an operating tool for enabling an increase.
  • the operator can Even if a turning operation is performed to operate the side brake on the inside of the turn that impairs the durability of the side clutch or the auxiliary clutch, an increase in the joining force of the auxiliary clutch is avoided, so the side brake on the inside of the turn is activated. A situation in which the engaging force of the auxiliary clutch increases during the operation is avoided.
  • the operator can operate the auxiliary clutch operation tool to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch.
  • the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is held at a predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means, and the engagement force is applied to the drive train inside the turning with the side clutch disengaged. Torque is transmitted from the drive train outside the turn through the auxiliary clutch in the state set to the value, and it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the speed of the axle inside the turn on soft ground as described above.
  • the auxiliary clutch operating tool has the auxiliary clutch engaging force that is determined from the state of the clutch soil.
  • the operator determines that the predetermined value set by the setting means is not sufficient, it is applied as an operation tool for arbitrarily increasing the bonding force from the predetermined value.
  • FIG. 1 is a skeleton diagram of a transmission 1 to which a vehicle steering system according to the present invention is applied, and a hydraulic circuit diagram of a vehicle steering actuator set 2.
  • FIG. 2 is a plan sectional view of the transmission 1.
  • FIG. 2 is a partial cross-sectional view of a side surface of the transmission 1.
  • FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan cross-sectional view of a portion that accommodates a side clutch shaft 5 in the transmission 1.
  • 3 is an enlarged plan sectional view of a support portion of an axle 4 to a transmission case 20 in a transmission 1.
  • FIG. FIG. 4 is a rear cross-sectional view of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 in a portion where the steering actuators 34L and 34R are disposed.
  • FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 and includes a rear sectional view of a relief valve 33.
  • FIG. 4 is a side sectional view of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 and a side sectional view of the relief valve 33.
  • FIG. 3 is a partial perspective view of the transmission 1 showing an embodiment in which a breather is formed at an attachment portion of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 in the transmission case 20.
  • 3 is a rear view of the steering lever 11.
  • FIG. It is a back surface sectional view of steering lever 11 provided with resistance mechanism 170.
  • 6 is a graph showing the relationship between the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 and the operating resistance R applied to the steering lever 11, which appears by the resistance mechanism 170.
  • FIG. 13A is a rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the resistance mechanism 180
  • FIG. 13A is a diagram of the steering lever 11 in the straight advance setting position
  • FIG. 13B is a state in which the steering lever 11 is tilted for turning the vehicle. It is a figure of the steering lever 11.
  • FIG. FIG. 3 is a plan sectional view of a portion that houses a side clutch shaft 5 in a transmission 1 that includes a resistance (friction) mechanism 188.
  • 15A is a rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the resistance mechanism 189
  • FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 15A
  • FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a first embodiment of a related structure between a check mechanism and an auxiliary clutch operating mechanism, and is a partial plan view of the check mechanism 18 and an auxiliary clutch engagement pressure setting lever (hereinafter referred to as “lever”) 12; A side view of an auxiliary clutch pedal (hereinafter referred to as “pedal”) 13 is shown.
  • FIG. 20 is a front view of the lever 12 and the pushing member 81 in FIG. 19.
  • FIG. 20 is a front view of the lever 12 and the pushing member 81 in FIG. 19.
  • FIG. 20 is a figure which shows the 3rd Example about the related structure of the check mechanism and the operation mechanism of an auxiliary clutch, Comprising: The plane partial sectional view of the check mechanism 18, and the side view of the lever 12 and the pedal 13 are shown. It is a front view of the lever 12 and the arm 82 in FIG.
  • FIG. 2 is a skeleton diagram of a transmission 1A as an embodiment of the transmission 1 including an electronic control actuator AA that adjusts the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. It is a skeleton figure at the time of turning of transmission 1A. It is a side surface partial sectional view of transmission 1A. 3 is a front sectional view of the electric actuator 141.
  • FIG. FIG. 6 is a skeleton diagram of a transmission 1B as another embodiment of the transmission 1 provided with an electronic control actuator AA that adjusts the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. It is side surface partial sectional drawing of the transmission 1B. 3 is a basic control flowchart of transmission 1A or 1B by a controller 10.
  • FIG. 1 It is a block diagram which shows the input means to the controller 10 when it is assumed that a parking brake is applied using a side brake. It is a skeleton figure of transmission 1A or 1B at the time of the parking brake operation. 3 is a control flowchart of the parking brake operation by the controller 10. It is a block diagram which shows the input means to the controller 10 which shall control transmission 1A or 1B based on the detection of the inclination state of a vehicle. It is a control flowchart figure by the controller 10 of the transmission 1A or 1B which shall be controlled based on the detection of the inclination state of a vehicle. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117 which displays the actual value of the auxiliary clutch engagement force controlled automatically. It is a perspective view of the steering lever 11 provided with an auxiliary clutch engagement force adjustment dial 113A. It is a figure which shows 113 A of auxiliary clutch engagement force adjustment dials when it sees to the axial center direction of the steering lever 11. FIG.
  • the transmission 1 includes a transmission case 20 that supports a pair of left and right axles 4L and 4R (collectively referred to as “axle 4”) arranged on the same axis.
  • the axle 4 is applied as a drive sprocket shaft of a vehicle having a crawler type traveling device such as a combine.
  • the positions and directions of the constituent members and portions in the transmission 1 described below are based on the premise that the longitudinal direction of the axle 4 is the left-right direction of the transmission 1.
  • the mission case 20 includes a left housing 120L and a right housing 120R (collectively referred to as “housing 120”).
  • housing 120 an input shaft 28 pointing in the left-right direction is supported on the top of the mission case 20.
  • a pulley 28 a is fixed to this one end portion of the input shaft 28.
  • the pulley 28a constitutes a driven pulley of a belt type transmission device for transmitting the output of a prime mover (not shown) such as an engine to the input shaft 28.
  • a transmission (not shown) that is driven by the rotational power of the input shaft 28 is provided in the upper part of the mission case 20. This transmission is, for example, a hydraulic continuously variable transmission.
  • the output of the transmission is transmitted to the distribution gear 22 via the transmission gear train 29.
  • a side clutch shaft 21 extending in the left-right direction parallel to the axle 4 is rotatably supported by the transmission case 20 via a bearing 21a.
  • the inner ring of the bearing 21 a is fitted to the outer peripheral surfaces of the left and right ends of the side clutch shaft 21, and the outer ring of the bearing 21 a is fixed to the transmission case 20.
  • a distribution gear 22 is fixed to the left and right central portions of the side clutch shaft 21.
  • a pair of drive trains 3L and 3R (collectively referred to as “drive train 3”) for distributing power from the distribution gear 22 to the pair of left and right axles 4L and 4R are provided.
  • a pair of left and right extending left and right intermediate shafts 24L and 24R (collectively referred to as “intermediate shaft 24”) are arranged on the same axial center in the mission case 20 to constitute the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R. Is provided in parallel to the side clutch shaft 21 and the pair of left and right axles 4L and 4R, and is rotatably supported by the transmission case 20.
  • the left shifter 5L is on the left side of the side clutch shaft 21 on the left side of the distribution gear 22, and the right shifter 5R is on the right side of the side clutch shaft 21 on the right side of the distribution gear 22, respectively.
  • the left and right shifters 5L and 5R are collectively referred to as “shifter 5”.
  • the distribution gear 22 side is the inside, and the opposite side to the distribution gear 22 is the outside.
  • a left side gear 23L is formed at the right end of the left shifter 5L
  • a right side gear 23R is formed at the left end of the right shifter 5L (the left and right side gears 23L and 23R are collectively referred to as “side gear 23”).
  • a side gear 23 is formed at the inner end of each shifter 5.
  • a clutch claw 6a is formed at each of the left and right ends of the distribution gear 22, and a clutch claw 6b is formed at the inner ends of the side gears 23L and 23R of the left and right shifters 5L and 5R.
  • the clutch pawl 6a at the left end portion of the distribution gear 22 and the clutch pawl 6b of the left side clutch 23L form a meshing left side clutch 6L
  • the clutch pawl 6b constitutes a meshing right side clutch 6R (the left and right side clutches 6L and 6R are collectively referred to as “side clutch 6”).
  • a pair of left and right springs 5 a are wound around the left and right ends of the side clutch shaft 21, and each shifter 5 is biased toward the distribution gear 22 by each spring 5 a. That is, each spring 5a is biased in the direction in which each side clutch 6 is connected.
  • the outer end of each shifter 5 outside the bush 5d has a cylindrical shape and is arranged around each spring 5a.
  • each side clutch shaft 21 is provided with a thrust washer 5 b as a spring receiver that receives the inner end of the spring 5 a and is engaged with each shifter 5.
  • each side clutch shaft 21 is provided with a self-lubricating oilless collar 5c, which is attached to the thrust washer 5b, and the inner end of the spring 5a and the thrust end. It is interposed between the washer 5b.
  • a left side brake 7L is formed between the cylindrical outer (left) side end of the left shifter 5L and the left side of the transmission case 20, and the cylindrical outer (right) side end of the right shifter 5R
  • a right side brake 7R is formed between the right side of the transmission case 20 (the left and right side brakes 7L and 7R are collectively referred to as “side brake 7”).
  • Each side brake 7 includes friction plates 7a and 7b and a pressing plate 7c.
  • the friction plate 7 a is engaged with the cylindrical outer end portion of each shifter 5 so as not to be relatively rotatable
  • the friction plate 7 b is engaged with the left and right side portions of the mission case 20 so as not to be relatively rotatable.
  • the pressing plate 7 c is fixed to each shifter 5.
  • a bolt 19 for detecting the oil amount is provided in the hole 20a of the transmission case 20 of the transmission 1.
  • a distance L1 from the axis 21c of the side clutch shaft 21 to the root of the friction plate 7a is longer than a distance L2 from the axis 21c to the center of the hole 20a. That is, the position of the hole 20 a is closer to the shaft center 21 c than the friction plates 7 a and 7 b of the side brakes 7 along the radial direction of the side clutch shaft 21.
  • a pair of left and right rotating shafts 30L and 30R (collectively referred to as “rotating shaft 30”) extending in the front-rear direction are pivotally supported in a penetrating manner.
  • a vehicle steering actuator set 2 for operating the shifters 5L and 5R is provided outside the mission case 20.
  • the vehicle steering actuator set 2 includes a pair of left and right steering actuators 34L and 34R (collectively “steering actuators 34”) that are hydraulic cylinders, and extends from each steering actuator 34.
  • the piston rod 36 is connected to the outer end of each rotating shaft 30.
  • an engaging member (clamp or the like) 30 a is extended from each rotating shaft 30 inside the mission case 20 and is engaged with each shifter 5. Due to the rotation of the rotation shaft 30 around the axis, the engaging member 30 a rotates about the axis of the rotation shaft 30, so that the shifter 5 slides in the left-right direction along the side clutch shaft 21. Move.
  • a left large-diameter gear 25L is fixed to the right end of the left intermediate shaft 24L, and the left large-diameter gear 25L is always meshed with the left side gear 23L regardless of the sliding of the left shifter 5L. Further, the left small diameter gear 25L fixed to the left intermediate shaft 24L meshes with the left large diameter gear 27L fixed to the left axle 4L.
  • the distribution gear 22, the left side gear 23L, the left large diameter gear 25L, the left small diameter gear 26L, and the left large diameter gear 27L constitute the left drive train 3L that transmits power from the distribution gear 21 to the left axle 4L. .
  • a right large-diameter gear 25R is fixed to the left end of the right intermediate shaft 24R, and the right large-diameter gear 25R is always meshed with the right side gear 23R regardless of the sliding of the right shifter 5R.
  • the right small diameter gear 25R fixed to the right intermediate shaft 24R and the right large diameter gear 27R fixed to the right axle 4R are engaged with each other.
  • the right drive train 3R for transmitting power from the distribution gear 21 to the right axle 4R is constituted by the distribution gear 22, the right side gear 23R, the right large diameter gear 25R, the right small diameter gear 26R, and the right large diameter gear 27R. .
  • the left and right large diameter gears 25L and 25R, the left and right small diameter gears 26L and 26R, and the left and right large diameter gears 27L and 27R are collectively referred to as “large diameter gear 25”, “small diameter gear 26”, and “large diameter gear 27”, respectively. .
  • each housing 120 a portion for housing the small-diameter gear 26 (that is, the outer portion of each intermediate shaft 24) and the large-diameter gear 27 that are the final reduction gear train in each drive train 3.
  • the left and right outer ends are open, and side covers 121 are joined to the outer ends of the housings 120 so as to cover the openings, and the side covers 121 are fastened to the housings 120 with bolts 121a.
  • each intermediate shaft 24 is pivotally supported by each side cover 121 via a bearing 24a, while the portion of each intermediate shaft 24 between the large-diameter gear 25 and the small-diameter gear 26 supports the bearing 24b. Via the housing 120. Note that the inner end of each intermediate shaft 24 is splined into the central boss hole of each large-diameter gear 25.
  • the outer end of each large-diameter gear 27 is pivotally supported on each side cover 121 via a bearing 27a, and the inner end of each large-diameter gear 27 is pivotally supported on each housing 120 via a bearing 27b. Yes.
  • the axle 4 is accommodated in and supported by the axle case 122.
  • the outer end portion of the axle 4 protrudes from the outer end of the axle case 122.
  • a drive sprocket 4 a is fixed to an outer end portion of the axle 4 protruding from the axle case 122.
  • the inner end of the axle case 122 is a flange 122a, and the inner end of the axle 4 protrudes from the flange 122a.
  • each side cover 121 that supports the bearing 27 a is open, and the large-diameter gear 27 that pivotally supports the inner end of the axle 4 by the housing 120 and the side cover 122 through this opening. Insert a spline into the center boss hole.
  • the flange 122a of the axle case 122 is joined to the outer end of the side cover 121 so as to cover the opening of the side cover 121, and the flange 122a is fastened to the side cover 121 with a bolt 122b. Is fixed to the side cover 121.
  • the bolt 122b By loosening the bolt 122b and separating the flange 122a from the side cover 121, the inner end of the axle 4 is pulled out from the central boss hole of the large-diameter gear 27, and the axle 4 remains housed in the axle case 122. Thus, it can be easily removed from the mission case 20.
  • the bolt 121a With the flange 122a being fastened to the side cover 121, the bolt 121a is loosened to separate the side cover 121 from the housing 120, whereby the inner end portion of the large-diameter gear 27 is pulled out from the bearing 27b.
  • the inner end of the shaft 24 is pulled out from the bearing 24b and the large-diameter gear 25, and the axle 4, the axle case 122, the side cover 121, the central shaft 24, the large-diameter gear 27, and the bearings 24a and 27a are integrated into a housing. 120 can be removed.
  • the axle 4 can be easily detached from the transmission case 20 or removed from the transmission case 20 while the intermediate shaft 24 and the large-diameter gear 27 are supported. Maintenance, replacement, and the like of the shaft 4, the large diameter gear 27, and the bearings that support them can be easily performed. Therefore, the current intermediate shaft 24 can be replaced with another intermediate shaft 24 formed with a small diameter gear 26 having a number of teeth different from the number of teeth of the small diameter gear 26, and the number of teeth different from the current large diameter gear 27. Replacement with another large-diameter gear 27 having a number can be easily performed, and the reduction ratio of the drive train 3 can be appropriately changed by changing these combinations to other ones.
  • FIG. 1 shows a straight traveling state of the vehicle (the left and right axles 4L and 4R rotate at the same speed), the left and right side clutches 6L and 6R are engaged, and the left and right side brakes 7L and 7R are engaged.
  • the left and right side gears 23 ⁇ / b> L and 23 ⁇ / b> R are rotatable integrally with the distribution gear 22. Therefore, in principle, the rotational force of the distribution gear 22 is transmitted to the left and right axles 4L and 4R.
  • the pressing plate 7c fixed to the left shifter 5L presses the friction plates 7a and 7b of the left side brake 7L, the left axle 4L is braked, and the turning radius of the vehicle is further reduced.
  • a left brake turn is realized by completely braking the left axle 4L inside the turn.
  • the right side clutch 6R When turning right, the right side clutch 6R is disengaged by sliding the right shifter 5R outward, that is, on the right side while holding the left shifter 5L at the position where the left side clutch 6L is engaged.
  • the right side brake 7R is applied, and for details of the state, refer to the explanation at the time of the left turn described above, and illustration is also omitted.
  • the auxiliary clutch 8 in the transmission 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.
  • An auxiliary clutch 8 is provided between the left large-diameter gear 25L at the right end of the left intermediate shaft 24L and the right large-diameter gear 25R at the left end of the right intermediate shaft 24R.
  • the auxiliary clutch 8 includes a friction plate 8a engaged with the left large diameter gear 25L so as not to rotate relative to the left large diameter gear 25L, and a friction plate 8b engaged with the right large diameter gear 25R so as not to rotate relative thereto.
  • a friction plate clutch is used, and the pressing force between the friction plates 8a and 8b is adjustable from the outside of the mission case 20, thereby making the joining force variable.
  • the auxiliary clutch 8 is further provided with a pressing member (not shown) that is slidable in the axial direction (left-right direction) of the intermediate shaft 24.
  • the friction plates 8a and 8b are pressed against each other (with the auxiliary clutch 8 inserted), and the pressure contact degree (that is, the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8) is increased. Thereafter, the pressure contact force of the friction plates 8a and 8b is reduced, and the friction plates 8a and 8b are separated (the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged).
  • an auxiliary clutch shifter 9 is provided in the mission case 20.
  • the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 has a fork shaft 9a and a fork 9b.
  • the horizontally extending fork shaft 9a is supported in the mission case 20 so as to be slidable in the left-right axial direction.
  • One end of the fork 9b is fixed to the fork shaft 9a.
  • the other end of the fork 9b is engaged with the pressing member of the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • a rotating shaft 17 is pivotally supported so as to penetrate inside and outside.
  • An arm 16 is fixed to the outer end of the rotation shaft 17 outside the mission case 20.
  • a half-shaped cam surface 17 a is formed at the inner end of the rotation shaft 17 inside the mission case 20.
  • the one end of the fork 9b is formed as a cam receiving surface 9d that receives the cam surface 17a.
  • the fork shaft 9a is maximally slid on the clutch separating side.
  • the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged as described above.
  • the fork shaft 9a is slid toward the clutch engagement side by rotating the rotating shaft 16 about its axis and making the cam surface 16a oblique with respect to the cam receiving surface 9d (see FIG. 30 and the like described later).
  • the auxiliary clutch 9 is joined via the fork 9b with a joining force corresponding to the sliding amount.
  • the left shifter 5L is moved to the left (outward) as the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left from the straight traveling position to increase the left tilt angle LT.
  • the right shifter 5R slides to the right (outward) as the steering lever 11 is tilted to the right from the straight position to increase the right tilt angle RT.
  • the side clutch 6 on the inner side of the turn remains engaged, that is, the both side clutches 6L and 6R remain engaged, Is retained.
  • the side clutch 6 inside the turn is disengaged.
  • the side clutch 6 on the inner side of the turn is disengaged, but the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turn is not yet operated, and the axle 4 on the inner side of the turn can rotate with inertial force. It is a state.
  • the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turn start to come into pressure contact. That is, the side brake 7 inside the turn starts to work.
  • the pressure contact degree of the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turn increases, that is, the braking force increases.
  • the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turn are completely in pressure contact, and the axle 4 inside the turn is reliably braked.
  • the vehicle steering actuator set 2 includes an oil passage block 38, an electromagnetic direction control valve 32, a relief valve 33 having a variable relief pressure, and a pair of left and right steering actuators (hydraulic cylinders) 34L and 34R. Is. Although only shown in FIG. 1, a pair of check valves 39L and 39R (collectively “check valves 39”) not shown in FIGS. 2 and 6 to 8 are also incorporated in the oil passage block 38. .
  • the oil passage block 38 is formed with a pair of parallel left and right cylinder holes.
  • the piston 35, the piston rod 36 extending from the piston 35, and the piston rod 36 are wound around each cylinder hole. Is incorporated into the initial position to constitute a pair of left and right steering actuators (hydraulic cylinders) 34L and 34R. Both piston rods 36 are extended from an oil passage block 38, and their front ends are individually connected to the outer ends of the left and right rotating shafts 30L and 30R as described above.
  • One side of the piston 35 opposite to the piston rod 36 of the cylinder hole constituting each steering actuator 34 is a hydraulic oil chamber 34a, and a relief is provided in the middle of the piston 35 in the axial direction.
  • a port 34b is provided.
  • the oil passage block 38 is provided with a pump port 38 a that receives the oil discharged from the hydraulic pump 31 shown in FIG. 1, and also discharges oil from the oil passage block 38 to the outside of the oil passage block 38.
  • the drain port 38d is provided.
  • the oil from the hydraulic pump 31 that has flowed into the oil passage block 38 from the inlet port 38a passes through the directional control valve 32, which is an electromagnetic valve, to the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the left steering actuator 34L and the right steering actuator 34R. It is configured to be sent to either the hydraulic oil chamber 34a or the drain port 38d. Further, the oil from the relief ports 34b of the left and right steering actuators 34L and 34R joins via separate check valves 39 and is sent to the drain port 38d.
  • the pair of left and right steering actuators 34L and 34R is controlled by the electromagnetic directional control valve 32 based on a command signal from the controller 10, so that the oil for the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the steering actuators 34L and 34R is controlled. Is controlled, and the extension amount of the piston rod 36 is thereby controlled.
  • the steering actuators 34 are electronically controlled actuators in the sense that they are controlled based on the solenoid control of the direction control valve 32.
  • the state where the corresponding shifter 5 is set to the maximum sliding position on the inner side and the side clutch 6 is engaged is referred to as the non-operating state of the steering actuator 34.
  • a state where the shifter 5 is set to slide slightly outward from the maximum sliding position is defined as an operating state of the steering actuator 34.
  • the direction control valve 32 is a three-position switching type direction control valve. Based on a command signal from the controller 10, the left turn position L is obtained by exciting the solenoid 32a and demagnetizing the solenoid 32b. Further, the position of the solenoid 32b is controlled to the right turning position R by the excitation of the solenoid 32b and the demagnetization of the solenoid 32a, and to the neutral position N by the demagnetization of the solenoids 32a and 32b.
  • the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the left turn actuator 34L is communicated with the pump port 38a, and the left turn actuator 34L is put into an operating state and the right turn actuator 34L is used.
  • the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the actuator 34R is communicated with the tank port 38d, and the right-turn actuator 34R is deactivated.
  • the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the right turning actuator 34R is communicated with the pump port 38a to bring the right turning actuator 34R into an operating state and the left turning actuator 34L.
  • the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is communicated with the tank port 38d, and the left-turn actuator 34L is deactivated.
  • the pump port 38a and the hydraulic oil chambers 34a of the left and right turning actuators 34L and 34R are communicated with the tank port 38d, and the left and right turning actuators 34L and 34R are deactivated.
  • the direction control valve 32 is incorporated in an oil passage block 38, and a solenoid set 32 c of the direction control valve 32 is externally attached to the oil passage block 38.
  • Both solenoids 32a and 32b shown in the hydraulic circuit diagram of FIG. 1 are incorporated in the solenoid set 32c.
  • the solenoid set 32c is connected to the controller 10 by a harness 32d so as to receive command signals 32La and 32Ra from the controller 10.
  • the solenoid 32a is excited by receiving the command signal 32Ls
  • the solenoid 32b is excited by receiving the command signal 32Rs (see FIG. 1).
  • a fan-shaped arm 52 is extended from the base end boss 11a of the steering lever 11, and a recess is provided in a part of the arc-shaped edge of the fan-shaped arm 52. 52a.
  • a pair of valve switches 53 are disposed in the vicinity of the fan-shaped arm 52, and the pusher 53 a is urged toward the fan-shaped arm 52 to rotate the fan-shaped arm 52 (that is, the steering lever 11). Accordingly, the detent groove 52a advances and retreats.
  • the pushers 53a of both valve switches 53 are fitted into the detent grooves 52a, whereby both valve switches 53 are switched off.
  • the controller 10 sets the direction control valve 32 to the neutral position N when the valve switch 53 is OFF.
  • the relief valve 33 adjusts the degree of compression of the spring 43 by adjusting the position of the spring receiver 41, thereby adjusting the relief pressure defined by the degree of compression. It is a variable relief valve. By adjusting the relief pressure, the extension amount of the piston rod 36 of the hydraulic actuator 34 in the activated state is adjusted, that is, the sliding amount to the outside of the shifter 5 inside the turning is set, and according to the sliding amount The braking force of the side brake 7 (pressure contact degree of the friction plates 7a and 7b) is determined.
  • the relief valve 33 is vertically incorporated in the oil passage block 38.
  • the relief valve 33 is fitted into the port member 40 fixed to the oil passage block 38, the spring receiver 41 engaged with the lower portion of the port member 40 so as to be slidable up and down, and slidably fitted into the port member 40.
  • the piston 42 is disposed in the spring receiver 41, and its upper end presses against the piston 42 and its lower end includes a spring 43 that presses against the inner surface of the bottom end of the spring receiver 41.
  • a vertical suction port 33 a is formed at the upper end of the port member 40, and a discharge port 33 b in the horizontal radial direction is formed in the upper and lower middle part of the port member 40.
  • the suction port 33a communicates with the relief port 34b of the steering actuators 34L and 34R shown in FIG. 6, and the discharge port 33b is connected to the drain via an oil passage 38b formed in the oil passage block 38. It communicates with the port 38d.
  • the oil passages interposed between the relief ports 34b and the suction ports 33a of the steering actuators 34L and 34R are shown in FIG.
  • the check valves 39L and 39R for preventing the back flow toward the relief port 38d are provided separately.
  • the suction port 33a communicates with the discharge port 33b, and the relief valve 33 opens. That is, if the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is in communication with the relief port 34b by sliding of the piston 35 of one of the steering actuators 34, the oil released from the relief port 34b to the relief valve 33 is released. The drain port 38d is drained. Therefore, the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is reduced to a state where the piston 35 cannot be stroked any further.
  • a spring 43 interposed between the piston 42 and the inner surface of the bottom end of the spring receiver 41 is a compression spring, and urges the piston 42 upward.
  • the degree of compression of the spring 43 is adjusted by adjusting the vertical position of the spring receiver 41 that can slide up and down with respect to the port member 40, thereby adjusting the relief pressure of the relief valve 33.
  • predetermined position when a certain distance is provided between the spring receiver 41 and the base end of the spring 43 (referred to as “predetermined position”), when the spring receiver 41 receives no force from the outside, the spring 43 is kept at a natural length, This state corresponds to the upright position of the steering lever 11 that is kept in the state in which the side clutch 6 inside the turning is kept, as will be described in detail later.
  • a cam plate 44 is disposed below the relief valve 33 in the oil passage block 38 as shown in FIGS.
  • the outer surface of the bottom end portion of the spring receiver 44 protrudes downward in a circular arc shape in a normal (rear) view, and the upper end portion of the cam plate 44 conforms to the shape. Is formed with an arcuate recess 44a in a normal (rear) view.
  • the left and right side portions of the concave portion 44a of the cam plate 44 serve as cams, and the spring receiver 41 rises when the bottom end of the spring receiver 41 rides on the cam.
  • a cam pivot member 45 having an axial center in the front-rear direction is inserted into the oil passage block 38, and an inner end portion thereof is fitted into a bush 45a as shown in FIG. It is freely supported.
  • the cam plate 44 is fixed to the cam pivot member 45.
  • An outer end portion of the cam pivot member 45 is disposed outside the oil passage block 38, and a cam operation arm 46 is fixed to the outer end portion.
  • an oil passage 38c parallel to the oil passage 38b is formed below the oil passage 38b in the oil passage block 38, and both oil passages 38b and 38c are formed. Is connected to the drain port 38d.
  • the cam operation arm 46 is connected to the sector arm 52 of the steering lever 11 through the link mechanism 50.
  • the link mechanism 50 includes a link rod 47 on the fan-shaped arm 52 side, a link rod 49 on the cam operation arm 46 side, and a link arm 48 that connects the link rod 47 and the link rod 49.
  • One end 47 a of the link rod 47 is pivoted to the sector arm 52, and the other end 47 b of the link rod 47 is pivoted to one end of the link arm 48.
  • One end 49 a of the link rod 49 is pivotally connected to the other end of the link arm 48, and the other end 49 b of the link rod 49 is pivotally connected to the tip of the cam operation arm 46.
  • the link arm 48 is pivotally supported by a pivot shaft 48a at a portion between both ends pivotally connected to the link rods 47 and 49.
  • the link rod 47 is pushed and pulled, whereby the link arm 48 rotates about the pivot shaft 48a, thereby pushing and pulling the link rod 49, and the cam operating arm. 46 is rotated.
  • the cam operation arm 46 can be rotated upward and downward from the rectilinear position S, and the upper position Lm corresponds to a state in which the left tilt angle LT of the steering lever 11 is set to the maximum angle Tmax.
  • a position Rm below the straight traveling position S corresponds to a state where the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 is set to the maximum angle Tmax.
  • the position of the spring receiver 41 is The predetermined position, which is the limit position of the range in which the spring 43 is kept at a natural length, is obtained.
  • the sliding position of the piston 35 (the extension amount of the piston rod 36) when the hydraulic oil chamber 34a starts to communicate with the relief port 34b determines that the clutch pawl 6b is connected to the distribution gear 22. It corresponds to the sliding position of the shifter 5 when it is removed from the clutch pawl 6a, that is, when the side clutch 6 is disengaged.
  • the piston is moved based on the movement of the spring receiver 41 based on the arbitrary setting of the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 in the range from the angle T1 to the maximum angle Tmax.
  • the degree of compression of the spring 43 corresponding to the urging force against 42, that is, the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 is set. Accordingly, the piston 35 of the steering actuator 34 in the operating state (inside of turning) is slid on the shifter 5 by being pushed until the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic oil chamber 34a reaches the relief pressure set in this way, When the hydraulic pressure becomes the relief pressure and the relief valve 33 is opened, the sliding of the piston 35 and the shifter 5 stops.
  • the brake plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn are pressed against each other with a pressure contact degree corresponding to the tilt angle T, A braking force corresponding to the degree of pressure contact acts on the axle 4 inside the turn.
  • FIG. 9 shows the left-right direction and the up-down direction of the transmission 1.
  • a mounting rib 130 for attaching the oil passage block 38 of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 is formed in a front bulging shape on the front surface of the left and right housings 120 ⁇ / b> L and 120 ⁇ / b> R constituting the mission case 20. ing.
  • a screw hole 134 is formed in the mount rib 130.
  • the oil passage block 38 is fastened to the transmission case 20 by a bolt 38f screwed into each screw hole 134.
  • the mount rib 130 includes a first partition wall 130a and a second partition wall 130b. A region surrounded by the mounting rib 130 is partitioned into a first chamber 131, a second chamber 132, and a third chamber 133 by the first partition wall 130a and the second partition wall 130b. A communication hole 161 that communicates the inside of the mission case 20 and the first chamber 131 is formed in the front portion of the mission case 20. Furthermore, an air inlet 20i is formed inside the mission case 20 (see FIG. 2). Air is introduced into the first chamber 131 through the communication port 161 and the air introduction port 20i.
  • the first partition wall 130a is formed with a communication groove 162 that allows the first chamber 131 and the second chamber 132 to communicate with each other.
  • a communication groove 163 that connects the second chamber 132 and the third chamber 133 is formed in the second partition wall 130b.
  • a slit-like breather groove 164 and a communication port 165 are formed in a portion of the mount rib 130 surrounding the third chamber 133.
  • the breather groove 164 communicates the third chamber 133 and the outside of the mission case 20.
  • a communication port may be provided on the side surface of the mount rib 130 as necessary.
  • the communication port 165 is a small hole that communicates the third chamber 133 with the outside of the mission case 20.
  • a breather pipe 166 facing upward is attached to the communication port 165. In FIG. 9, both the breather groove 164 and the breather pipe 166 are illustrated, but the breather 160 may have at least one of them.
  • a resistance mechanism 170 shown in FIG. 11 will be described as a first embodiment relating to a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the steering lever 11.
  • the resistance mechanism 170 includes a linear fluid damper. Instead, a rotary fluid damper may be provided.
  • the resistance mechanism 170 includes a cylinder 172, a pivot 173, an arm 174, and a piston rod 175.
  • the cylinder 172 is formed by joining the case 172a and the case 172b, and is disposed in the vehicle by being fixed to the frame or dashboard of the vehicle. Oil or gas is sealed inside the cylinder 172.
  • An arm 174 is fixed to the tip of the piston rod 175, and the arm 174 is pivotally connected to the steering lever 11 via a pivot 173.
  • the piston rod 175 moves to the left in the figure
  • the piston rod 175 moves to the right in the figure.
  • oil seals 176a and 176b are respectively attached to the walls of the cases 172a and 172b through which the piston rod 175 passes.
  • a pressure receiving chamber 171 is formed inside the cylinder 172.
  • the pressure receiving chamber 171 is filled with fluid.
  • the pressure receiving chamber 171 includes a side clutch region Rn, a right side brake region Rfa, and a left side brake region Rfb.
  • the position of the inner peripheral wall that forms the boundary between these regions differs from region to region.
  • the diameter of the hole 172d that forms the right side brake region Rfa and the hole 172e that forms the left side brake region Rfb in the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172 is larger than the diameter of the hole 172c that forms the side clutch region Rn. It is large and close to the outer diameter of the piston portion 175c.
  • the piston portion 175c of the piston rod 175 is a portion protruding in a flange shape at the middle portion of the piston rod 175.
  • An orifice hole 175d is formed in the piston portion 175c.
  • the orifice hole 175d penetrates from the right pressing surface 175e of the piston portion 175c to the left pressing surface 175f.
  • An oil seal 176c is attached to the outer peripheral wall surface 175h of the piston portion 175c.
  • the piston portion 175 c moves together with the piston rod 175 as the steering lever 11 is tilted.
  • a step 172f and a step 172h are formed on the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172.
  • the inside of the cylinder 172 is partitioned into a right side brake region Rfa and a side clutch region Rn with the step 172f as a boundary.
  • the inside of the cylinder 172 is partitioned into a side clutch region Rn and a left side brake region Rfb with the step 172h as a boundary.
  • the fluid in the pressure receiving chamber 171 needs to pass through the orifice hole 175d when the piston portion 175c moves in the right side brake region Rfa and when the piston portion 175c moves in the left side brake region Rfb. Therefore, when the right pressing surface 175e of the piston portion 175c enters the right side brake region Rfa due to the rightward movement of the piston portion 175c in the side clutch region Rn, the operation resistance applied to the steering lever 11 increases. On the other hand, when the outer peripheral wall surface 175h of the piston portion 175c passes through the step 172f due to the leftward movement of the piston portion 175c in the right side brake region Rfa, the operation resistance applied to the steering lever 11 decreases. The operating resistance applied to the steering lever 11 is similarly increased or decreased by the piston portion 175c moving between the side clutch region Rn and the left side brake region Rfb.
  • the time when the right pressing surface 175e starts to enter the right side brake region Rfa from the side clutch region Rn is the time when the position of the right pressing surface 175e matches the position of the step 172f along the direction in which the piston portion 175c moves. It is.
  • the time point when the left pressing surface 175f starts to enter the left side brake region Rfb from the side clutch region Rn is the time point when the position of the left pressing surface 175f matches the position of the step 172h along the direction in which the piston portion 175c moves. It is.
  • the right pressing surface 175e of the piston portion 175c in the right side brake region Rfa is in a state where the outer side (right side) sliding amount of the right shifter 5R reaches the maximum value and the right side brake 7R exhibits the maximum braking force. By the time, it does not come into contact with the one end surface 172i of the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172.
  • the left pressing surface 175f of the piston portion 175c in the left side brake region Rfb reaches the maximum value of the outer side (left side) sliding amount of the left side brake 7L, and the left side brake 7L exhibits the maximum braking force. Until reaching the other end surface 172j of the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172.
  • the resistance mechanism 170 switches from the state in which the side brake 7 exhibits the maximum braking force to the switching state between the disconnected state and the connected state of the side clutch 6R (position where the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is T1).
  • the side clutch 6 is connected by applying the operating resistance R to the steering lever 11 (strictly speaking, the operating resistance R increases to a predetermined value Rh).
  • the sliding speed of the shifter 5 is slowed so that the clutch pawl 6b of the shifter 5R meshes with the clutch pawl 6a of the distribution gear 22 without causing "playing".
  • FIG. 12 is a graph showing the relationship between the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 and the operating resistance R by the resistance mechanism 170 applied to the steering lever 11.
  • a friction (resistance) mechanism 180 shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B as a second embodiment relating to a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the steering lever 11 will be described.
  • a friction mechanism 180 as an example of a resistance mechanism of the steering lever 11 includes an arm 181, a pressing member 182, a stopper 183, a support rod 184, a pivot 185, a boss 186, and a tension spring 187.
  • a boss 186 formed in the middle of the support rod 184 is provided around the pivot shaft 185, and the support rod 84 is pivotally supported by the pivot shaft 185.
  • the support rod 184 can rotate around the central axis 185 c of the pivot 185.
  • a pressing member 182 is provided at one end of the support rod 184, and one end of a tension spring 187 is attached to the other end. The other end of the tension spring 187 is fixed to a vehicle frame or the like.
  • the arm 181 is attached to the boss 11 a so as to be rotatable according to the operation of the steering lever 11.
  • the arm 181 is located on the opposite side of the steering lever 11 with the boss 11a interposed therebetween.
  • the center part of the edge of the arc shape is recessed more than the parts on both sides. This central portion is referred to as a non-friction region 181a, and the portions on both sides thereof are referred to as friction regions 181b and 181c.
  • the steering lever 11 in FIGS. 13A and 13B is also provided with left and right valve switches 53L and 53R as provided in the steering lever 11 in FIG. And a mechanism for switching between ON and OFF.
  • the tension coil spring 187 pulls the support rod 184 so that the pressing member 182 faces the arm 181.
  • an elastic force is applied to the support rod 184 to rotate the support rod 184 about the pivot 185.
  • the support rod 184 is applied with an elastic force that moves the pressing member 182 upward.
  • the stopper 183 is fixed to the vehicle frame or the like. In a state where the tilting angle T of the steering lever 11 is less than the angle T1, the pressing member 182 is positioned below the non-friction region 181a and does not contact the arm 181 when the support rod 184 contacts the stopper 183. .
  • the pressing member 182 contacts the arm 181 when the side brake 7 is activated according to the tilt of the steering lever 11, and the contact with the arm 181 is canceled when the braking force is released.
  • the steering lever 11 is moved to the left or right. In the case of tilting, an operation resistance (Rh) is applied to the steering lever 11 until the arm 181 is separated from the pressing member 182. Then, after the arm 181 is opposed to the pressing member 182 in the non-friction region 181a and is separated from the pressing member 182, the steering lever is operated while the arm 181 rotates counterclockwise to the rectilinear position. 11, the operation resistance by the pressing member 182 is not applied (the operation resistance is the minimum value R0).
  • the friction mechanism 180 disengages the side clutch 6 while the shifter 5 returns from the state in which the side brake 7 exhibits the maximum braking force to the start point of transition from the disconnected state of the side clutch 6 to the connected state.
  • the operation resistance that suppresses the transition from the state to the connected state is continuously applied to the steering lever 11 and “play” of the shifter 5L is suppressed.
  • a resistance mechanism 188 shown in FIG. 14 will be described as an example of a structure for imparting resistance to the sliding of the shifter 5 with respect to the side clutch shaft 21.
  • the resistance mechanism 188 is provided with a friction portion 21f on the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 on which the shifter 5 slides.
  • the friction part 21f has a friction coefficient larger than the friction coefficient of the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 where the friction part 21f is not provided.
  • a means for providing the friction portion 21f it is conceivable to coat the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 with a friction material.
  • a method of coating the friction material a method of attaching a sheet-like friction material, A method of spraying or applying a friction material can be considered.
  • a method of surface processing the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 itself is also conceivable. 14 shows the left side clutch shaft 21 provided with the friction portion 21f, the friction portion 21f is also provided on the right side clutch shaft 21 not shown in FIG.
  • the sliding resistance that was initially the minimum value R0 increases to a constant sliding resistance Rh.
  • the contact point between the outer end 5d1 of the bush 5d and the friction part 21f is coincident with the starting point of the side clutch 6 being disengaged. That is, the sliding resistance is the minimum value R0 while the side clutch 6 is engaged while the shifter 5 is sliding (while the clutch claws 6a and 6b are engaged), and the clutch pawl 6b is separated from the clutch pawl 6b.
  • the sliding resistance Rh is applied to the shifter 5 until the contact between the bush 5d and the friction portion 21f is eliminated.
  • the sliding resistance Rh suppresses the transition of the side clutch 6 from the disconnected state to the connected state. Thereby, the “play” of the shifter 5 is suppressed.
  • the clutch pawl 6b of the shifter 5 starts to mesh with the clutch pawl 6a of the distribution gear 22, the outer end 5d1 of the bush 5d passes through the friction portion 21f, and thereafter the sliding resistance applied to the shifter 5 is eliminated (
  • the sliding resistance is the minimum value R0).
  • FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B) As another embodiment relating to a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the steering lever 11 will be described.
  • the resistance mechanism 189 includes a detent mechanism 190.
  • the detent mechanism 190 includes a ball 193, a plate portion 191 with which the ball 193 is slidably contacted, a case 192 for holding the ball 193 facing the ball 193, and a spring 194 that is a compression coil spring.
  • the plate portion 191 is provided with a right recess 191a and a left recess 191b.
  • the right recess 191a and the left recess 191b are portions that are recessed from the surface 191c of the plate portion 191.
  • the plate portion 191 is fixed to a frame or dashboard of a vehicle on which the transmission 1 is mounted.
  • Case 192 is fixed to the steering lever 11.
  • Case 192 includes a hook portion 192a and a cap portion 192b.
  • the spring 194 is received at the bottom of the cap portion 192b.
  • the ball 193 is pushed by the spring 194 toward the outside of the cap portion 192b.
  • the hook portion 192 a is fixed to the steering lever 11.
  • the plate portion 191 is formed in an arch shape so as to coincide with the movement locus of the case 192 at that time.
  • the ball 193 When the steering lever 11 is in the rectilinear position, the ball 193 is positioned between the right concave portion 191a and the left concave portion 191b and does not fit in either, and is in contact with the surface 191c of the plate portion 191. Further, even when the tilt angle T increases to reach the angle T1, the ball 193 is in contact with the surface 191c of the plate portion 191. When the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 reaches the angle T2, the ball 193 is fitted into the right recess 191a.
  • the ball 193 When the left tilt angle LT of the steering lever 11 reaches the angle T2, the ball 193 is fitted into the left recess 191b.
  • the ball 193 rides on the surface 191c of the plate portion 191 from the right recess 191a or the left recess 191b and then moves again on the surface 191c. To do. Only when the ball 193 fitted in the right concave portion 191a or the left concave portion 191b rides on the surface 191c of the plate portion 191, the manipulation resistance R of the value Rh is applied to the steering lever 11 operated by the operator.
  • the resistance mechanism 189 immediately before the transition start point.
  • An operation resistance that suppresses the transition of the side clutch 6 from the disconnected state to the connected state for a moment is applied to the steering lever 11 to prevent the “shift” of the shifter 5.
  • a vehicle equipped with a transmission 1 is provided with an auxiliary clutch engagement pressure setting lever (hereinafter simply referred to as “lever”) 12 as an operation tool for setting the engagement pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. .
  • the arm 16 is rotated to a position corresponding to the operation position of the lever 12, thereby controlling the position of the auxiliary clutch shifter 9, and the pressure contact degree between the friction plates 8 a and 8 b in the auxiliary clutch 8 is determined. It is assumed that it corresponds to the value set by lever 12.
  • an auxiliary clutch engagement pressure increasing pedal (hereinafter referred to as “auxiliary clutch engagement pressure increase pedal”) can be increased in a vehicle equipped with the transmission 1 from the value set by the lever 12.
  • a simply “pedal”) 13 is provided.
  • the pedal 13 is mechanically linked to an arm 16 for controlling the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 using a link mechanism 14.
  • the auxiliary clutch 8 joined with the joining pressure set by the lever 12 is used from the drive train 3 outside the turning, The driving force is transmitted to the driving train 3 on the inner side of the turn with the side clutch 6 disengaged, but with the set joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, there is not enough power to be transmitted to remove the muddyness.
  • the pedal 13 is urgently depressed, and the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased according to the depression amount.
  • a stopper 68 that demarcates the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 is movable up and down. It is controlled by a control type actuator 67.
  • the related structure of the lever 12, the pedal 13, and the arm 16 in the embodiment of FIG. 7 will be described in detail.
  • the pedal 13 has a boss 13a formed at the base end mounted on a pivot 70 having a horizontal axis, and is pivotable up and down around the pivot 70.
  • An arm 13b extends downward from the boss 13a, and when the pedal 13 is depressed and lowered, the arm 13b rotates forward.
  • An outer wire receiver 63 is installed immediately after the arm 13 b, and a spring 64 is interposed between the tip (lower end) of the arm 13 b and the outer wire receiver 63.
  • the spring 64 urges the arm 13b rearward, thereby urging the pedal 13 upward (non-depressed position).
  • the depression of the pedal 13 is performed against the spring 64.
  • the pedal 13 is rotated upward by the urging force of the spring 64 and returns to the non-depressed position.
  • the outer wire receiver 65 is also installed in the vicinity of the arm 16, and both ends of the outer wire 62 are fixed to the outer wires 63 and 65.
  • An inner wire 61 is inserted into the outer wire 62, and one end portion 61 a of the inner wire 61 extending from one end portion of the outer wire 62 fixed to the outer wire receiver 63 is pivotally connected to the arm 13 b and is fixed to the outer wire receiver 65.
  • the other end 61b of the inner wire 61 extending from the other end of 62 is pivoted to the tip of the arm 13b.
  • the inner wire 61, the outer wire 62, and the outer wire receivers 63, 65 constitute the link mechanism 14 that links the pedal 13 and the arm 16, and when the pedal 13 is depressed, the arm 13b resists the spring 64. It rotates and pulls the inner wire 61, thereby rotating the arm 16 in the increasing direction of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • the lever 12 is pivotable back and forth around the pivot 71 by mounting the boss 12a at the base end thereof to the pivot 71 in the left-right direction.
  • the lever 12 is inserted through a lever guide groove 19 in the front-rear direction provided on the console of the vehicle, for example, and is rotatable in a range from the front end to the rear end of the lever guide groove 19.
  • an operation for setting the operation position of the lever 12 as the front end position thereof to the minimum value (for example, 0) of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set.
  • the operation position for setting the operation pressure of the lever 12 as the rear end position to the maximum value within the setting range of the lever 12 is set as the operation position of the lever 12 as the rear end position.
  • “Maximum bonding pressure setting position Cmax" In other words, by turning the lever 12 rearward, the set joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased.
  • notches (saw teeth) for detent are formed for each operation position of the lever 12 corresponding to each set value of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • the operator puts his hand on the lever 12 and rotates it along the guide groove 19 and arranges it at the operation position corresponding to the target joining pressure.
  • the lever 12 is fixed at the operation position even when the lever 12 is released.
  • the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is held at a set value corresponding to the operating position of the lever 12. .
  • the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is changed, the lever 12 is removed from the notch at the original operation position, the lever 12 is rotated to another operation position, and the notch corresponding to the other operation position is set. The lever 12 is locked.
  • a position detection sensor 66 for detecting the rotation position (operation position) of the lever 12 is disposed in the vicinity of the lever 12.
  • the controller 10 sends a command signal to the actuator 67 based on the detection signal of the position detection sensor 66, and the actuator 67 positions the stopper 68 in response to the command signal.
  • the position where the pedal 13 urged upward by the spring 64 presses against the stopper 68 is the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 in a state where the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set by the lever 12 at that time.
  • the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is also increased through the arm 16 and the shifter 9.
  • the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 in the state where the pedal 13 is in the non-depressed position is set.
  • the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 increases from a value set by the lever 12 to a value corresponding to the depressing amount of the pedal 13.
  • the pressure contact degree of the braking plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turning is the tilt angle of the steering lever 11 in the range of T2 to Tmax as described above. It depends on the setting of T.
  • the side clutch 6 on the inner side of the turn is disconnected, but if the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set by the lever 12, the side brake 7 drives the drive train 3 on the outer side of the turn via the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • the drive train 3 inside the turning which is driven by receiving a part of the force is braked.
  • a situation where the pedal 13 is depressed is considered to be a case where the rotational speed of the axle 4 inside the turn falls below the assumed speed, that is, rather than applying the side brake 7 further in this state, This is a case where it is desired to increase the rotational speed of the axle 4 on the inside of the turn until the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased to increase the amount of power transmitted from the drive train 3 on the outside of the turn to the drive train 3 on the inside of the turn.
  • a check mechanism 18 as shown in FIGS. 16 to 18 is provided.
  • the structure of the check mechanism 18 will be described with reference to the embodiments shown in FIGS.
  • the check mechanism 18 includes a pusher 54 provided on the fan-shaped arm 52, a regulating member 55, a pivot member 56, and the like.
  • a regulating member 55 is disposed in the vicinity of the steering lever 11, and this regulating member 55 is linked to the pedal 13 via the link mechanism 60, so that the regulating member 55 is interlocked with the depression of the pedal 13. Is switched to a state in which the tilting of the steering lever 11 is restricted.
  • a pivot member 56 is installed in the vicinity of the steering lever 11.
  • the pivot member 56 is formed by interposing a vertical pivot 56a between a pair of upper and lower horizontal plate-like brackets 56b and 56b fixed to the wall or the like of the cab of the vehicle.
  • the restricting member 55 has a vertical boss 55c.
  • the restriction member 55 has a pair of upper and lower horizontal plate-like restriction portions 55a and 55b extending in parallel to one side from the boss 55c.
  • the restricting member 55 has a horizontal plate-like arm 55d extending from the boss 55c to the other side of the boss 55c, that is, on the opposite side of the restricting portions 55a and 55b via the pivot 56a. Yes.
  • the steering lever 11 is in the straight advance position.
  • the pusher 54 is formed as an extension part 52b that extends horizontally, and a pusher 54 that can be pushed against the restriction part 55a or 55b of the restriction member 55 is provided at the tip part.
  • the positions of the extension part 52b and the pusher 54 when the steering lever 11 is arranged at the straight-ahead position are just intermediate positions between the upper and lower restricting parts 55a in the vertical direction.
  • the extending portion 52b and the pusher 54 are rotated upward to turn the vehicle to the left.
  • the extending portion 52b and the pressing element 54 are configured to rotate downward.
  • the upper restricting portion 55a is for restricting the rotation of the steering lever 11 from the straight traveling position to the right
  • the lower restricting portion 55b is the steering lever from the straight traveling position to the left.
  • the relationship between the left and right turning directions of the steering lever 11 and the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b may be reversed.
  • An outer wire receiver 59 is installed in the vicinity of the arm 55 d of the regulating member 55, and one end portion of the outer wire 58 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 59, while the other end portion of the outer wire 58 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 63. ing.
  • An inner wire 57 is inserted into the outer wire 58.
  • the inner wire 57 extends from one end of the outer wire 58 fixed to the outer wire receiver 59, and the one end 57a is pivotally connected to the tip of the arm 55d.
  • the inner wire 57 extends from the other end portion of the outer wire 58 fixed to the outer wire receiver 63, and the other end portion 57 b is pivotally connected to the arm 13 b of the pedal 13.
  • the inner wire 57, the outer wire 58, and the outer wire receivers 59 and 63 constitute the link mechanism 60 that links the restricting member 55 and the pedal 13.
  • the outer wire 58 is disposed above the outer wire 62.
  • the inner wire 57 is the Although arranged above, this vertical relationship may be reversed. Further, the end portions 57b and 61b of both the inner wires 57 and 61 are pivoted to one side of the arm 13b, but these may be pivoted to the other side of the arm 13b, or the end portions of the inner wire 57 57b may be connected to one side of the arm 13b, and the end 61b of the inner wire 61 may be connected to the other side of the arm 13b.
  • FIGS. 16 to 18 show the restriction release position X and the restriction position Y of the upper and lower restriction portions 55a and 55b.
  • the pusher 54 is moved upward or downward with the steering lever 11 while the fan-shaped arm 52 rotates.
  • the steering lever 11 can be rotated until the tilt angle T reaches the maximum angle Tmax. Therefore, the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn can be operated in the braking state.
  • the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 reaches the range of T2 to Tmax and the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn is applied.
  • the restriction member 55 is rotated by the depression of the pedal 13, but the upper restriction part 55a or the lower restriction part 55b (for example, the control member 55).
  • the upper restricting portion 55 a) cannot reach the restricting position Y by being blocked by the extending portion 52 b and the pusher 54 of the fan-shaped arm 52.
  • the depression position D corresponds to the maximum joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 in the range set by the lever 12 (joint pressure obtained by placing the lever 12 at the maximum joint pressure setting position Cmax).
  • the position is set in a range from the position (the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 defined by the stopper 68 positioned at the lowest position of the vertical movable range) to the maximum depressed position.
  • the depression position D of the pedal 13 set in this way is adopted.
  • the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are in the restriction releasing position X, and the steering lever 11 is tilted for turning the vehicle, and the tilt angle T is set to T2.
  • the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turning acts (becomes a braking state). From this state, even if the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D in order to increase the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the pusher 54 and the extending portion 52 b of the fan-shaped arm 52 prevent the restriction member 55 from rotating. Thus, the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b cannot be rotated to the restricting position Y, and therefore the pedal 13 cannot be depressed to the depressed position D.
  • the steering lever 11 when the value of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is within the range that can be set by the lever 12, the steering lever 11 can be tilted to the range from the tilt angle T2 to the maximum angle Tmax. Thus, the side brake 7 inside the turn can be applied.
  • the restricting member 55 rotates the fan-shaped arm 52 and the pusher 54 in the check mechanism 18. By blocking the movement, the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is restricted until T2 is reached, and the side brake 7 does not work.
  • the fan-shaped arm 52 and the pusher 54 are regulated in the check mechanism 18.
  • the pedal 13 is restricted until reaching the stepping position D, and the stepping-on pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 that attempts to increase beyond the range that can be set by the lever 12 is applied. It cannot be increased to the value of the bonding pressure corresponding to the position D.
  • control mechanism 18 is provided in the steering lever 11 and the control mechanism 18 is linked to the pedal 13 via the link mechanism 60.
  • the check mechanism 18 and the link mechanism 60 simultaneously perform the tilting operation of the steering lever 11 for applying the side brake 7 and the depression operation of the pedal 13 for increasing the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 beyond the set range. It is configured to function so as to restrict one operation when trying to break.
  • FIGS. 19 to 26 show other embodiments (second to fifth embodiments) relating to such an association structure.
  • FIGS. 19 to 26 show other embodiments (second to fifth embodiments) relating to such an association structure.
  • the structure in which the position of the stopper 68 that defines the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 is controlled by the actuator 67 based on the detection of the operation position of the lever 12 is that of the first embodiment of FIGS. Is the same.
  • a fan-shaped arm 72 extends from the boss 11 a of the steering lever 11, and the pusher 53 a of the valve switch 53 is fitted when the steering lever 11 is set to the straight movement position, as in the above-described fan-shaped arm 52.
  • the detent groove 72a configured to be formed in a part of the arc edge of the sector arm 72, and the link rod of the link mechanism 50 connected to the cam operating arm 46 for relief pressure control of the relief valve 33
  • An end 47 a of 47 is pivotally connected to the fan-shaped arm 72.
  • a restriction groove 72 b is formed in the other part of the arc edge of the sector arm 72.
  • a regulating member 74 that is rotatable around a pivot 73 that extends in the front-rear horizontal direction parallel to the pivot 51 as a pivot fulcrum of the steering lever 11 is disposed.
  • the restricting member 74 has a boss 74a mounted on the outer peripheral surface of the pivot 73, and a restricting arm 74b and a connecting arm 74c are extended from the boss 74a.
  • a roller 75 is pivotally supported at the tip of the regulation arm 74 b, and the roller 75 is fitted into the regulation groove 72 b of the sector arm 72 by rotating the regulation arm 74 b toward the sector arm 72. .
  • a pushing member 81 disposed adjacent to the pedal 13 is pivotally supported on the pivot 70.
  • the pushing member 81 has a boss 81 a, which is attached to the pivot 70 so as to be adjacent to the boss 13 a of the pedal 13.
  • a pressing rod 81b extends from the boss 81a.
  • the pushing rod 81b extends in the radial direction of the pivot 70, then bends and extends in parallel to the pivot 70, and this extended portion is disposed immediately before the arm 13b of the pedal 13. Yes.
  • the pushing member 81 is urged by urging means (not shown) so that the pushing rod 81b is pressed against the front end of the arm 13b.
  • a connecting arm 81 c is formed on the push member 81 so as to extend from the boss 81 a in the other radial direction of the pivot 70.
  • An outer wire receiver 78 is disposed in the vicinity of the connecting arm 74 c of the restricting member 74, and an outer wire receiver 79 is disposed in the vicinity of the connecting arm 81 c of the pushing member 81.
  • One end of the outer wire 77 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 78, and the other end of the outer wire 77 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 79.
  • An inner wire 76 is inserted into the outer wire 77, and one end 76 a of the inner wire 76 extending from one end of the outer wire 77 fixed to the outer wire receiver 78 is pivotally connected to the tip of the connecting arm 74 c and fixed to the outer wire receiver 79.
  • the other end 76b of the inner wire 76 extending from the other end of the outer wire 77 is pivotally connected to the tip of the connecting arm 81c.
  • the inner wire 76, the outer wire 77, and the outer wire receivers 78 and 79 constitute a link mechanism 80 that links the control member 74 on the steering lever 11 side and the pushing member 81 on the pedal 13 side.
  • the restricting groove 72b has a certain width in the direction of the arc edge of the fan-shaped arm 72, and the roller 75 when fitted into the restricting groove 72b is rotated by the tilt of the steering lever 11 from the straight position. Accordingly, the relative position in the regulation groove 72b can be moved.
  • the width of the restriction groove 72b is such that when the tilting angle T of the steering lever 11 tilted to the left or right from the straight traveling position reaches an angle in the range of T1 to T2, the roller 75 has the width of the restriction groove 72b. It is set so that the fan-shaped arm 72 cannot be rotated any more after reaching the end.
  • the restriction groove 72b of the sector arm 72 has a roller 75 at the tip of the restriction arm 74b. Deviate from the rotation trajectory.
  • the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D, the roller 75 is pressed against the arc edge of the sector arm 72 outside the restriction groove 72b, and the rotation of the restriction member 74 is restricted.
  • the depression of the pedal 13 is limited in the range up to the depression position D, and the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 cannot be increased to that extent.
  • the steering lever 11 is provided with a check mechanism 18 similar to that of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, while an arm 82 separate from the lever 12 and the pedal 13 is provided.
  • the link mechanism 14 provided and connected to the arm 16 linked to the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 is interposed between the arm 82 and the arm 16.
  • the arm 82 is mechanically linked to the lever 12 and the pedal 13, and rotates by the operation of the lever 12 to rotate the arm 16 via the link mechanism 14 (changes the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8).
  • the lever 12 is rotated by depressing the pedal 13 and is then connected via the link mechanism 14 to the arm 16. Is rotated.
  • a boss 82 a is formed at the base end of the arm 82.
  • the lever 12 is formed with a pressing rod 12b extending from the boss 12a.
  • the pushing bar 12b extends in the radial direction of the pivot 71, then bends and extends in parallel to the pivot 71, and this extending portion is disposed immediately in front of the arm 82.
  • the outer wire receiver 87 is disposed in the vicinity of the arm 82, and the end of the outer wire 62 of the link mechanism 14 and the end of the outer wire 58 of the link mechanism 60 are fixed to the outer wire receiver 87.
  • An inner wire 61 of the link mechanism 14 inserted through the outer wire 62 and connected to the position control arm 16 of the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 extends from the outer wire receiver 87, and its end 61 a is pivotally connected to the arm 82.
  • the inner wire 57 of the link mechanism 60 inserted through the outer wire 58 and connected to the arm 55 d of the restricting member 55 extends from the outer wire receiver 87, and its end 57 b is pivotally connected to the arm 82.
  • one end 83a of the inner wire 83 is pivotally connected to the arm 82, and the other end 83b of the inner wire 83 is pivotally connected to the arm 13b of the pedal 13.
  • the inner wire 83 is inserted through the outer wire 84.
  • One end of the outer wire 84 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 63 in the vicinity of the arm 13 b of the pedal 13.
  • the other end of the outer wire 84 is fixed to an outer wire receiver 12 c formed on the lever 12.
  • the inner wire 83, the outer wire 84, and the outer wire receivers 12c and 63 constitute the link mechanism 85 that links the arm 82 and the pedal 13.
  • a spring 64 for biasing the pedal 13 upward is interposed between the arm 13b of the pedal 13 and the outer wire receiver 63.
  • the urging force of the spring 64 is transmitted to the arm 82 via the link mechanism 85, and the arm 82 is urged to rotate forward, and is pressed against the pressing rod 12b of the lever 12 disposed immediately before. Has been.
  • a stopper 86 is provided that delimits the upper end position in the rotation range of the pedal 13 biased upward by the spring 64.
  • the stopper 86 used in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is fixed.
  • the pedal 13 when pressed against the stopper 86 is disposed at a position where the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to a minimum value (for example, 0).
  • the lever 12 when the lever 12 is used to increase the set value of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the lever 12 is rotated backward.
  • the pressing rod 12b pushes the arm 82 backward against the biasing force of the spring 64.
  • the rearward rotation of the lever 12 is also transmitted to the restricting member 55 via the link mechanism 60, and the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b of the restricting member 55 are rotated.
  • the restriction portions 55a and 55b are, for example, at the restriction release position X shown in the figure, and the sector arm 52 is turned. Is not restricted so that the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn does not work.
  • the arm 82 rotates backward together with the lever 12 to push the inner wire 83 of the link mechanism 85 rearward.
  • the outer wire receiver 12c is integrally formed with the lever 12
  • the inner wire 83 moves and bends together with the outer wire 84. Therefore, the inner wire 83 does not move relative to the outer wire 84, and the extension length of the inner wire 83 from the outer wire receiver 63 to the arm 13b of the pedal 13 does not change. For this reason, the pedal 13 does not move in the position pressed against the stopper 86. That is, in this embodiment, the link mechanism 14 connected to the arm 16 is connected to an arm 82 different from the pedal 13, and the pedal 13 applies the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 during operation of the lever 12.
  • the position is held at a position where it is pressed against the stopper 86, which corresponds to the operation position set to the minimum value (eg, 0).
  • the position of pressing against the stopper 86 is always the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 regardless of the operation of the lever 12.
  • the arm 82 moves rearward away from the pushing rod 12b of the lever 12 in a state of being fixed at the set position (at the notch of the guide groove 19 described above) and further rotated rearward.
  • the rearward rotation of the arm 82 is transmitted to the arm 16 via the link mechanism 14 to operate the shifter 9 in a direction that increases the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, while Is also transmitted to rotate the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b.
  • the depressed pedal 13 reaches the depressed position D
  • the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b of the restricting member 55 reach the restricting position Y, restricting the rotation of the fan-shaped arm 52 of the steering lever 11, and turning inside
  • the side brake 7 is not effective.
  • the operation position of the lever 12 is changed in the range from the minimum joining pressure setting position Cmin to the maximum joining pressure setting position Cmax, the movement of the lever 12 is transmitted to the regulating member 55 via the arm 82 and the link mechanism 60.
  • the regulating member 55 rotates, as long as the pedal 13 is placed in the non-depressed position, the upper / lower regulating portions 55a and 55b are, for example, in the state of the regulation release position X and to the regulation position Y.
  • the rotation of the fan-shaped arm 52 and the pressing element 54 is not restricted.
  • the restricting member 55 also rotates.
  • the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b cannot be rotated to the restricting position Y by being blocked by the extending portion 52a and the pusher 54 of the fan-shaped arm 52.
  • Due to the rotation restriction of the restriction member 55 the backward rotation of the arm 82 is also restricted, and the pedal 13 cannot be lowered to the depression position D via the link mechanism 85, and the pedal 13 is brought to the depression position D.
  • the arm 16 cannot be rotated via the link mechanism 14 until the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased to a corresponding value.
  • an increase in the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 due to the depression of the pedal 13 is restricted.
  • FIGS. 23 and 24 a fourth embodiment shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 will be described. Also in this embodiment, as in the third embodiment of FIGS. 21 and 22, an arm 82 separate from the lever 12 and the pedal 13 is used, and the arm 82 is connected to the arm 16 via the link mechanism 14. In addition, it is connected to the restriction member 55 of the check mechanism 18 via the link mechanism 60.
  • the boss 12 a of the lever 12, the boss 82 a of the arm 82, and the boss 13 a of the pedal 13 are mounted adjacent to the horizontal pivot 70. Is disposed between the lever 12 and the pedal 13.
  • a pressing rod 12 c is extended from the boss 12 a, and a portion that is bent and extends horizontally to the left and right is disposed immediately before the arm 82.
  • a pressing rod 13c extends from the boss 13a in the radial direction of the pivot 70, and the pressing rod 13c is bent and extends in the horizontal direction toward the tip thereof.
  • the extension part is shifted in the vertical direction with respect to the extension part in the left-right direction of the pressing rod 12c immediately before the arm 82, that is, the pressing rods 12c and 13c rotate with respect to each other. Arranged so as not to interfere.
  • a spring stopper 88 is disposed in the vicinity of the arm 13b of the pedal 13, and a spring 64 is interposed between the spring stopper 88 and the arm 13b, so that the pedal 13 is brought into a position where the pedal 13 is pressed against the stopper 86. It is energizing upward.
  • the arm 82 is biased so as to rotate forward by a biasing means (not shown) different from the spring 64, thereby pressing against the pressing rods 12 c and 13 c arranged immediately before the arm 82. ing.
  • FIGS. 25 to 28 a fan-shaped arm 90 is extended from the boss 11a at the base end of the steering lever 11 mounted on the front and rear horizontal pivot 51 to the left and right sides.
  • a detent groove 90a is formed in part, and the pressing element 53a of the valve switch 53 is fitted into the detent groove 90a when the steering lever 11 is in the linear position.
  • the valve switch 53 is switched off when the pressing element 53a is inserted into the detent groove 90a, so that the directional control valve 32 is set to the neutral position N.
  • the directional control valve 32 is turned to the left turning position L or the right turning position R.
  • Whether the direction control valve 32 is set to the turning position L or the right turning position R is determined by detecting whether the steering lever 11 is rotated leftward or rightward from the straight traveling position. (It may be determined based on detection of the rotation direction of the cam operation arm 46).
  • an arm 91 extends from the boss 11 a of the steering lever 11 to the left and right sides, and a push pin 91 a protrudes from the arm 91.
  • upper and lower arms 93 and 94 are pivotally supported on the pivot 51, and the arms 93 and 94 are extended from the pivot 51 on the other left and right sides, that is, on the same side as the arm 91. Yes.
  • a push pin 91a of the arm 91 there are arranged between the upper and lower arms 93 and 94, there are arranged a push pin 91a of the arm 91 and a fixed pin 92 which is fixed in position regardless of the rotation of the steering lever 11.
  • a spring 95 is interposed between the tip portions of the upper and lower arms 93 and 94.
  • the upper and lower arms 93 and 94 are urged toward each other by the spring 95, that is, urged in a direction in which the pressing pin 91a and the fixing pin 92 are sandwiched therebetween.
  • the steering lever 11 is tilted to the right from the straight traveling position (increasing the right tilting angle RT), thereby turning the upper arm 93 upward and moving the steering lever 11 to the left from the straight traveling position.
  • the lower arm 93 is rotated downward.
  • the arm 91 rotates integrally with the steering lever 11, and as shown in FIG. 26, when the steering lever 11 is rotated rightward from the straight position, the push pin 91a of the arm 91 is moved upward.
  • the arm 93 is pushed upward.
  • the fixed pin 92 whose position is fixed is located at a position where the steering lever 11 is in the straight traveling position so that the lower arm 94 does not rotate upward following the upper arm 93.
  • the arm 94 is kept.
  • the push pin 91a of the arm 91 pushes down the lower arm 94 downward.
  • the fixed pin 92 is fixed so that the upper arm 93 follows the lower arm 94 and does not rotate downward so that the steering lever 11 is in the straight position.
  • the arm 93 is kept.
  • a wire member made of an inner wire 98 and an outer wire 99 is used as the link mechanism 50 connected to the cam operation arm 46 for controlling the relief valve 33 of the vehicle steering actuator set 2.
  • the link mechanism 50 shown in FIG. 16 rotates the cam operation arm 46 upward by turning the steering lever 11 to the left, and rotates the cam operation arm 46 downward by rotating the steering lever 11 to the right.
  • the relationship between the turning direction of the steering lever 11 and the turning direction of the cam operation arm 46 is not limited in this way. It is sufficient if the cam operation arm 46 is appropriately rotated based on the rotation of 94.
  • One of the arms 93 and 94 constitutes an outer wire receiver, and the end of the outer wire 99 is fixed.
  • the other of the arms 93 and 94 is connected to the end of the inner wire 98. It is said.
  • an outer wire receiver 94a for fixing the end portion of the outer wire 99 is formed (or fixed) on the lower arm 94, and the end portion 98a of the inner wire 98 extended from the outer wire receiver 94a is disposed on the upper side.
  • the arm 93 is pivotally connected.
  • the outer wire receiver 94a of the lower arm 94 has an end portion of the outer wire 102 inserted through the inner wire 101 connected to the pedal 13, and the inner wire 101 extends from the outer wire receiver 94a.
  • the end 101a is fixed to one of the ends of the restricting member 96 (the lower end in this embodiment).
  • the restriction member 96 is provided with a long hole 96a formed long in the direction between both ends of the restriction member 96 (substantially in the vertical direction in the present embodiment).
  • a restriction pin 93a to be provided is inserted.
  • a spring 97 is provided between the other of the ends of the restricting member 96 (the upper end in the present embodiment) and a part of the vehicle (a part where the position is fixed, for example, a part of the wall of the cab or the instrument panel). It is installed.
  • the steering lever 11 in the present embodiment in which the arms 93 and 94, the spring 95, and the like are provided as urging means for returning the steering lever 11 to the straight position, is used for increasing the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • a check mechanism for preventing the depression of the pedal 13 and the operation of the side clutch 7 from being performed at the same time a check mechanism 18B including a restricting member 96 and a spring 97 is provided.
  • the restriction member 96 of the check mechanism 18B is structured to be linked to the pedal 13.
  • the link mechanism 100 includes an inner wire 101 and an outer wire 102.
  • One end of the outer wire 102 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 94a of the lower arm 94, and the other end is fixed to the outer wire receiver 63 in the vicinity of the arm 13b of the pedal 13.
  • the inner wire 101 is inserted into the outer wire 102, the end 101 a of the inner wire 101 extending upward from the outer wire receiver 94 a is locked to the lower end of the restricting member 96, and the end of the inner wire 101 extending from the outer wire receiver 63.
  • 101b is pivotally connected to the arm 13b.
  • the link mechanism 14 including the inner wire 61, the outer wire 62, and the like is interposed between the arm 13 b and the arm 16 of the pedal 13. .
  • the position of the stopper 68 that defines the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 according to the setting of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 at the lever 12 is determined. It is possible to change.
  • a fixed stopper 86 is provided, which is related to the setting of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 at the lever 12.
  • the check mechanism 18B in the present embodiment is configured so that the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 obtained in the operation range of the lever 12 from the minimum joint pressure setting position Cmin to the maximum joint pressure setting position Cmax Regardless of whether or not the clutch 7 is operated, it can be obtained.
  • the restricting member 96 in the check mechanism 18B has an elongated hole 96a in the vertical direction, and a restricting pin 93a projecting from the upper arm 93 extends along the elongated hole 96a in the vertical direction. And is slidably inserted.
  • the end 101a of the inner wire 101 is locked to the lower end, as described above, and one end of the spring 97 is engaged with the upper end. It has been stopped.
  • the other end of the spring 97 is locked to a portion (for example, a wall of a cab) fixed in the vehicle.
  • the restricting member 96 moves up and down according to the movement of the link mechanism 100 and the movement of the arm 93 or 94, and the spring 97 expands and contracts according to the up and down movement of the restricting member 96. Allow vertical movement.
  • the upper and lower arms 93 and 94 are in a position corresponding to the straight position of the steering lever 11, and the extension length of the inner wire 101 from the outer wire receiver 94a to the lower end of the regulating member 96 is such that the arms 93 and 94 are in this position.
  • the restriction member 96 is at the uppermost position in the range of the vertical movement, the spring 97 is in the most compressed state, and the restriction pin 93a is in contact with the lower end of the long hole 96a.
  • the lower arm 94 rotates, so that the outer wire 102 moves together with the inner wire 101, while the pedal 13 is depressed.
  • the outer wire 102 is left as it is, and only the inner wire 101 moves by being pulled by the arm 13 b of the pedal 13.
  • the distance between the restriction pin 93a and the upper end of the long hole 96a is simply to lower the pedal 13 to the depressed position D.
  • the amount of lowering of the regulating member 96 due to the movement of the inner wire 101 is not sufficient, and therefore, the pedal 13 cannot be lowered to the depressed position D.
  • the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left and the side brake 7L is applied, an increase in the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 when the pedal 13 is depressed is suppressed.
  • FIG. 3 is also a diagram showing the internal structure of the transmission 1A or 1B, and is used to explain these embodiments. Further, the members and parts indicated by the same reference numerals as those used in the embodiments described so far are the same or have the same functions as the members and parts in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted. .
  • the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 can be manually adjusted by adjusting the amount of depression of the pedal 13 by an operator, for example, as shown in FIG.
  • the steering actuator for controlling the left shifter 5L is the steering actuator SAL
  • the steering actuator for controlling the right shifter 5R is the steering actuator SAR.
  • the steering actuator SA is used.
  • the transmissions 1A and 1B include an auxiliary clutch actuator AA as an actuator for automatically controlling the position of the shifter 9 for the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • the auxiliary clutch actuator AA has an electric motor as shown in FIG.
  • An actuator (electric actuator) 141 is used.
  • the transmission 1A includes an actuator control system having a hydraulic circuit structure similar to that of the steering actuator set 2 described above. ) Is the steering actuator SAL / SAR. In the transmission 1A, these are referred to as hydraulic cylinders 34 (34L and 34R) as steering actuators SA (SAL and SAR).
  • the transmission 1B includes the same steering actuators SAL / SAR as the electric actuator 141 used as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, and the steering actuator SAL / SAR as the steering actuator SAL / SAR.
  • the actuators 141L and 141R will be referred to.
  • the transmission 1A will be described with reference to FIG. 3, FIG. 29 to FIG.
  • the rotation shaft 17 extending in the front-rear direction is pivotally supported at the rear portion of the transmission case 20 so as to penetrate inside and outside.
  • An auxiliary clutch electric actuator 141 serving as an auxiliary clutch actuator AA is provided on the outer end of the rotation shaft 17 outside (rearward) the transmission case 20.
  • the hydraulic cylinders 34L and 34R as the steering actuators SAL and SAR and the electric actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA are controlled based on a command signal from the controller 10.
  • a non-operating state of the steering actuator SA the state where the corresponding shifter 5 is set to the maximum sliding position on the inner side and the side clutch 6 is joined is referred to as a non-operating state of the steering actuator SA.
  • a state where the shifter 5 is set to slide slightly outward from the maximum sliding position on the inner side is defined as the operating state of the steering actuator SA.
  • the state in which the shifter 9 is set to the maximum sliding position on the clutch separating side to separate the auxiliary clutch 8 is referred to as the non-operating state of the auxiliary clutch actuator AA.
  • the state in which the shifter 9 is set to slide to the clutch engagement side even a little from the maximum sliding position is defined as the operating state of the auxiliary clutch actuator AA.
  • the vehicle includes a steering lever 11, an auxiliary clutch automatic control switch 112 (hereinafter simply referred to as “switch 112”), and an auxiliary clutch engagement force setting dial 113 ( Hereinafter, the dial 113 is simply provided), and a potentiometer 11p, a switch 112, and a dial 113 provided at the base of the steering lever 11 to detect the operation position of the steering lever 11 are connected to the controller 10. It is provided as an input means.
  • the detection means provided in each of the potentiometer 11p, the switch 112, and the dial 113 detects the operation positions of the respective operation tools, and detection signals 11s, 112s, and 113s indicating the operation positions are input to the controller 10. It is supposed to be.
  • the left and right axles 4L and 4R are provided with rotation speed sensors 114L and 114R for detecting the respective rotation speeds, and detection signals 114Ls and 114Rs of the respective rotation speed sensors 114L and 114R are input to the controller 10. It is supposed to be.
  • the controller 10 in response to the input detection signals 11s, 112s, 113s, 114Ls, and 114Rs, command contents for the hydraulic cylinders 34L and 34R and the auxiliary clutch electric actuator 141 are determined, and a command signal based on the determination is sent. It is something that is emitted.
  • the potentiometer 11p outputs a signal 11s having a value corresponding to the tilt angle and direction, and the signal 11s is input to the controller 10.
  • the controller 10 transmits a command signal 32Ls to the direction control valve 32 to excite the solenoid 32a so as to correspond to this signal 11s, and the direction control valve 32 is set to the “L” position so that the piston rod of the steering actuator 34L.
  • the command signal 33s is transmitted to the relief valve 33, and the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 for defining the piston rod extension amount (that is, defining the sliding position of the shifter 5L) is determined.
  • the signal 11s generated by the potentiometer 11p is input to the controller 10, and the controller 10 corresponds to the signal 11s.
  • the command signal 32Rs is transmitted to the direction control valve 32 to excite the solenoid 32a, the direction control valve 32 is set to the “R” position, the piston rod of the steering actuator 34R is extended, and the command signal 33s is supplied to the relief valve 33. This is transmitted to determine the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 for defining the piston rod extension amount (that is, defining the sliding position of the shifter 5R).
  • a valve switch 53 as shown in FIGS. 1, 10, 16 or the like may be provided.
  • the switch 112 is a switching operation means for deciding whether or not to perform automatic control of the auxiliary clutch 8 (whether or not to perform manual control), and an “ON” position for performing the automatic control, It is switched to two positions, “OFF” position, in which automatic control is not performed (joint force F of auxiliary clutch 8 is manually set).
  • the dial 113 is a means for setting the joining force when the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is manually set, that is, when the switch 112 is set to the “OFF” position.
  • the dial 113 can be rotated from a “0” position where the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is 0 (that is, when the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged) to an “Fmax” position where the joining force F is the maximum value Fmax.
  • the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set according to the moving position. As the position of the dial 113 is closer to the “Fmax” position, a larger bonding force F is set.
  • the dial 113 is set to one of these setting positions, so that the joining force F is set stepwise.
  • the joining force F can be changed in a stepless manner, and the dial 113 can be joined in correspondence with an arbitrary turning position of the dial 113 that can be turned steplessly from the “0” position to the “Fmax” position.
  • the force F may be set.
  • the switch 112 and the dial 113 are installed on an instrument panel that displays a vehicle speed and an engine speed on a dashboard provided in front of the steering lever 11 in the vehicle, for example. It is possible. Furthermore, it is conceivable to install an auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117 indicating the actual value (current value) of the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 as shown in FIG. 41 on such an instrument panel. The operator can visually check the current value of the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 that changes every moment by automatic control with the auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117, but display means having any structure may be used.
  • the bar graph indicates what percentage of the maximum bonding force Fmax the actual value of the bonding force F is.
  • any display method may be used as long as the operator can recognize the current joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8.
  • positioning operation means for the left and right shifters 5L and 5R an operation means for switching automatic control / manual control of the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8, and an operation means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8 when setting the manual control
  • the structure is not limited to the steering lever 11, switch 112, and dial 113 described above, and any structure may be used as long as the functions required for each can be ensured.
  • the switch 112 may be replaced with the lever 12 and the dial 113 may be replaced with the pedal 13.
  • a dial 113A as an operating means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8 at the time of manual control setting is placed in front of the upper end portion of the grip portion 11b of the steering lever 11.
  • the dial 113A includes a fixed portion 113a fixed to the grip portion 11b of the steering lever 11, and an annular direction around the shaft center of the steering lever 11 provided around the fixed portion 113a.
  • the rotary portion 113b is formed with a knob portion 113c so that the operator can rotate it with a thumb snap.
  • the fixed portion 113a is printed with a scale indicating the frequency of the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4 in this embodiment), and the operator can turn the rotating portion via the knob portion 113c. 13b is rotated in the R direction, and the index printed on the rotating portion 113b is adjusted to one of the scales of the fixed portion, so that the frequency of the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is arbitrarily set.
  • the electric actuator 141 mounted on the outside (rear) of the mission case 20 has an electric motor 142 that can rotate forward and backward as its drive source.
  • the output shaft of the electric motor 142 is a worm 144.
  • a gear case 144 is connected to the electric motor 142, and the gear case 143 supports the outer end portion of the rotating shaft 17, and is perpendicular to the worm 144 and the rotating shaft.
  • a counter shaft 145 extending in parallel with 17 is supported.
  • a worm wheel 146 and a pinion 147 are fixed to the counter shaft 145, and the worm wheel 146 meshes with the worm 144.
  • a sector gear 148 is fixed to the outer end of the rotating shaft 17 and meshes with the pinion 147.
  • the controller 10 rotates the electric motor 142 based on the steering lever 11, the switch 112, the dial 113, and the input signals 11s, 112s, 113s, 114Ls and 114Rs from the rotation speed sensors 114L and 114R, which are the aforementioned input means.
  • the direction and amount of rotation are determined, and a command signal 142s is issued to the electric motor 142 as necessary.
  • the rotation of the electric motor 142 is transmitted to the rotation shaft 17 via the worm 144, the worm wheel 146, the counter shaft 145, the pinion 146, and the sector gear 148, and the cam surface 17a as described above based on the rotation of the rotation shaft 17 is transmitted.
  • the sliding position of the shifter 9 for controlling the auxiliary clutch 8 is determined according to the tilt angle.
  • the command signal 142s is, for example, a voltage set to rotate the electric motor 142 to a target rotation position. This voltage is against the biasing force of the spring 9e of the shifter 9 and the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 and A torque sufficient to slide the fork 9b to the target sliding position is applied to the rotating shaft 17. When this voltage becomes zero, the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is arranged at the maximum sliding position on the clutch separating side by the biasing force of the spring 9e.
  • the state in which the electric motor 142 is in the non-driven state so that the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is disposed at the maximum sliding position on the clutch disengagement side corresponds to the inoperative state.
  • the operating state corresponds to the operating state.
  • the electric actuator 141 is used as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, while the same actuator as the electric actuator 141 is used as the steering actuators SAL and SAR.
  • the controller 10 steers based on the input signals 111 s, 112 s, 113 s, 114 Ls, 114 Rs from the potentiometer 11 p of the steering lever 11 base, which is the input means, the switch 112, the dial 113, and the rotation speed sensors 114L, 14R.
  • the direction and amount of rotation of the electric motor 142 of the electric actuators 141L and 141R are determined, and command signals 142Ls and 142Rs are issued to the electric motors 142 as necessary.
  • the rotation of the electric motor 142 of each of the steering electric actuators 141L and 141R is transmitted to the rotation shaft 30 via the worm 144, the worm wheel 146, the counter shaft 145, the pinion 146, and the sector gear 148.
  • the sliding position of the shifter 5 based on the rotation is determined.
  • the command signals 142Ls and 142Rs are, for example, voltages set so as to rotate the respective electric motors 142 to the target rotation positions. These voltages are against the urging force of the springs 5a of the shifters 5L and 5R. A torque sufficient to slide the shifter 5 to a target sliding position is applied to the rotating shaft 30. When this voltage becomes zero, the shifter 5 is arranged at the maximum sliding position on the inner side by the biasing force of the spring 5a.
  • the steering actuators SAL and SAR for controlling the left and right shifters 5L and 5R and the auxiliary clutch actuator AA are all electric actuators 141, so that the steering is compared with the steering control system 1A. Therefore, the hydraulic pump 31, the directional control valve 32, and the variable relief valve 33 that constitute the hydraulic circuit for controlling the actuator for use are not required, which is advantageous for making the actuator set 2 compact.
  • FIG. 35 A control flowchart executed by the controller 10 in the transmissions 1A and 1B having the above-described configuration is shown in FIG. 35, which will be described.
  • the controller 10 reads the input signal 112s from the switch 112, and determines whether the control of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the automatic mode (whether the switch 112 is set to the “ON” position) (step). S01).
  • the automatic mode is not set (the switch 112 is set to the “OFF” position) (NO in step S01)
  • the input signal 113s from the dial 113 is read, and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 114 is set to the dial 113.
  • the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is controlled so as to be the set value Fs corresponding to the set position.
  • the setting value Fs is 0 when the dial 13 is set to the “0” position.
  • the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is deactivated, and the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is disengaged from the clutch.
  • the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged at the maximum sliding position on the side (see the dial 13 and the shifter 9 shown in FIG. 1).
  • the setting value Fs when the dial 113 is set at the “Fmax” position corresponds to the maximum value Fmax of the bonding force F.
  • the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is activated, the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is arranged at the maximum sliding position on the clutch engagement side, and the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 9 is maximized (see FIG. 10). See shifter 9 shown).
  • the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is set in the operating state, and the auxiliary clutch The joining force F of 8 is set to a predetermined value Fv (a value greater than 0) set for the automatic mode (step S03).
  • Fv a value greater than 0
  • the input signal 11s of the potentiometer 11p is read.
  • the tilt angle T is 0, that is, when the steering lever 11 is in the straight traveling position (YES in step S04)
  • the steering electronic control actuators SAL and SAR are deactivated (step S05).
  • the left and right shifters 5L and 5R are arranged at the maximum inner sliding positions (the left shifter 5L is the sliding right end position and the right shifter 5R is the sliding left end position), and the both side clutches 6L and 6R are joined. Is done.
  • the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to a predetermined value Fv.
  • Step S07 and S13 the operating amount of the steering electronic control actuator SA (if the hydraulic cylinder 34, the amount of expansion of the piston rod, if the actuator 141 with electric motor, the voltage applied to the electric motor 142 Amount) is determined, and the shifter 5 on the inner side of the turning is arranged at the sliding position corresponding to the operation amount.
  • the steering lever is used to determine the rotational speed of the axle 4 inside the turn or the ratio of the rotational speed of the axle 4 inside the turn to the axle 4 outside the turn. 11 is compared with the actual value Sa calculated from the input signals 114Ls and 114Rs from the rotational speed sensors 114L and 114R, and the difference between the actual value Sa and the target value St is compared. If there is, control is performed to adjust the amount of torque transmitted between the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R by adjusting the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 to reduce or eliminate the difference.
  • step S08 when there is no difference between the actual measurement value Sa and the target value St during the turning of the vehicle (including the case where the difference is within the allowable range) (YES in step S08), the vehicle has the target turning radius. Since the vehicle is turning, the current operating state of the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is maintained, and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is maintained at the current value (step S09).
  • the operation amount of the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is reduced, that is, the voltage as the command signal 142s applied to the electric motor 142 of the actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is reduced, and the shifter The fork shaft 9a is slid to the clutch disengagement side, the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is reduced (step S11), and the transmission torque from the drive train 3 on the outside of the turn to the drive train 3 on the inside of the turn is reduced. .
  • the rotational speed (rotational speed ratio) of the axle 4 inside the turn is reduced, and the turning radius is reduced to approach the target turning radius.
  • the operation amount of the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is increased, that is, the voltage as the command signal 142s applied to the electric motor 142 of the actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is increased, and the shifter 9
  • the fork shaft 9a is slid to the clutch engagement side, the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased (step S12), and the transmission torque from the outer drive train 3 to the inner drive train 3 is increased.
  • the rotational speed (rotational speed ratio) of the axle 4 inside the turn is increased, and the turning radius is increased to approach the target turning radius.
  • the operation amount of the steering electronic control actuator SA inside the turning is maximized, and the side brake 7 inside the turning is completely applied. (The braking force applied to the drive train 3 and the axle 4 inside the turn is maximized).
  • the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is deactivated and the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged, so that the braking force of the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn applied to the axle 4 on the inside of the turn is applied to the drive train 3 and the axle 4 on the outside of the turn. And the durability of the auxiliary clutch 8 is improved.
  • both the left and right side brakes are applied simultaneously, or a braking force is applied to both axles separately from the left and right side brakes.
  • a method of providing a configured parking brake on a vehicle has been applied.
  • the left and right side brakes are applied simultaneously, the right and left side clutches will be disengaged at the same time (both axles will be in a non-driven state) immediately before the left and right side brakes are applied. This was a factor such as blurring of the posture of the vehicle due to a delay in starting braking.
  • providing a parking brake separately is disadvantageous in terms of cost and downsizing of the transmission.
  • the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the maximum value Fmax, the two drive trains 3L and 3R and the two axles 4L and 4R are completely deflocked, and one of the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R
  • the braking force extends to the other via the auxiliary clutch 8, and both the axles 4L and 4R are braked simultaneously to function as a parking brake.
  • the vehicle equipped with the transmission 1A or 1B according to the present embodiment is provided with a parking brake pedal 115 as shown in FIG. 36 as a parking brake operation tool, and the parking brake switch 115a is turned on depending on whether or not the stepping operation is performed. ⁇ OFF can be switched. Then, a signal 115s indicating ON / OFF of the parking brake switch 115a is input to the controller 10 in the steering control system 1.
  • step S21, ON the controller 10 selects one of the pair of steering electronic control actuators SAL and SAR (in the embodiment of FIG. 37).
  • the steering electronic control actuator SAR is held in a non-actuated state, and the shifter 5 is held at the maximum sliding position on the inner side as described above, and the other (the electronic control actuator for steering in the embodiment shown in FIG. 37).
  • the shifter 5 is placed in the maximum sliding position on the outer side in a full operation state.
  • step S22 the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is operated so that the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 becomes the maximum value Fmax (step S22).
  • the parking brake 115 is not activated (the parking brake switch 115a is OFF)
  • the process proceeds to an ON / OFF detection step (step S01) of the switch 112 in the control flow of FIG.
  • correction control of the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is performed based on detection of the leaning state of the vehicle in the front-rear direction.
  • the vehicle weight is applied to the axle 4 located on the lower side of the sloping ground, and the turning trajectory is assumed especially for the axle 4 inside the turning where the side clutch 6 is disconnected.
  • the axle 4 on the inside of the turn tends to shift backward, which is on the low position side.
  • the axle 4 on the inside of the turn It tends to shift forward. It is considered that the deviation due to the own weight is eliminated by increasing the traveling ability of the axle 4 inside the turn in the traveling direction.
  • the drive train 3 outside the turn via the auxiliary clutch 8 is used. It is conceivable to increase the torque to the drive train 3 inside the turning. Therefore, in the steering control system 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting of the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the automatic mode, when the vehicle is in an inclined state, to correct the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8, The auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is controlled.
  • a tilt sensor 116 that detects a tilt angle (pitch angle) P in the front-rear direction of the vehicle is provided in the vehicle as input means to the controller 10.
  • a detection signal 116 s of the inclination angle P is input from the inclination sensor 116.
  • the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is operated based on the automatic mode ON (YES in step S01), and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to a predetermined value Fv (step S03).
  • the controller 10 reads the input detection signal 116s, and the vehicle inclination angle P is 0 (including a case where the vehicle is at a value within an allowable range that is close to 0 and does not require correction of the bonding force F). Whether or not (step S31).
  • step S31 If it is determined that the vehicle is in a horizontal state (inclination angle P is 0) (YES in step S31), the engagement state of the auxiliary clutch 8 set so that the engagement force F becomes the predetermined value Fv is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to a reading process (step S04) of the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 for the straight traveling or turning control of the vehicle. If it is determined that the vehicle is not in a horizontal state (inclination angle P is not 0) (NO in step S31), controller 10 increases the voltage applied to electric motor 142 of actuator 141 as auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA.
  • a command signal 142s is issued, the shifter 9 is slid, and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased to a value corresponding to the inclination angle P (step S32).
  • the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 that was initially set to the predetermined value Fv is increased to a value corresponding to the inclination angle P
  • the reading process of the inclination angle T of the steering lever 11 for the straight traveling or turning control of the vehicle proceeds to (Step S04).
  • the detection signal 116s from the tilt sensor 116 is continuously input to the controller 10, and the controller 10 determines the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 in response to the change in the tilt angle P.
  • the controller 10 determines the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 in response to the change in the tilt angle P.
  • the switch 112 is OFF (OFF in step S01)
  • the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is fixed to the set value Fs at the dial 113 regardless of the change in the vehicle inclination state ( Step S02).
  • the vehicle steering system according to the present invention is applied to a vehicle transmission or the like that employs a side clutch / side brake steering system, and is a typical vehicle to be applied.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
  • Transportation (AREA)
  • Non-Deflectable Wheels, Steering Of Trailers, Or Other Steering (AREA)

Abstract

A vehicle steering system, provided with a side clutch and a side brake in each of a pair of parallel drive trains for distributing power to a pair of axles, and configured so as to cut the side clutch on the inner turning side in accordance with the manipulation of a steering manipulation tool and to operate the side brake, wherein there are provided an auxiliary clutch for varying a joining force in order to transmit a torque between the pair of drive trains, and an auxiliary clutch manipulation tool for increasing the joining force of the auxiliary clutch, and also provided is a restraining mechanism for preventing the operation of the side brake and an increase in the joining force of the auxiliary clutch from being carried out at the same time.

Description

車両操向システムVehicle steering system
 本発明は、サイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式の車両操向システムに関する。 The present invention relates to a side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system.
 従来、クローラ式走行車両(例えばコンバイン)等に適用される車両操向システムとして、左右の車軸(駆動スプロケット軸)に動力を分配するための左右一対の駆動列の各々にサイドクラッチ及びサイドブレーキを設けた構成の、サイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式操向システムが公知であり、例えば、特許文献1に開示されているようなものがある。 Conventionally, as a vehicle steering system applied to a crawler type traveling vehicle (for example, a combine), a side clutch and a side brake are provided in each of a pair of left and right drive trains for distributing power to left and right axles (drive sprocket shafts). A side-clutch / side-brake steering system with a provided configuration is known, for example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1.
 このサイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式操向システムの操作具としては、例えば特許文献1に開示されているような、直進位置から左右に傾動可能とした操向レバーが公知である。この操向レバーを旋回内側に(左旋回なら左側に)ある程度傾倒することで、旋回内側のサイドクラッチが切れ、旋回内側の車軸が減速し、車両は旋回半径の大きな状態で緩旋回する。操向レバーを旋回内側にさらに大きく傾倒すると、旋回内側のサイドクラッチが切れることに加え、旋回内側のサイドブレーキがかかり、旋回内側の車軸が大きく減速、さらには停止し、これにより、車両は旋回半径の小さな状態で急旋回(旋回内側の車軸が停止するとブレーキターン)する。 As an operation tool of this side clutch / side brake type steering system, for example, a steering lever that can be tilted left and right from a straight traveling position as disclosed in Patent Document 1 is known. By tilting this steering lever to the inside of the turn (to the left if turning left), the side clutch inside the turn is disengaged, the axle inside the turn is decelerated, and the vehicle turns slowly with a large turning radius. If the steering lever is further tilted to the inside of the turn, the side clutch inside the turn will be disengaged, the side brake inside the turn will be applied, the axle on the inside of the turn will be greatly decelerated and then stopped, which will cause the vehicle to turn Make a sharp turn with a small radius (brake turn when the axle inside the turn stops).
特開平10-262417号公報JP-A-10-262417
 このサイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式車両操向システムには、サイドクラッチが切れた状態となる旋回内側の車軸に動力が供給されないため、旋回内側の車軸が、クローラやタイヤ等の車両の接地部に対する圃場面や路面の抵抗(以下、「走行抵抗」とする)の影響を受けやすく、オペレータが想定していたよりも小さな旋回半径で車両が旋回してしまうことがあるという問題があった。例えば、車両を緩旋回させようとして前記操向レバーを小さな角度で傾倒する場合に、乾田での走行時には、サイドクラッチが切れた状態の旋回内側の車軸も回転する程度の状態にて、思い通りの緩旋回できても、湿田での走行時には走行抵抗が大きくなって、サイドクラッチが切れた状態の旋回内側の車軸が回転しにくくなり、思ったよりも旋回半径が小さくなって、所望の大きな旋回半径で車両が緩旋回しないという事態があった。 In this side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system, power is not supplied to the turning inner axle where the side clutch is disengaged. There is a problem that the vehicle may turn with a turning radius smaller than that assumed by the operator because it is easily influenced by the resistance of the surface and road surface (hereinafter referred to as “running resistance”). For example, when tilting the steering lever at a small angle in order to make the vehicle turn slowly, when driving on the dry field, the axle inside the turn with the side clutch disengaged also rotates, as expected. Even if you can make a gentle turn, the running resistance increases when you drive in a wetland, the axle inside the turn with the side clutch disengaged becomes difficult to rotate, the turning radius is smaller than you expected, and the desired large turning radius The vehicle did not turn slowly.
 この問題を解決するには、左右車軸間、すなわち、前述の左右の駆動列間に、リミティッドスリップ差動機構として機能する補助クラッチを設け、両駆動列間に、ある程度のトルクが伝達される状態、いわば、左右両車軸を緩いデフロック状態にすることが考えられる。また、路面状態等、様々な条件の変化に対応して所望の旋回半径での旋回を実現できるように、補助クラッチの接合力を可変とし、オペレータのその時その時の判断で任意に補助クラッチの接合力(すなわち、両左右駆動列間の伝動トルク)を調整するよう操作可能であることが望ましい。 In order to solve this problem, an auxiliary clutch that functions as a limited slip differential mechanism is provided between the left and right axles, that is, between the left and right drive trains described above, and a certain amount of torque is transmitted between the drive trains. In other words, it can be considered that the left and right axles are in a loose diff-lock state. In addition, the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is made variable so that turning at a desired turning radius can be realized in response to changes in various conditions such as road surface conditions, and the auxiliary clutch is arbitrarily connected according to the judgment at that time by the operator. It is desirable to be operable to adjust the force (ie, the transmission torque between the left and right drive trains).
 しかし、このような補助クラッチを設けるにおいては、旋回内側のサイドブレーキが作動し、旋回内側の車軸が制動されている最中に旋回外側の駆動列から旋回内側の駆動列へと該補助クラッチを介してトルクが伝動されるので、クラッチの摩擦熱による焼きつきが生じやすい等、その耐久性が問題となる。一方、旋回内側のサイドクラッチが切れていても、補助クラッチを介してトルクが旋回内側の駆動列に伝達されている状態で旋回内側のサイドブレーキが作動すると、やはり旋回内側のサイドブレーキの摩擦熱による焼きつきが生じやすくなる。このように、補助クラッチの接合とサイドブレーキの作動とが同時になされる場合に生じ得る補助クラッチやサイドブレーキの耐久性にかかわる焼きつき等の現象は、補助クラッチの接合力を増大するほど(すなわち、伝動トルク量を増大するほど)顕著となる。 However, in providing such an auxiliary clutch, the side brake on the inner side of the turn is activated, and the auxiliary clutch is moved from the drive train on the outer side to the drive train on the inner side while the axle on the inner side of the turn is being braked. Since the torque is transmitted through the clutch, durability such as seizure due to frictional heat of the clutch tends to occur. On the other hand, even if the side clutch on the inside of the turn is disconnected, if the side brake on the inside of the turn is operated in a state where torque is transmitted to the drive train on the inside of the turn via the auxiliary clutch, the frictional heat of the side brake on the inside of the turn is still It becomes easy to cause image sticking. As described above, the phenomenon such as seizure related to the durability of the auxiliary clutch and the side brake, which may occur when the auxiliary clutch is engaged and the side brake is operated at the same time, increases as the engaging force of the auxiliary clutch increases (that is, The larger the amount of transmission torque, the more pronounced it becomes.
 本発明は、以上の如き問題を解消するように構成されたサイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式車両操向システムを提供することを目的とする。 An object of the present invention is to provide a side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system configured to solve the above problems.
 本発明に係る車両操向システムは、一対の車軸に対し動力を分配するための一対の並列状の駆動列のそれぞれに、サイドクラッチ及びサイドブレーキを設け、操向操作具の操作に伴って旋回内側のサイドクラッチを切り、サイドブレーキを作動するように構成されている。この車両操向システムにおいて、該一対の駆動列間にてトルクを伝達するための、接合力を可変とする補助クラッチ、及び、該補助クラッチの接合力を増大するための補助クラッチ操作具を設けるとともに、サイドブレーキの作動と補助クラッチの接合力増大とが同時に行われないための牽制機構を設ける。 A vehicle steering system according to the present invention is provided with a side clutch and a side brake in each of a pair of parallel drive trains for distributing power to a pair of axles, and turns according to the operation of the steering operation tool. The inner side clutch is disengaged and the side brake is operated. In this vehicle steering system, an auxiliary clutch for changing the joining force for transmitting torque between the pair of drive trains and an auxiliary clutch operating tool for increasing the joining force of the auxiliary clutch are provided. In addition, a check mechanism is provided to prevent the side brake operation and the increase in the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch from being performed simultaneously.
 本発明の第一態様に係る車両操向システムにおいて、前記牽制機構は、前記補助クラッチ操作具が前記補助クラッチの接合力を増大するように操作される際に、前記操向操作具の操作にかかわらず、旋回内側のサイドブレーキが作動しないように構成されている。 In the vehicle steering system according to the first aspect of the present invention, the restraining mechanism is configured to operate the steering operation tool when the auxiliary clutch operation tool is operated so as to increase a joining force of the auxiliary clutch. Regardless, the side brake inside the turn is configured not to operate.
 前記第一態様に係る車両操向システムにおいて、前記補助クラッチの接合力を所定値に設定するための補助クラッチ接合力設定手段を設ける。前記補助クラッチ操作具は、該補助クラッチの接合力を、該補助クラッチ接合力設定手段にて設定された該所定値から増大させるために操作されるものである。 In the vehicle steering system according to the first aspect, there is provided auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch to a predetermined value. The auxiliary clutch operating tool is operated to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch from the predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means.
 本発明の第二態様に係る車両操向システムにおいて、前記牽制機構は、前記操向操作具が旋回内側のサイドブレーキを作動するよう操作される際に、該補助クラッチ操作具の操作にかかわらず、該補助クラッチの接合力が増大されないように構成されている。 In the vehicle steering system according to the second aspect of the present invention, when the steering operation tool is operated so as to operate the side brake on the inside of the turn, the check mechanism is independent of the operation of the auxiliary clutch operation tool. The joining force of the auxiliary clutch is not increased.
 前記第二態様に係る車両操向システムにおいて、前記補助クラッチの接合力を所定値に設定するための補助クラッチ接合力設定手段を設ける。前記補助クラッチ操作具は、該補助クラッチの接合力を、該補助クラッチ接合力設定手段にて設定された該所定値から増大させるために操作されるものである。 In the vehicle steering system according to the second aspect, there is provided auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch to a predetermined value. The auxiliary clutch operating tool is operated to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch from the predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means.
 本発明に係るサイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式の車両操向システムは、車両の旋回中に、補助クラッチを介して、サイドクラッチが入って駆動状態にある旋回外側の駆動列からサイドクラッチが切れた状態の旋回内側の駆動列へとトルクを伝達することで、軟弱地等での旋回内側の車軸の過剰な速度低下を回避することができる。さらに、補助クラッチの接合力が可変であることにより、土壌状態の変化等に対応して、その接合力を調整することで、このような土壌状態の変化等にかかわらず設定したとおりの旋回半径での旋回が常に得られるようにすることができる。そして、牽制機構を設けることにより、旋回内側のサイドブレーキの作動と補助クラッチの接合力の増大とが同時になされるという事態が回避され、サイドクラッチ及び補助クラッチの耐久性を向上させることができる。 The side clutch / side brake type vehicle steering system according to the present invention is a state in which the side clutch is disconnected from the drive train outside the turn in the drive state with the side clutch being engaged through the auxiliary clutch during the turning of the vehicle. By transmitting the torque to the drive train inside the turn, it is possible to avoid an excessive speed reduction of the axle inside the turn on soft ground or the like. Furthermore, by changing the joining force of the auxiliary clutch and adjusting the joining force in response to changes in the soil condition, the turning radius as set regardless of such changes in the soil condition, etc. It is possible to always obtain a turn at. By providing the check mechanism, it is possible to avoid the situation where the operation of the side brake inside the turning and the increase of the joining force of the auxiliary clutch are avoided at the same time, and the durability of the side clutch and the auxiliary clutch can be improved.
 そして、前記第一態様に係る車両操向システムにおける牽制機構により、操向操作具の操作による車両旋回時にもかかわらず、オペレータが、サイドクラッチまたは補助クラッチの耐久性を損ねるような補助クラッチ操作具の操作を行ったとしても、旋回内側のサイドブレーキの作動は回避されるため、補助クラッチの接合力が増大されている最中にサイドブレーキが作動するという事態が回避される。 The auxiliary clutch operating tool in which the operator impairs the durability of the side clutch or the auxiliary clutch despite the vehicle turning by the operation of the steering operating tool by the check mechanism in the vehicle steering system according to the first aspect. Even if this operation is performed, the operation of the side brake inside the turn is avoided, so that the situation where the side brake is operated while the joining force of the auxiliary clutch is being increased is avoided.
 また、前記第一態様に係る車両操向システムにおいて、前述の如く補助クラッチ接合力設定手段を設けていることにより、オペレータが補助クラッチの接合力増大のために補助クラッチ操作具を操作することがない限りは、補助クラッチの接合力は、補助クラッチ接合力設定手段にて設定された所定値に保持されており、サイドクラッチが切れた状態の旋回内側の駆動列には、接合力を該所定値に設定した状態での補助クラッチを介して、旋回外側の駆動列よりトルクが伝達され、前述の如く、軟弱地等での旋回内側の車軸の過剰な速度低下を回避することができる。そして、補助クラッチ操作具は、土壌の状態等から補助クラッチの接合力が補助クラッチ接合力設定手段で設定した所定値では足りないとオペレータが判断したときに、任意に接合力を該所定値から増大させることができるようにするための操作具として適用されることとなる。 Further, in the vehicle steering system according to the first aspect, by providing the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means as described above, the operator can operate the auxiliary clutch operation tool to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch. Unless otherwise, the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is held at a predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means, and the engagement force is applied to the drive train inside the turning with the side clutch disengaged. Torque is transmitted from the drive train outside the turn through the auxiliary clutch in the state set to the value, and it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the speed of the axle inside the turn on soft ground as described above. When the operator determines that the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is not the predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means based on the state of the soil or the like, the auxiliary clutch operation tool arbitrarily determines the engagement force from the predetermined value. It will be applied as an operating tool for enabling an increase.
 一方、前記第二態様に係る車両操向システムにおける牽制機構により、補助クラッチ操作具の操作にて補助クラッチの接合力を増大させている状態にもかかわらず、オペレータが、操向操作具にて、サイドクラッチまたは補助クラッチの耐久性を損ねるような旋回内側のサイドブレーキを作動させる旋回操作を行ったとしても、補助クラッチの接合力の増大は回避されるため、旋回内側のサイドブレーキが作動している最中に補助クラッチの接合力が増大するという事態が回避される。 On the other hand, despite the state in which the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is increased by the operation of the auxiliary clutch operating tool by the check mechanism in the vehicle steering system according to the second aspect, the operator can Even if a turning operation is performed to operate the side brake on the inside of the turn that impairs the durability of the side clutch or the auxiliary clutch, an increase in the joining force of the auxiliary clutch is avoided, so the side brake on the inside of the turn is activated. A situation in which the engaging force of the auxiliary clutch increases during the operation is avoided.
 また、前記第二態様に係る車両操向システムにおいて、前述の如く補助クラッチ接合力設定手段を設けていることにより、オペレータが補助クラッチの接合力増大のために補助クラッチ操作具を操作することがない限りは、補助クラッチの接合力は、補助クラッチ接合力設定手段にて設定された所定値に保持されており、サイドクラッチが切れた状態の旋回内側の駆動列には、接合力を該所定値に設定した状態での補助クラッチを介して、旋回外側の駆動列よりトルクが伝達され、前述の如く、軟弱地等での旋回内側の車軸の過剰な速度低下を回避することができる。そして、補助クラッチ操作具は、旋回内側のサイドブレーキを作動するような旋回操作が操向操作具にて行われていない限りにおいて、クラッチ土壌の状態等から補助クラッチの接合力が補助クラッチ接合力設定手段で設定した所定値では足りないとオペレータが判断したときに、任意に接合力を該所定値から増大させることができるようにするための操作具として適用されることとなる。 Further, in the vehicle steering system according to the second aspect, by providing the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means as described above, the operator can operate the auxiliary clutch operation tool to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch. Unless otherwise, the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch is held at a predetermined value set by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means, and the engagement force is applied to the drive train inside the turning with the side clutch disengaged. Torque is transmitted from the drive train outside the turn through the auxiliary clutch in the state set to the value, and it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the speed of the axle inside the turn on soft ground as described above. As long as the turning operation that activates the side brake inside the turning is not performed by the steering operation tool, the auxiliary clutch operating tool has the auxiliary clutch engaging force that is determined from the state of the clutch soil. When the operator determines that the predetermined value set by the setting means is not sufficient, it is applied as an operation tool for arbitrarily increasing the bonding force from the predetermined value.
本発明にかかる車両操向システムを適用したトランスミッション1のスケルトン図及び車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の油圧回路図である。1 is a skeleton diagram of a transmission 1 to which a vehicle steering system according to the present invention is applied, and a hydraulic circuit diagram of a vehicle steering actuator set 2. FIG. トランスミッション1の平面断面図である。2 is a plan sectional view of the transmission 1. FIG. トランスミッション1の側面一部断面図である。2 is a partial cross-sectional view of a side surface of the transmission 1. FIG. トランスミッション1におけるサイドクラッチ軸5を収容する部分の拡大平面断面図である。FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan cross-sectional view of a portion that accommodates a side clutch shaft 5 in the transmission 1. トランスミッション1におけるミッションケース20への車軸4の支持部分の拡大平面断面図である。3 is an enlarged plan sectional view of a support portion of an axle 4 to a transmission case 20 in a transmission 1. FIG. 操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rの配設部分における車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の後面断面図である。FIG. 4 is a rear cross-sectional view of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 in a portion where the steering actuators 34L and 34R are disposed. 車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の後面図であって、リリーフ弁33の後面断面図を含む図である。FIG. 3 is a rear view of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 and includes a rear sectional view of a relief valve 33. 車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の側面断面図であって、リリーフ弁33の側面断面を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a side sectional view of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 and a side sectional view of the relief valve 33. ミッションケース20における車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の取付部分にブリーザを形成した実施例を示す、トランスミッション1の部分斜視図である。FIG. 3 is a partial perspective view of the transmission 1 showing an embodiment in which a breather is formed at an attachment portion of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 in the transmission case 20. 操向レバー11の背面図である。3 is a rear view of the steering lever 11. FIG. 抵抗機構170を備えた操向レバー11の背面断面図である。It is a back surface sectional view of steering lever 11 provided with resistance mechanism 170. 抵抗機構170により現出される、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tと操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗Rとの関係を示すグラフである。6 is a graph showing the relationship between the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 and the operating resistance R applied to the steering lever 11, which appears by the resistance mechanism 170. 抵抗機構180を備えた操向レバー11の背面図であって、図13(A)は直進設定位置にある操向レバー11の図、図13(B)は車両旋回のために傾倒した状態の操向レバー11の図である。FIG. 13A is a rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the resistance mechanism 180, FIG. 13A is a diagram of the steering lever 11 in the straight advance setting position, and FIG. 13B is a state in which the steering lever 11 is tilted for turning the vehicle. It is a figure of the steering lever 11. FIG. 抵抗(摩擦)機構188を備えたトランスミッション1におけるサイドクラッチ軸5を収容する部分の平面断面図である。FIG. 3 is a plan sectional view of a portion that houses a side clutch shaft 5 in a transmission 1 that includes a resistance (friction) mechanism 188. 図15(A)は抵抗機構189を備えた操向レバー11の背面図、図15(B)は15(A)におけるB-B矢視断面図、図15(C)は抵抗機構189により現出される、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tと操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗Rとの関係を示すグラフである。15A is a rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the resistance mechanism 189, FIG. 15B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 15A, and FIG. It is a graph which shows the relationship between the tilting angle T of the steering lever 11 and the operation resistance R applied to the steering lever 11. 牽制機構18を備えた操向レバー11の後面図である。It is a rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the check mechanism 18. 牽制機構18の斜視図である。3 is a perspective view of a check mechanism 18. FIG. 牽制機構と補助クラッチの操作機構との関連構造についての第一実施例を示す図であって、牽制機構18の平面一部断面図並びに補助クラッチ接合圧設定用レバー(以下「レバー」)12及び補助クラッチペダル(以下「ペダル」)13の側面図を示すものである。1 is a diagram showing a first embodiment of a related structure between a check mechanism and an auxiliary clutch operating mechanism, and is a partial plan view of the check mechanism 18 and an auxiliary clutch engagement pressure setting lever (hereinafter referred to as “lever”) 12; A side view of an auxiliary clutch pedal (hereinafter referred to as “pedal”) 13 is shown. 牽制機構と補助クラッチの操作機構との関連構造についての第二実施例を示す図であって、別形態の牽制機構18Aを備えた操向レバー11の後面図並びにレバー12及びペダル13の側面図を示すものである。It is a figure which shows the 2nd Example about the related structure of the check mechanism and the operation mechanism of an auxiliary clutch, Comprising: The rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the check mechanism 18A of another form, and the side view of the lever 12 and the pedal 13 Is shown. 図19におけるレバー12及び押動部材81の正面図である。FIG. 20 is a front view of the lever 12 and the pushing member 81 in FIG. 19. 牽制機構と補助クラッチの操作機構との関連構造についての第三実施例を示す図であって、牽制機構18の平面一部断面図並びにレバー12及びペダル13の側面図を示すものである。It is a figure which shows the 3rd Example about the related structure of the check mechanism and the operation mechanism of an auxiliary clutch, Comprising: The plane partial sectional view of the check mechanism 18, and the side view of the lever 12 and the pedal 13 are shown. 図21におけるレバー12及びアーム82の正面図である。It is a front view of the lever 12 and the arm 82 in FIG. 牽制機構と補助クラッチの操作機構との関連構造についての第四実施例を示す図であって、牽制機構18の平面一部断面図並びにレバー12及びペダル13の側面図を示すものである。It is a figure which shows 4th Example about the related structure of the check mechanism and the operation mechanism of an auxiliary clutch, Comprising: The plane partial sectional view of the check mechanism 18, and the side view of the lever 12 and the pedal 13 are shown. 図23におけるレバー12、アーム82及びペダル13の正面図である。It is a front view of the lever 12, the arm 82, and the pedal 13 in FIG. 牽制機構と補助クラッチの操作機構との関連構造についての第五実施例を示す図であって、別形態の牽制機構18Bを備えた操向レバー11の後面図及びペダル13の側面図を示すものであり、操向レバー11を直進位置とし、かつ補助クラッチ接合圧を最小値とした状態を示すものである。It is a figure which shows 5th Example about the related structure of the check mechanism and the operation mechanism of an auxiliary clutch, Comprising: The rear view of the steering lever 11 provided with the check mechanism 18B of another form, and the side view of the pedal 13 are shown. In this state, the steering lever 11 is set to the straight traveling position and the auxiliary clutch engagement pressure is set to the minimum value. 牽制機構18Bの後面図であって、補助クラッチ接合圧を最小値とした状態で操向レバー11をサイドクラッチ切り位置まで傾動した状態の図である。It is a rear view of the check mechanism 18B, and is a view showing a state in which the steering lever 11 is tilted to the side clutch disengagement position with the auxiliary clutch engagement pressure being the minimum value. 牽制機構18Bの後面図であって、操向レバー11を直進位置とし、かつ補助クラッチ接合圧を規制値まで増大した状態の図である。It is a rear view of the check mechanism 18B, and shows a state in which the steering lever 11 is set to a straight traveling position and the auxiliary clutch engagement pressure is increased to a regulation value. 牽制機構18Bの後面図であって、補助クラッチ接合圧を規制値まで増大した状態で操向レバー11をサイドクラッチ切り位置まで傾動した状態の図である。It is a rear view of the check mechanism 18B, and is a view of a state in which the steering lever 11 is tilted to the side clutch disengagement position in a state where the auxiliary clutch engagement pressure is increased to a regulation value. 補助クラッチ8の接合圧を調整する電子制御アクチュエータAAを備えたトランスミッション1の実施例としてのトランスミッション1Aのスケルトン図である。FIG. 2 is a skeleton diagram of a transmission 1A as an embodiment of the transmission 1 including an electronic control actuator AA that adjusts the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. トランスミッション1Aの旋回時におけるスケルトン図である。It is a skeleton figure at the time of turning of transmission 1A. トランスミッション1Aの側面一部断面図である。It is a side surface partial sectional view of transmission 1A. 電動アクチュエータ141の正面断面図である。3 is a front sectional view of the electric actuator 141. FIG. 補助クラッチ8の接合圧を調整する電子制御アクチュエータAAを備えたトランスミッション1の他の実施例としてのトランスミッション1Bのスケルトン図である。FIG. 6 is a skeleton diagram of a transmission 1B as another embodiment of the transmission 1 provided with an electronic control actuator AA that adjusts the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. トランスミッション1Bの側面一部断面図である。It is side surface partial sectional drawing of the transmission 1B. コントローラ10によるトランスミッション1Aまたは1Bの基本制御フローチャート図である。3 is a basic control flowchart of transmission 1A or 1B by a controller 10. FIG. サイドブレーキを用いて駐車ブレーキをかけるものとした場合のコントローラ10への入力手段を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the input means to the controller 10 when it is assumed that a parking brake is applied using a side brake. 前記駐車ブレーキ作動時のトランスミッション1Aまたは1Bのスケルトン図である。It is a skeleton figure of transmission 1A or 1B at the time of the parking brake operation. コントローラ10による前記駐車ブレーキ操作の制御フローチャートである。3 is a control flowchart of the parking brake operation by the controller 10. 車両の傾斜状態の検出に基づきトランスミッション1Aまたは1Bを制御するものとしたコントローラ10への入力手段を示すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the input means to the controller 10 which shall control transmission 1A or 1B based on the detection of the inclination state of a vehicle. 車両の傾斜状態の検出に基づき制御されるものとしたトランスミッション1Aまたは1Bのコントローラ10による制御フローチャート図である。It is a control flowchart figure by the controller 10 of the transmission 1A or 1B which shall be controlled based on the detection of the inclination state of a vehicle. 自動制御される補助クラッチ接合力の実際値を表示する補助クラッチ接合力メータ117を示す図である。It is a figure which shows the auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117 which displays the actual value of the auxiliary clutch engagement force controlled automatically. 補助クラッチ接合力調整ダイヤル113Aを付設した操向レバー11の斜視図である。It is a perspective view of the steering lever 11 provided with an auxiliary clutch engagement force adjustment dial 113A. 操向レバー11の軸心方向に見た場合における補助クラッチ接合力調整ダイヤル113Aを示す図である。It is a figure which shows 113 A of auxiliary clutch engagement force adjustment dials when it sees to the axial center direction of the steering lever 11. FIG.
 本発明にかかる車両操向システムが適用されるトランスミッション1の構成について、図1乃至図5等より説明する。トランスミッション1は、ミッションケース20を有し、該ミッションケース20にて、互いに同一軸心上に配した左右一対の車軸4L・4R(総称して「車軸4」とする)を支持している。車軸4は、例えばコンバインのようなクローラ式走行装置を有する車両の駆動スプロケット軸として適用される。以下に述べるトランスミッション1における各構成部材や部分の位置や方向は、この車軸4の長手方向がトランスミッション1の左右方向であることを前提とする。 The configuration of the transmission 1 to which the vehicle steering system according to the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. The transmission 1 includes a transmission case 20 that supports a pair of left and right axles 4L and 4R (collectively referred to as “axle 4”) arranged on the same axis. The axle 4 is applied as a drive sprocket shaft of a vehicle having a crawler type traveling device such as a combine. The positions and directions of the constituent members and portions in the transmission 1 described below are based on the premise that the longitudinal direction of the axle 4 is the left-right direction of the transmission 1.
 図3や図5等に示すように、ミッションケース20は、左ハウジング120L及び右ハウジング120R(総称して「ハウジング120」とする)を含む。図2に示すように、ミッションケース20の上部には、左右方向を指す入力軸28が支持されている。入力軸28の一端は、ミッションケース20の外部に突出している。入力軸28のこの一端部には、プーリ28aが固定されている。プーリ28aは、エンジン等の原動機(図示せず)の出力を入力軸28に伝達するためのベルト式伝動装置の従動プーリを構成している。ミッションケース20の上部には、入力軸28の回転動力によって駆動される変速装置(図示せず)が内設されている。この変速装置は、例えば油圧式無段変速装置である。変速装置の出力は、伝動ギア列29を介して、分配ギア22に伝達される。 As shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 5, etc., the mission case 20 includes a left housing 120L and a right housing 120R (collectively referred to as “housing 120”). As shown in FIG. 2, an input shaft 28 pointing in the left-right direction is supported on the top of the mission case 20. One end of the input shaft 28 protrudes outside the mission case 20. A pulley 28 a is fixed to this one end portion of the input shaft 28. The pulley 28a constitutes a driven pulley of a belt type transmission device for transmitting the output of a prime mover (not shown) such as an engine to the input shaft 28. A transmission (not shown) that is driven by the rotational power of the input shaft 28 is provided in the upper part of the mission case 20. This transmission is, for example, a hydraulic continuously variable transmission. The output of the transmission is transmitted to the distribution gear 22 via the transmission gear train 29.
 トランスミッション1のミッションケース20内には、車軸4に対し平行な左右延伸状のサイドクラッチ軸21が、軸受21aを介してミッションケース20に回転自在に軸支されている。図3に示すように、サイドクラッチ軸21の左右各端部の外周面には軸受21aの内輪が嵌合されており、軸受21aの外輪は、ミッションケース20に固定されている。 In the transmission case 20 of the transmission 1, a side clutch shaft 21 extending in the left-right direction parallel to the axle 4 is rotatably supported by the transmission case 20 via a bearing 21a. As shown in FIG. 3, the inner ring of the bearing 21 a is fitted to the outer peripheral surfaces of the left and right ends of the side clutch shaft 21, and the outer ring of the bearing 21 a is fixed to the transmission case 20.
 サイドクラッチ軸21の左右中央部には、分配ギア22が固設されている。ミッションケース20内にて、分配ギア22から左右一対の車軸4L・4Rへと動力を分配するための一対の駆動列3L・3R(総称して「駆動列3」とする)が設けられている。左右各駆動列3L・3Rを構成すべく、ミッションケース20内にて、互いに同一軸心上に配置される左右延伸状の左右一対の中間軸24L・24R(総称して「中間軸24」とする)が、サイドクラッチ軸21及び左右一対の車軸4L・4Rに対し平行に設けられ、ミッションケース20に回転自在に軸支されている。 A distribution gear 22 is fixed to the left and right central portions of the side clutch shaft 21. Within the transmission case 20, a pair of drive trains 3L and 3R (collectively referred to as “drive train 3”) for distributing power from the distribution gear 22 to the pair of left and right axles 4L and 4R are provided. . In the mission case 20, a pair of left and right extending left and right intermediate shafts 24L and 24R (collectively referred to as “intermediate shaft 24”) are arranged on the same axial center in the mission case 20 to constitute the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R. Is provided in parallel to the side clutch shaft 21 and the pair of left and right axles 4L and 4R, and is rotatably supported by the transmission case 20.
 分配ギア22の左側におけるサイドクラッチ軸21の左部には左シフタ5Lが、分配ギア22の右側におけるサイドクラッチ軸21の右部には右シフタ5Rが、それぞれ、図4等に示す如きブッシュ5dを介して、左右軸心方向摺動自在かつ相対回転自在に装着されている(左右シフタ5L・5Rを総称して「シフタ5」とする)。以下、各シフタ5について、分配ギア22側を内側、分配ギア22に対し反対側を外側とする。左シフタ5Lの右端部には左サイドギア23Lが形成されており、右シフタ5Lの左端部には右サイドギア23Rが形成されている(左右サイドギア23L・23Rを総称して「サイドギア23」とする)。すなわち、各シフタ5の内側端部にサイドギア23が形成されている。 The left shifter 5L is on the left side of the side clutch shaft 21 on the left side of the distribution gear 22, and the right shifter 5R is on the right side of the side clutch shaft 21 on the right side of the distribution gear 22, respectively. The left and right shifters 5L and 5R are collectively referred to as “shifter 5”. Hereinafter, for each shifter 5, the distribution gear 22 side is the inside, and the opposite side to the distribution gear 22 is the outside. A left side gear 23L is formed at the right end of the left shifter 5L, and a right side gear 23R is formed at the left end of the right shifter 5L (the left and right side gears 23L and 23R are collectively referred to as “side gear 23”). . That is, a side gear 23 is formed at the inner end of each shifter 5.
 分配ギア22の左右各端部にはクラッチ爪6aが形成され、左右各シフタ5L・5Rにおけるサイドギア23L・23Rの内側端部にはクラッチ爪6bが形成されている。こうして、分配ギア22の左端部のクラッチ爪6aと左サイドクラッチ23Lのクラッチ爪6bとで、噛み合い式の左サイドクラッチ6Lが形成され、分配ギア22の右端部のクラッチ爪6aと右サイドクラッチ23Rのクラッチ爪6bとで、噛み合い式の右サイドクラッチ6Rが構成されている(左右サイドクラッチ6L・6Rを総称して「サイドクラッチ6」とする)。 A clutch claw 6a is formed at each of the left and right ends of the distribution gear 22, and a clutch claw 6b is formed at the inner ends of the side gears 23L and 23R of the left and right shifters 5L and 5R. In this way, the clutch pawl 6a at the left end portion of the distribution gear 22 and the clutch pawl 6b of the left side clutch 23L form a meshing left side clutch 6L, and the clutch pawl 6a at the right end portion of the distribution gear 22 and the right side clutch 23R. The clutch pawl 6b constitutes a meshing right side clutch 6R (the left and right side clutches 6L and 6R are collectively referred to as “side clutch 6”).
 サイドクラッチ軸21の左右端部に、左右一対のバネ5aが巻装され、各バネ5aにて、各シフタ5が分配ギア22寄りに付勢されている。すなわち、各バネ5aが各サイドクラッチ6を接続する方向に付勢している。各ブッシュ5dよりも外側となる各シフタ5の外側端部は筒状になっていて、各バネ5a周りに配設される。また、図4に示すように、各サイドクラッチ軸21に、バネ5aの内側端を受けるバネ受けとしてのスラストワッシャ5bが環設され、各シフタ5に係止されている。 A pair of left and right springs 5 a are wound around the left and right ends of the side clutch shaft 21, and each shifter 5 is biased toward the distribution gear 22 by each spring 5 a. That is, each spring 5a is biased in the direction in which each side clutch 6 is connected. The outer end of each shifter 5 outside the bush 5d has a cylindrical shape and is arranged around each spring 5a. Also, as shown in FIG. 4, each side clutch shaft 21 is provided with a thrust washer 5 b as a spring receiver that receives the inner end of the spring 5 a and is engaged with each shifter 5.
 ここで、シフタ5に係止されるスラストワッシャ5b側のバネ5aの前記内側端は、シフタ5の移動に伴って移動するものであり、スラストワッシャ5bと直接接触している場合には、スラストワッシャ5bとの間で摩擦が生じ、その摩擦熱による焼きつきで、バネ5aもスラストワッシャ5bも磨耗しやすい。そこで、図4に示す実施例では、各サイドクラッチ軸21に、自己潤滑性を有する無給油カラー5cを環設しており、これをスラストワッシャ5bに添設し、バネ5aの内側端とスラストワッシャ5bとの間に介在させている。 Here, the inner end of the spring 5a on the side of the thrust washer 5b that is locked to the shifter 5 moves as the shifter 5 moves, and when it is in direct contact with the thrust washer 5b, Friction is generated with the washer 5b, and the spring 5a and the thrust washer 5b are easily worn by seizure due to the frictional heat. Therefore, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 4, each side clutch shaft 21 is provided with a self-lubricating oilless collar 5c, which is attached to the thrust washer 5b, and the inner end of the spring 5a and the thrust end. It is interposed between the washer 5b.
 左シフタ5Lの筒状の外(左)側端部とミッションケース20の左側部との間にて、左サイドブレーキ7Lが構成され、右シフタ5Rの筒状の外(右)側端部とミッションケース20の右側部との間にて、右サイドブレーキ7Rが構成されている(左右サイドブレーキ7L・7Rを総称して「サイドブレーキ7」とする)。各サイドブレーキ7は、摩擦板7a・7b及び押圧板7cよりなる。摩擦板7aは、各シフタ5の筒状の外側端部に相対回転不能に係合されており、摩擦板7bは、ミッションケース20の左右各側部に相対回転不能に係合されている。押圧板7cは、各シフタ5に固定されている。 A left side brake 7L is formed between the cylindrical outer (left) side end of the left shifter 5L and the left side of the transmission case 20, and the cylindrical outer (right) side end of the right shifter 5R A right side brake 7R is formed between the right side of the transmission case 20 (the left and right side brakes 7L and 7R are collectively referred to as “side brake 7”). Each side brake 7 includes friction plates 7a and 7b and a pressing plate 7c. The friction plate 7 a is engaged with the cylindrical outer end portion of each shifter 5 so as not to be relatively rotatable, and the friction plate 7 b is engaged with the left and right side portions of the mission case 20 so as not to be relatively rotatable. The pressing plate 7 c is fixed to each shifter 5.
 各シフタ5が内側方の最大摺動位置にあって各サイドクラッチ6が接続している状態において、押圧板7cは摩擦板7a・7bから離れ、摩擦板7a・7b同士も離れている。この状態が、サイドブレーキ7の非作動状態(非制動状態)である。シフタ5がサイドクラッチ軸21に沿ってバネ5aに抗して左右外側方に摺動する(サイドクラッチ6は切れた状態となる)につれ、該シフタ5と一体に移動する押圧板7cが摩擦板7a・7bに接近し、やがて、押圧板7cにより摩擦板7a・7b同士が圧接する。この状態が、サイドブレーキ7の作動状態(制動状態)である。摩擦板7a・7b同士が圧接し始めてからシフタ5が外側方に摺動するにつれ、摩擦板7a・7b間の摩擦圧が増大し、シフタ5(すなわち、分配ギア22から離れた状態でのサイドギア23)に付加されるサイドブレーキ7の制動力が増大する。 In the state where each shifter 5 is in the maximum sliding position on the inner side and each side clutch 6 is connected, the pressing plate 7c is separated from the friction plates 7a and 7b, and the friction plates 7a and 7b are also separated from each other. This state is a non-operating state (non-braking state) of the side brake 7. As the shifter 5 slides laterally outwardly against the spring 5a along the side clutch shaft 21 (the side clutch 6 is in a disconnected state), the pressing plate 7c that moves integrally with the shifter 5 is a friction plate. The friction plates 7a and 7b are brought into pressure contact with each other by the pressing plate 7c. This state is the operating state (braking state) of the side brake 7. As the shifter 5 slides outward after the friction plates 7a and 7b begin to come into pressure contact with each other, the friction pressure between the friction plates 7a and 7b increases, and the shifter 5 (that is, the side gear in a state away from the distribution gear 22). The braking force of the side brake 7 added to 23) increases.
 また、図4に示すように、トランスミッション1のミッションケース20の孔20aにオイル量検知用のボルト19が備えられている。サイドクラッチ軸21の軸心21cから摩擦板7aの根元までの距離L1は、軸心21cから孔20aの中心までの距離L2よりも長い。つまり、孔20aの位置は、サイドクラッチ軸21の半径方向に沿って、各サイドブレーキ7の摩擦板7a・7bよりも軸心21cの近くである。このような位置にオイル量検知用のボルト19が取り付けられることによれば、オペレータは、摩擦板7a・7b同士の十分な潤滑のために必要なオイル量を適切に検知できる。これにより、ミッションケース20の傾斜配置での潤滑油不足によりサイドクラッチ6及びサイドブレーキ7の焼き付きが生じるという事態を防止できる。 Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a bolt 19 for detecting the oil amount is provided in the hole 20a of the transmission case 20 of the transmission 1. A distance L1 from the axis 21c of the side clutch shaft 21 to the root of the friction plate 7a is longer than a distance L2 from the axis 21c to the center of the hole 20a. That is, the position of the hole 20 a is closer to the shaft center 21 c than the friction plates 7 a and 7 b of the side brakes 7 along the radial direction of the side clutch shaft 21. When the bolt 19 for detecting the oil amount is attached at such a position, the operator can appropriately detect the oil amount necessary for sufficient lubrication between the friction plates 7a and 7b. As a result, it is possible to prevent the side clutch 6 and the side brake 7 from being seized due to the lack of lubricating oil in the inclined arrangement of the mission case 20.
 ミッションケース20には、前後方向に延設された左右一対の回動軸30L・30R(総称して「回動軸30」とする)が内外貫通状に枢支されている。ミッションケース20の外側には、シフタ5L・5R操作用の車両操向用アクチュエータセット2が設けられている。該車両操向用アクチュエータセット2は、油圧シリンダである左右一対の操向用アクチュエータ34L・34R(総称して「操向用アクチュエータ34」)を有し、各操向用アクチュエータ34より延出されるピストンロッド36を各回動軸30の外端に連結している。 In the mission case 20, a pair of left and right rotating shafts 30L and 30R (collectively referred to as “rotating shaft 30”) extending in the front-rear direction are pivotally supported in a penetrating manner. Outside the mission case 20, a vehicle steering actuator set 2 for operating the shifters 5L and 5R is provided. The vehicle steering actuator set 2 includes a pair of left and right steering actuators 34L and 34R (collectively “steering actuators 34”) that are hydraulic cylinders, and extends from each steering actuator 34. The piston rod 36 is connected to the outer end of each rotating shaft 30.
 一方、ミッションケース20の内側における各回動軸30より係合部材(クランプ等)30aが延設され、各シフタ5に係合されている。回動軸30の軸心回りの回動により、係合部材30aが該回動軸30の軸心を中心に回動し、これにより、シフタ5がサイドクラッチ軸21に沿って左右方向に摺動する。 On the other hand, an engaging member (clamp or the like) 30 a is extended from each rotating shaft 30 inside the mission case 20 and is engaged with each shifter 5. Due to the rotation of the rotation shaft 30 around the axis, the engaging member 30 a rotates about the axis of the rotation shaft 30, so that the shifter 5 slides in the left-right direction along the side clutch shaft 21. Move.
 左中間軸24Lの右端には左大径ギア25Lが固設されており、該左大径ギア25Lは、左シフタ5Lの摺動にかかわらず、常時、左サイドギア23Lと噛合している。また、左中間軸24Lに固設された左小径ギア25Lと、左車軸4Lに固設された左大径ギア27Lとが噛合している。こうして、分配ギア22、左サイドギア23L、左大径ギア25L、左小径ギア26L、左大径ギア27Lにより、分配ギア21から左車軸4Lへと動力を伝達する左駆動列3Lが構成されている。 A left large-diameter gear 25L is fixed to the right end of the left intermediate shaft 24L, and the left large-diameter gear 25L is always meshed with the left side gear 23L regardless of the sliding of the left shifter 5L. Further, the left small diameter gear 25L fixed to the left intermediate shaft 24L meshes with the left large diameter gear 27L fixed to the left axle 4L. Thus, the distribution gear 22, the left side gear 23L, the left large diameter gear 25L, the left small diameter gear 26L, and the left large diameter gear 27L constitute the left drive train 3L that transmits power from the distribution gear 21 to the left axle 4L. .
 一方、右中間軸24Rの左端には右大径ギア25Rが固設されており、該右大径ギア25Rは、右シフタ5Rの摺動にかかわらず、常時、右サイドギア23Rと噛合している。また、右中間軸24Rに固設された右小径ギア25Rと、右車軸4Rに固設された右大径ギア27Rとが噛合している。こうして、分配ギア22、右サイドギア23R、右大径ギア25R、右小径ギア26R、右大径ギア27Rにより、分配ギア21から右車軸4Rへと動力を伝達する右駆動列3Rが構成されている。なお、以下、左右大径ギア25L・25R、左右小径ギア26L・26R、左右大径ギア27L・27Rをそれぞれ総称して「大径ギア25」「小径ギア26」「大径ギア27」とする。 On the other hand, a right large-diameter gear 25R is fixed to the left end of the right intermediate shaft 24R, and the right large-diameter gear 25R is always meshed with the right side gear 23R regardless of the sliding of the right shifter 5R. . Further, the right small diameter gear 25R fixed to the right intermediate shaft 24R and the right large diameter gear 27R fixed to the right axle 4R are engaged with each other. Thus, the right drive train 3R for transmitting power from the distribution gear 21 to the right axle 4R is constituted by the distribution gear 22, the right side gear 23R, the right large diameter gear 25R, the right small diameter gear 26R, and the right large diameter gear 27R. . Hereinafter, the left and right large diameter gears 25L and 25R, the left and right small diameter gears 26L and 26R, and the left and right large diameter gears 27L and 27R are collectively referred to as “large diameter gear 25”, “small diameter gear 26”, and “large diameter gear 27”, respectively. .
 図2及び図5に示すように、各ハウジング120において、各駆動列3における最終減速ギア列となる小径ギア26(すなわち、各中間軸24の外側部分)及び大径ギア27を収容する部分の左右外端部が開口しており、この開口を覆うように、各ハウジング120の外側端にサイドカバー121を接合し、ボルト121aにて各サイドカバー121を各ハウジング120に締止している。 As shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, in each housing 120, a portion for housing the small-diameter gear 26 (that is, the outer portion of each intermediate shaft 24) and the large-diameter gear 27 that are the final reduction gear train in each drive train 3. The left and right outer ends are open, and side covers 121 are joined to the outer ends of the housings 120 so as to cover the openings, and the side covers 121 are fastened to the housings 120 with bolts 121a.
 各中間軸24の外側端が、軸受24aを介して各サイドカバー121に軸支されている一方、各中間軸24の、大径ギア25と小径ギア26との間の部分が、軸受24bを介して各ハウジング120に軸支されている。なお、各中間軸24の内側端部は各大径ギア25の中心ボス孔にスプライン嵌入されている。また、各大径ギア27の外側端部が、軸受27aを介して各サイドカバー121に、各大径ギア27の内側端部が、軸受27bを介して各ハウジング120に、それぞれ軸支されている。 The outer end of each intermediate shaft 24 is pivotally supported by each side cover 121 via a bearing 24a, while the portion of each intermediate shaft 24 between the large-diameter gear 25 and the small-diameter gear 26 supports the bearing 24b. Via the housing 120. Note that the inner end of each intermediate shaft 24 is splined into the central boss hole of each large-diameter gear 25. The outer end of each large-diameter gear 27 is pivotally supported on each side cover 121 via a bearing 27a, and the inner end of each large-diameter gear 27 is pivotally supported on each housing 120 via a bearing 27b. Yes.
 車軸4は、車軸ケース122に収容され、軸支されている。車軸4の外側端部は車軸ケース122の外側端より突出している。車軸4を、例えばコンバインのクローラ走行装置の駆動スプライン軸として適用する場合には、この車軸ケース122より突出する車軸4の外側端部に駆動スプロケット4aが固設される。車軸ケース122の内側端部はフランジ122aとなっており、このフランジ122aより、車軸4の内側端部が突出している。各サイドカバー121の、軸受27aを支持する部分の外側端は開口しており、この開口を介して、車軸4の内側端部を、ハウジング120及びサイドカバー122にて軸支する大径ギア27の中心ボス孔にスプライン嵌入する。車軸ケース122のフランジ122aは、サイドカバー121の前記開口を覆うように、サイドカバー121の外側端に接合し、フランジ122aがボルト122bにてサイドカバー121に締止されることにより、車軸ケース122がサイドカバー121に固設される。 The axle 4 is accommodated in and supported by the axle case 122. The outer end portion of the axle 4 protrudes from the outer end of the axle case 122. When the axle 4 is applied as, for example, a drive spline shaft of a combine crawler travel device, a drive sprocket 4 a is fixed to an outer end portion of the axle 4 protruding from the axle case 122. The inner end of the axle case 122 is a flange 122a, and the inner end of the axle 4 protrudes from the flange 122a. The outer end of the portion of each side cover 121 that supports the bearing 27 a is open, and the large-diameter gear 27 that pivotally supports the inner end of the axle 4 by the housing 120 and the side cover 122 through this opening. Insert a spline into the center boss hole. The flange 122a of the axle case 122 is joined to the outer end of the side cover 121 so as to cover the opening of the side cover 121, and the flange 122a is fastened to the side cover 121 with a bolt 122b. Is fixed to the side cover 121.
 ボルト122bを緩めてフランジ122aをサイドカバー121より分離することで、車軸4の内側端部が大径ギア27の中心ボス孔より引き抜かれ、車軸4を、車軸ケース122に収容されたままの状態で、ミッションケース20より簡単に取り外すことができる。一方、フランジ122aはサイドカバー121に締止したままで、ボルト121aを緩めてサイドカバー121をハウジング120より分離することで、大径ギア27の内端部が軸受27bより引き抜かれ、また、中間軸24の内側端部が軸受24b及び大径ギア25より引き抜かれ、車軸4、車軸ケース122、サイドカバー121、中心軸24、大径ギア27、及び軸受24a・27aを一体状にして、ハウジング120より取り外すことができる。 By loosening the bolt 122b and separating the flange 122a from the side cover 121, the inner end of the axle 4 is pulled out from the central boss hole of the large-diameter gear 27, and the axle 4 remains housed in the axle case 122. Thus, it can be easily removed from the mission case 20. On the other hand, with the flange 122a being fastened to the side cover 121, the bolt 121a is loosened to separate the side cover 121 from the housing 120, whereby the inner end portion of the large-diameter gear 27 is pulled out from the bearing 27b. The inner end of the shaft 24 is pulled out from the bearing 24b and the large-diameter gear 25, and the axle 4, the axle case 122, the side cover 121, the central shaft 24, the large-diameter gear 27, and the bearings 24a and 27a are integrated into a housing. 120 can be removed.
 このように、車軸4を、単独でミッションケース20から取り外すことも、中間軸24及び大径ギア27を支持したままの状態でミッションケース20から取り外すことも、簡単にできるので、車軸4、中間軸4、大径ギア27、また、これらを支持する軸受の、メンテナンスや交換等を簡単に行うことができる。したがって、現状の中間軸24における小径ギア26の歯数と異なる歯数を有する小径ギア26を形成した別の中間軸24への交換、また、現状の大径ギア27の歯数とは異なる歯数を有する別の大径ギア27への交換を容易に行うことができ、これらの組み合わせを別のものに替えることによって、駆動列3の減速比を適宜変更できる。 Thus, the axle 4 can be easily detached from the transmission case 20 or removed from the transmission case 20 while the intermediate shaft 24 and the large-diameter gear 27 are supported. Maintenance, replacement, and the like of the shaft 4, the large diameter gear 27, and the bearings that support them can be easily performed. Therefore, the current intermediate shaft 24 can be replaced with another intermediate shaft 24 formed with a small diameter gear 26 having a number of teeth different from the number of teeth of the small diameter gear 26, and the number of teeth different from the current large diameter gear 27. Replacement with another large-diameter gear 27 having a number can be easily performed, and the reduction ratio of the drive train 3 can be appropriately changed by changing these combinations to other ones.
 次に、トランスミッション1におけるシフタ5の位置と動力の伝達状態との関係について説明する。まず、図1は車両の直進状態(左右車軸4L・4Rが同一速度で回転する状態)を示すものであり、左右両サイドクラッチ6L・6Rが接合し、かつ、左右両サイドブレーキ7L・7Rが切れていて、左右両サイドギア23L・23Rが分配ギア22と一体状に回転自在な状態となっている。したがって、左右車軸4L・4Rには、原則的には均等に、分配ギア22の回転力が伝達される。 Next, the relationship between the position of the shifter 5 in the transmission 1 and the power transmission state will be described. First, FIG. 1 shows a straight traveling state of the vehicle (the left and right axles 4L and 4R rotate at the same speed), the left and right side clutches 6L and 6R are engaged, and the left and right side brakes 7L and 7R are engaged. The left and right side gears 23 </ b> L and 23 </ b> R are rotatable integrally with the distribution gear 22. Therefore, in principle, the rotational force of the distribution gear 22 is transmitted to the left and right axles 4L and 4R.
 車両の旋回時におけるトランスミッション1の状態について説明する。なお、ここでは、後述の補助クラッチ8は切れているものとする。図1にて示す直進状態から、車両を左旋回させる場合は、右サイドクラッチ6Rを接合した位置に右シフタ5Rを保持したまま、左シフタ5Lを外側方、すなわち左側に摺動する。これにより、左サイドクラッチ6Lが切れ車両は緩やかに左旋回する。 The state of the transmission 1 when the vehicle turns will be described. Here, it is assumed that an auxiliary clutch 8 described later is disengaged. When the vehicle is to turn left from the straight traveling state shown in FIG. 1, the left shifter 5L is slid outward, that is, leftward while the right shifter 5R is held at the position where the right side clutch 6R is engaged. As a result, the left side clutch 6L is disengaged and the vehicle slowly turns to the left.
 さらに、左シフタ5Lに固設された押圧板7cが左サイドブレーキ7Lの摩擦板7a・7bを圧接し、左車軸4Lが制動され、車両の旋回半径は更に小さくなる。やがて、左側に摺動する左シフタ5Lがその最大摺動位置に達すると、旋回内側の左車軸4Lを完全に制動しての左ブレーキターンが実現する。 Further, the pressing plate 7c fixed to the left shifter 5L presses the friction plates 7a and 7b of the left side brake 7L, the left axle 4L is braked, and the turning radius of the vehicle is further reduced. Eventually, when the left shifter 5L that slides to the left reaches its maximum sliding position, a left brake turn is realized by completely braking the left axle 4L inside the turn.
 なお、右旋回時においては、左サイドクラッチ6Lを接合した位置に左シフタ5Lを保持したまま、右シフタ5Rを外側方、すなわち右側に摺動することで、右サイドクラッチ6Rを切り、さらに右サイドブレーキ7Rをかけるものであり、その状態の詳細については、上述の左旋回時の説明を参照するものとし、図示も省略する。 When turning right, the right side clutch 6R is disengaged by sliding the right shifter 5R outward, that is, on the right side while holding the left shifter 5L at the position where the left side clutch 6L is engaged. The right side brake 7R is applied, and for details of the state, refer to the explanation at the time of the left turn described above, and illustration is also omitted.
 図1及び図3等により、トランスミッション1における補助クラッチ8について詳述する。左中間軸24Lの右端の左大径ギア25Lと、右中間軸24Rの左端の右大径ギア25Rとの間には、接合力を可変とする補助クラッチ8が介設されている。本実施例では、補助クラッチ8を、左大径ギア25Lに相対回転不能に係合された摩擦板8aと、右大径ギア25Rに相対回転不能に係合された摩擦板8bとよりなる、摩擦板式クラッチとしており、摩擦板8a・8b同士の押圧度をミッションケース20外から調整自在とすることにより、接合力を可変としている。この補助クラッチ8を接合する(入れる)ことにより、左右の大径ギア25L・25R間、すなわち、左右の駆動列3L・3R間にて、動力(トルク)の伝達がなされる。そして、補助クラッチ8の接合力の調整により、左右の駆動列3L・3R間で伝達されるトルク量が調整されることとなる。 The auxiliary clutch 8 in the transmission 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. An auxiliary clutch 8 is provided between the left large-diameter gear 25L at the right end of the left intermediate shaft 24L and the right large-diameter gear 25R at the left end of the right intermediate shaft 24R. In this embodiment, the auxiliary clutch 8 includes a friction plate 8a engaged with the left large diameter gear 25L so as not to rotate relative to the left large diameter gear 25L, and a friction plate 8b engaged with the right large diameter gear 25R so as not to rotate relative thereto. A friction plate clutch is used, and the pressing force between the friction plates 8a and 8b is adjustable from the outside of the mission case 20, thereby making the joining force variable. By connecting (inserting) the auxiliary clutch 8, power (torque) is transmitted between the left and right large-diameter gears 25L and 25R, that is, between the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R. The amount of torque transmitted between the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R is adjusted by adjusting the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8.
 補助クラッチ8にはさらに、中間軸24の軸心方向(左右方向)に摺動可能な図外の押圧部材が設けられており、この押圧部材を左右一側(以後、「クラッチ接合側」とする)に摺動することで、摩擦板8a・8bを圧接し(補助クラッチ8を入れ)、また、その圧接度(すなわち、補助クラッチ8の接合力)を高めるものであり、左右他側(以後、「クラッチ離間側」とする)に摺動することで、摩擦板8a・8bの圧接力を低減し、さらには摩擦板8a・8bを離間させる(補助クラッチ8を切る)ものとしている。 The auxiliary clutch 8 is further provided with a pressing member (not shown) that is slidable in the axial direction (left-right direction) of the intermediate shaft 24. The friction plates 8a and 8b are pressed against each other (with the auxiliary clutch 8 inserted), and the pressure contact degree (that is, the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8) is increased. Thereafter, the pressure contact force of the friction plates 8a and 8b is reduced, and the friction plates 8a and 8b are separated (the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged).
 ミッションケース20内には、補助クラッチ用シフタ9が設けられている。補助クラッチ用シフタ9は、フォーク軸9a及びフォーク9bを有する。左右延伸状のフォーク軸9aは、ミッションケース20内にて、左右軸心方向に摺動自在に支持されている。フォーク9bの一端部はフォーク軸9aに固着されている。該フォーク9bの他端部は、補助クラッチ8の前記押圧部材に係合している。こうして、フォーク軸9aの前記クラッチ接合側への摺動により、摩擦板8a・8b同士の圧接度、すなわち、補助クラッチ8の接合力が増大し、フォーク軸9aの前記クラッチ離間側への摺動により、摩擦板8a・8b同士の押圧力を低減し、さらには補助クラッチ8を離間する(切れる)ものとしている。このフォーク軸9aは、バネ9eにて該クラッチ離間側に付勢されている。 In the mission case 20, an auxiliary clutch shifter 9 is provided. The auxiliary clutch shifter 9 has a fork shaft 9a and a fork 9b. The horizontally extending fork shaft 9a is supported in the mission case 20 so as to be slidable in the left-right axial direction. One end of the fork 9b is fixed to the fork shaft 9a. The other end of the fork 9b is engaged with the pressing member of the auxiliary clutch 8. Thus, by sliding the fork shaft 9a toward the clutch engagement side, the pressure contact degree between the friction plates 8a and 8b, that is, the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 increases, and the fork shaft 9a slides toward the clutch disengagement side. Thus, the pressing force between the friction plates 8a and 8b is reduced, and the auxiliary clutch 8 is separated (disengaged). The fork shaft 9a is biased toward the clutch separating side by a spring 9e.
 ミッションケース20には、回動軸17が内外貫通状に枢支されている。ミッションケース20の外側における回動軸17の外端には、アーム16が固設されている。一方、ミッションケース20の内側における回動軸17の内端部には半割状のカム面17aが形成されている。フォーク9bの前記一端部は、カム面17aを受けるカム受け面9dとして形成されている。このように、アーム16及び回動軸17等にて、補助クラッチ用シフタ9を操作するための操作機構15が構成されている。 In the mission case 20, a rotating shaft 17 is pivotally supported so as to penetrate inside and outside. An arm 16 is fixed to the outer end of the rotation shaft 17 outside the mission case 20. On the other hand, a half-shaped cam surface 17 a is formed at the inner end of the rotation shaft 17 inside the mission case 20. The one end of the fork 9b is formed as a cam receiving surface 9d that receives the cam surface 17a. Thus, the arm 16 and the rotation shaft 17 constitute the operation mechanism 15 for operating the auxiliary clutch shifter 9.
 図1に示すようにカム面17aがカム受け面9dと平行になっていて、カム面17aとカム受け面9dと密着した状態のときは、フォーク軸9aは、前記クラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置に配置されており、前述の如く補助クラッチ8は切れている。そして、回動軸16をその軸心回りに回動してカム面16aをカム受け面9dに対し斜めにする(後述の図30等参照)ことで、フォーク軸9aが前記クラッチ接合側に摺動し、その摺動量に応じた接合力で、フォーク9bを介して補助クラッチ9を接合する。 As shown in FIG. 1, when the cam surface 17a is parallel to the cam receiving surface 9d and the cam surface 17a and the cam receiving surface 9d are in close contact with each other, the fork shaft 9a is maximally slid on the clutch separating side. The auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged as described above. Then, the fork shaft 9a is slid toward the clutch engagement side by rotating the rotating shaft 16 about its axis and making the cam surface 16a oblique with respect to the cam receiving surface 9d (see FIG. 30 and the like described later). The auxiliary clutch 9 is joined via the fork 9b with a joining force corresponding to the sliding amount.
 したがって、例えば前述の如く車両を左旋回させるべく、旋回内側である左サイドクラッチ6Lを切った状態のとき、右大径ギア25Rから左大径ギア25Lへと、すなわち、右駆動列3Rから左駆動列3Lへと、補助クラッチ8を介して、設定された接合力に応じたトルクが伝達され、旋回内側となる左車軸4Lに、若干の駆動力が付与される。これにより、旋回中に予想外の走行抵抗を受けて旋回内側の左車軸4Lが停止してしまう状況でも、想定していたとおりの左右車軸4L・4Rの差動状態で緩やかな旋回を得ることができる。 Therefore, for example, when the left side clutch 6L that is inside the turn is disengaged in order to turn the vehicle to the left as described above, the right large diameter gear 25R changes to the left large diameter gear 25L, that is, the right drive train 3R moves to the left. Torque corresponding to the set joint force is transmitted to the drive train 3L via the auxiliary clutch 8, and a slight drive force is applied to the left axle 4L on the inside of the turn. As a result, even when the left axle 4L on the inside of the turn stops due to unexpected travel resistance during turning, the left and right axles 4L and 4R can obtain a gentle turn as expected. Can do.
 次に、操向レバー11の操作に基づくサイドクラッチ6、サイドブレーキ7の作動の流れについて説明する。図10等に示すように、操向レバー11は、その基本的な構造として、その基端のボス部11aを、前後水平方向の枢軸51上に装着しており、枢軸51の軸心を中心に左右回動自在であり、その傾倒角度Tを0とする直進位置から左右各側に最大角度Tmaxまで傾動可能な構成となっている。なお、直進位置(傾倒角度T=0)から左方の傾倒角度Tを左傾倒角度LT、該直進位置から右方の傾倒角度Tを右傾倒角度RTとする。後述の如きコントローラ10による操向用アクチュエータ34の制御にて、操向レバー11を直進位置から左側に傾動して左傾倒角度LTを増大させるにつれ、左シフタ5Lが左方(外側方)へと摺動し、操向レバー11を直進位置から右側に傾動して右傾倒角度RTを増大させるにつれ、右シフタ5Rが右方(外側方)へと摺動する。 Next, the operation flow of the side clutch 6 and the side brake 7 based on the operation of the steering lever 11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 10 and the like, the steering lever 11 has, as its basic structure, a boss portion 11a at its base end mounted on a pivot 51 in the front-rear horizontal direction, and the axis of the pivot 51 is centered. It is configured to be capable of tilting up to a maximum angle Tmax from the straight position where the tilt angle T is 0 to the left and right sides. Note that the left tilt angle T from the straight position (tilt angle T = 0) is the left tilt angle LT, and the right tilt angle T from the straight position is the right tilt angle RT. By controlling the steering actuator 34 by the controller 10 as described later, the left shifter 5L is moved to the left (outward) as the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left from the straight traveling position to increase the left tilt angle LT. The right shifter 5R slides to the right (outward) as the steering lever 11 is tilted to the right from the straight position to increase the right tilt angle RT.
 該直進位置から左右各側での操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT1に達するまでは旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6は接合したまま、すなわち、両サイドクラッチ6L・6Rが接合したままで、直進状態が保持される。傾倒角度TがT1に達すると、旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6が切れる。傾倒角度TをT1からT2まで増大させる間は、旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6が切れているが、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7はまだ作動しない状態であり、旋回内側の車軸4は慣性力で回転可能な状態である。 Until the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 on each of the left and right sides from the straight position reaches T1, the side clutch 6 on the inner side of the turn remains engaged, that is, the both side clutches 6L and 6R remain engaged, Is retained. When the tilt angle T reaches T1, the side clutch 6 inside the turn is disengaged. While the tilt angle T is increased from T1 to T2, the side clutch 6 on the inner side of the turn is disengaged, but the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turn is not yet operated, and the axle 4 on the inner side of the turn can rotate with inertial force. It is a state.
 傾倒角度TがT2に達すると、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7の摩擦板7a・7bが圧接し始める。すなわち、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7が効き始める。傾倒角度TがT2から最大角度Tmaxに向けて増大するにつれて、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7の摩擦板7a・7bの圧接度が増し、すなわち、その制動力が増大する。傾倒角度Tが最大角度Tmaxに達した時点では、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7の摩擦板7a・7bは完全に圧接しており、旋回内側の車軸4は確実に制動される。 When the tilt angle T reaches T2, the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turn start to come into pressure contact. That is, the side brake 7 inside the turn starts to work. As the tilt angle T increases from T2 toward the maximum angle Tmax, the pressure contact degree of the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turn increases, that is, the braking force increases. When the tilt angle T reaches the maximum angle Tmax, the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turn are completely in pressure contact, and the axle 4 inside the turn is reliably braked.
 次に、前記車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の構造について、図1、図2、図6乃至図8にて説明する。車両操向用アクチュエータセット2は、油路ブロック38に、電磁式方向制御弁32、可変のリリーフ圧を有するリリーフ弁33、左右一対の操向用アクチュエータ(油圧シリンダ)34L・34Rを組み付けてなるものである。なお、図1のみに図示されているが、図2、図6乃至図8では図示されない一対のチェック弁39L・39R(総称して「チェック弁39」)も油路ブロック38に組み入れられている。 Next, the structure of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, 6 to 8. The vehicle steering actuator set 2 includes an oil passage block 38, an electromagnetic direction control valve 32, a relief valve 33 having a variable relief pressure, and a pair of left and right steering actuators (hydraulic cylinders) 34L and 34R. Is. Although only shown in FIG. 1, a pair of check valves 39L and 39R (collectively “check valves 39”) not shown in FIGS. 2 and 6 to 8 are also incorporated in the oil passage block 38. .
 油路ブロック38には、平行な左右一対のシリンダ孔が形成されていて、各シリンダ孔に、ピストン35、ピストン35より延設されるピストンロッド36、ピストンロッド36に巻装されて該ピストン35を初期位置へと付勢するバネ37を組み入れることで、左右一対の操向用アクチュエータ(油圧シリンダ)34L・34Rを構成している。両ピストンロッド36は、油路ブロック38より延出されて、それらの先端が、前述の如く左右の回動軸30L・30Rの外端に各別に接続される。 The oil passage block 38 is formed with a pair of parallel left and right cylinder holes. The piston 35, the piston rod 36 extending from the piston 35, and the piston rod 36 are wound around each cylinder hole. Is incorporated into the initial position to constitute a pair of left and right steering actuators (hydraulic cylinders) 34L and 34R. Both piston rods 36 are extended from an oil passage block 38, and their front ends are individually connected to the outer ends of the left and right rotating shafts 30L and 30R as described above.
 各操向用アクチュエータ34を構成するシリンダ孔の、ピストンロッド36に対しては反対側となるピストン35の一側が、作動油室34aとなり、また、ピストン35の軸心方向における途中部にはリリーフポート34bが設けられている。油路ブロック38には、図1に示す油圧ポンプ31からの吐出油を受けるポンプポート38aが設けられており、また、油路ブロック38内から油路ブロック38の外部へと油を排出するためのドレンポート38dが設けられている。 One side of the piston 35 opposite to the piston rod 36 of the cylinder hole constituting each steering actuator 34 is a hydraulic oil chamber 34a, and a relief is provided in the middle of the piston 35 in the axial direction. A port 34b is provided. The oil passage block 38 is provided with a pump port 38 a that receives the oil discharged from the hydraulic pump 31 shown in FIG. 1, and also discharges oil from the oil passage block 38 to the outside of the oil passage block 38. The drain port 38d is provided.
 入口ポート38aより油路ブロック38に流入した油圧ポンプ31からの油は、電磁弁である方向制御弁32を介して、左操向用アクチュエータ34Lの作動油室34a、右操向用アクチュエータ34Rの作動油室34a、ドレンポート38dのうちのいずれかに送られるよう構成されている。また、左右操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rのリリーフポート34bからの油は、各別のチェック弁39を介して合流し、ドレンポート38dへと送られるよう構成されている。 The oil from the hydraulic pump 31 that has flowed into the oil passage block 38 from the inlet port 38a passes through the directional control valve 32, which is an electromagnetic valve, to the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the left steering actuator 34L and the right steering actuator 34R. It is configured to be sent to either the hydraulic oil chamber 34a or the drain port 38d. Further, the oil from the relief ports 34b of the left and right steering actuators 34L and 34R joins via separate check valves 39 and is sent to the drain port 38d.
 左右一対の操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rは、電磁式の方向制御弁32がコントローラ10からの指令信号に基づいて位置制御されることで、操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rの作動油室34aに対する油の流れが制御され、それにより、ピストンロッド36の伸長量が制御されるものである。このように、方向制御弁32のソレノイド制御に基づいて制御されるという意味において、操向用アクチュエータ34(34L・34R)は、電子制御式アクチュエータである。 The pair of left and right steering actuators 34L and 34R is controlled by the electromagnetic directional control valve 32 based on a command signal from the controller 10, so that the oil for the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the steering actuators 34L and 34R is controlled. Is controlled, and the extension amount of the piston rod 36 is thereby controlled. Thus, the steering actuators 34 (34L and 34R) are electronically controlled actuators in the sense that they are controlled based on the solenoid control of the direction control valve 32.
 以下、各操向用アクチュエータ34については、該当するシフタ5を内側方の最大摺動位置にしてサイドクラッチ6を接合させるようセットされた状態を、操向用アクチュエータ34の非作動状態とし、内側方の最大摺動位置から少しでも外側方にシフタ5を摺動させるようセットされた状態を操向用アクチュエータ34の作動状態とする。 Hereinafter, for each of the steering actuators 34, the state where the corresponding shifter 5 is set to the maximum sliding position on the inner side and the side clutch 6 is engaged is referred to as the non-operating state of the steering actuator 34. A state where the shifter 5 is set to slide slightly outward from the maximum sliding position is defined as an operating state of the steering actuator 34.
 方向制御弁32は、図1に示すように、3位置切換式の方向制御弁となっており、コントローラ10からの指令信号に基づき、ソレノイド32aの励磁・ソレノイド32bの解磁により左旋回位置Lに、ソレノイド32bの励磁・ソレノイド32aの解磁により右旋回位置Rに、両ソレノイド32a・32bの解磁により中立位置Nに、位置制御される。 As shown in FIG. 1, the direction control valve 32 is a three-position switching type direction control valve. Based on a command signal from the controller 10, the left turn position L is obtained by exciting the solenoid 32a and demagnetizing the solenoid 32b. Further, the position of the solenoid 32b is controlled to the right turning position R by the excitation of the solenoid 32b and the demagnetization of the solenoid 32a, and to the neutral position N by the demagnetization of the solenoids 32a and 32b.
 方向制御弁32は、左旋回位置Lにあるときは、左旋回用アクチュエータ34Lの作動油室34aをポンプポート38aに連通して、左旋回用アクチュエータ34Lを作動状態にするとともに、右旋回用アクチュエータ34Rの作動油室34aをタンクポート38dに連通して、右旋回用アクチュエータ34Rを非作動状態にする。また、右旋回位置Rにあるときは、右旋回用アクチュエータ34Rの作動油室34aをポンプポート38aに連通して、右旋回用アクチュエータ34Rを作動状態にするとともに、左旋回用アクチュエータ34Lの作動油室34aをタンクポート38dに連通して、左旋回用アクチュエータ34Lを非作動状態にする。そして、中立位置Nにあるときは、ポンプポート38a及び左右両旋回用アクチュエータ34L・34Rの作動油室34aをタンクポート38dに連通して、左右両旋回用アクチュエータ34L・34Rを非作動状態にする。 When the directional control valve 32 is in the left turn position L, the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the left turn actuator 34L is communicated with the pump port 38a, and the left turn actuator 34L is put into an operating state and the right turn actuator 34L is used. The hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the actuator 34R is communicated with the tank port 38d, and the right-turn actuator 34R is deactivated. When the vehicle is in the right turning position R, the hydraulic oil chamber 34a of the right turning actuator 34R is communicated with the pump port 38a to bring the right turning actuator 34R into an operating state and the left turning actuator 34L. The hydraulic oil chamber 34a is communicated with the tank port 38d, and the left-turn actuator 34L is deactivated. When in the neutral position N, the pump port 38a and the hydraulic oil chambers 34a of the left and right turning actuators 34L and 34R are communicated with the tank port 38d, and the left and right turning actuators 34L and 34R are deactivated. .
 方向制御弁32は、図6に示すように、油路ブロック38に組み入れられており、また、油路ブロック38に、方向制御弁32のソレノイドセット32cが外付けされている。ソレノイドセット32cには、図1の油圧回路図に示す両ソレノイド32a・32bが組み込まれている。該ソレノイドセット32cは、コントローラ10からの指令信号32La・32Raを受けるべく、ハーネス32dにてコントローラ10に接続されている。指令信号32Lsを受けることで、ソレノイド32aが励磁され、指令信号32Rsを受けることで、ソレノイド32bが励磁されるものとしている(図1参照)。 As shown in FIG. 6, the direction control valve 32 is incorporated in an oil passage block 38, and a solenoid set 32 c of the direction control valve 32 is externally attached to the oil passage block 38. Both solenoids 32a and 32b shown in the hydraulic circuit diagram of FIG. 1 are incorporated in the solenoid set 32c. The solenoid set 32c is connected to the controller 10 by a harness 32d so as to receive command signals 32La and 32Ra from the controller 10. The solenoid 32a is excited by receiving the command signal 32Ls, and the solenoid 32b is excited by receiving the command signal 32Rs (see FIG. 1).
 一方、図10に示すように、操向レバー11の基端ボス11aより扇形アーム52が延設されており、該扇形アーム52の円弧形縁の一部に凹みを設け、これをデテント溝52aとしている。扇形アーム52の近傍には、一対のバルブスイッチ53が配設されており、その押当子53aが扇形アーム52に向けて付勢され、扇形アーム52の(すなわち操向レバー11の)回動に伴って、デテント溝52aに対し進退するものとなっている。操向レバー11が直進位置(傾倒角度T=0)の位置にあるときは、両方のバルブスイッチ53の押当子53aがデテント溝52aに嵌入し、これにより、両バルブスイッチ53はスイッチオフの状態となり、コントローラ10は、バルブスイッチ53がOFFであるときに、方向制御弁32を中立位置Nにする。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10, a fan-shaped arm 52 is extended from the base end boss 11a of the steering lever 11, and a recess is provided in a part of the arc-shaped edge of the fan-shaped arm 52. 52a. A pair of valve switches 53 are disposed in the vicinity of the fan-shaped arm 52, and the pusher 53 a is urged toward the fan-shaped arm 52 to rotate the fan-shaped arm 52 (that is, the steering lever 11). Accordingly, the detent groove 52a advances and retreats. When the steering lever 11 is in the straight drive position (tilt angle T = 0), the pushers 53a of both valve switches 53 are fitted into the detent grooves 52a, whereby both valve switches 53 are switched off. The controller 10 sets the direction control valve 32 to the neutral position N when the valve switch 53 is OFF.
 操向レバー11を、直進位置から左側または右側に回動させると、一方のバルブスイッチ53の押当子53aがデテント溝52aから抜け、扇形アーム52の円弧縁に押されて後退し、当該一方のバルブスイッチ53がスイッチオンの状態となる。これにより、ソレノイド32a・32bのうちいずれかが励磁されるようコントローラ10より指令信号が発せられ、方向制御弁32が左旋回位置Lまたは右旋回位置Rに切り換えられ、左・右操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rのうちのいずれかの作動油室34aに油圧ポンプ31からの油を供給する。 When the steering lever 11 is turned to the left or right from the straight position, the pusher 53a of one valve switch 53 comes out of the detent groove 52a and is pushed back by being pushed by the arc edge of the sector arm 52. The valve switch 53 is switched on. As a result, a command signal is issued from the controller 10 so that one of the solenoids 32a and 32b is excited, the directional control valve 32 is switched to the left turning position L or the right turning position R, and is used for left / right steering. Oil from the hydraulic pump 31 is supplied to one of the hydraulic oil chambers 34a of the actuators 34L and 34R.
 一方、例えば後述の図16に示す実施例のように、バルブスイッチ53を一個とすることも考えられる。 On the other hand, for example, as in an embodiment shown in FIG.
 リリーフ弁33は、図1、図6乃至図8に示すように、バネ受け41の位置調整によりバネ43の圧縮度を調整することで、その圧縮度にて画されるリリーフ圧が調整される可変リリーフ弁となっている。このリリーフ圧の調整により、作動状態とされた油圧アクチュエータ34のピストンロッド36の伸長量が調整され、すなわち、旋回内側のシフタ5の外側方への摺動量が設定され、その摺動量に応じて、サイドブレーキ7の制動力(摩擦板7a・7bの圧接度)が決定される。 As shown in FIGS. 1 and 6 to 8, the relief valve 33 adjusts the degree of compression of the spring 43 by adjusting the position of the spring receiver 41, thereby adjusting the relief pressure defined by the degree of compression. It is a variable relief valve. By adjusting the relief pressure, the extension amount of the piston rod 36 of the hydraulic actuator 34 in the activated state is adjusted, that is, the sliding amount to the outside of the shifter 5 inside the turning is set, and according to the sliding amount The braking force of the side brake 7 (pressure contact degree of the friction plates 7a and 7b) is determined.
 リリーフ弁33の構造について詳述する。リリーフ弁33は、図7、図8に示すように、油路ブロック38に鉛直状に組み入れられている。リリーフ弁33は、油路ブロック38に固定されたポート部材40、ポート部材40の下部に上下摺動自在に係合されたバネ受け41、該ポート部材40内に上下摺動自在に嵌入されたピストン42、バネ受け41内に配設され、その上端がピストン42に押当し、その下端がバネ受け41の底端部内面に押当するバネ43よりなる。 The structure of the relief valve 33 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the relief valve 33 is vertically incorporated in the oil passage block 38. The relief valve 33 is fitted into the port member 40 fixed to the oil passage block 38, the spring receiver 41 engaged with the lower portion of the port member 40 so as to be slidable up and down, and slidably fitted into the port member 40. The piston 42 is disposed in the spring receiver 41, and its upper end presses against the piston 42 and its lower end includes a spring 43 that presses against the inner surface of the bottom end of the spring receiver 41.
 ポート部材40の上端部には、鉛直の吸入ポート33aが形成されており、該ポート部材40の上下途中部には、水平径方向の吐出ポート33bが形成されている。吸入ポート33aは、図6に示す両操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rのリリーフポート34bに連通しており、吐出ポート33bは、油路ブロック38内に形成された油路38bを介して、前記ドレンポート38dに連通している。なお、図6乃至図8では図示されていないが、各操向用アクチュエータ34L・34Rのリリーフポート34bと吸入ポート33aとの間に介設される各油路の途中には、図1に示すように、リリーフポート38d側への逆流を防ぐチェック弁39L・39Rが各別に設けられているものとしている。 A vertical suction port 33 a is formed at the upper end of the port member 40, and a discharge port 33 b in the horizontal radial direction is formed in the upper and lower middle part of the port member 40. The suction port 33a communicates with the relief port 34b of the steering actuators 34L and 34R shown in FIG. 6, and the discharge port 33b is connected to the drain via an oil passage 38b formed in the oil passage block 38. It communicates with the port 38d. Although not shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the oil passages interposed between the relief ports 34b and the suction ports 33a of the steering actuators 34L and 34R are shown in FIG. As described above, the check valves 39L and 39R for preventing the back flow toward the relief port 38d are provided separately.
 ピストン42が上方摺動することで、ピストン42が吸入ポート33aを閉じ、リリーフ弁33が閉弁する。すなわち、いずれか一方の操向用アクチュエータ34のピストン35の摺動により作動油室34aがリリーフポート34bに連通する状態になっていても、そのリリーフポート34bからリリーフ弁33までリリースされた油が、ドレンポート38dまでドレンされることはないので、作動油室34a内の油圧においては、ピストン35に対するストローク圧が保たれる。 When the piston 42 slides upward, the piston 42 closes the suction port 33a and the relief valve 33 closes. That is, even if the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is in communication with the relief port 34b due to the sliding of the piston 35 of one of the steering actuators 34, the oil released from the relief port 34b to the relief valve 33 is retained. Since the drain port 38d is not drained, the stroke pressure with respect to the piston 35 is maintained in the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic oil chamber 34a.
 一方、ピストン42が下方摺動することで、吸入ポート33aが吐出ポート33bに連通し、リリーフ弁33が開弁する。すなわち、いずれか一方の操向用アクチュエータ34のピストン35の摺動により作動油室34aがリリーフポート34bに連通する状態になっていれば、そのリリーフポート34bからリリーフ弁33までリリースされた油が、ドレンポート38dへとドレンされることとなる。したがって、作動油室34a内の油圧は、それ以上ピストン35をストロークすることができない状態にまで低減する。 On the other hand, when the piston 42 slides downward, the suction port 33a communicates with the discharge port 33b, and the relief valve 33 opens. That is, if the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is in communication with the relief port 34b by sliding of the piston 35 of one of the steering actuators 34, the oil released from the relief port 34b to the relief valve 33 is released. The drain port 38d is drained. Therefore, the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is reduced to a state where the piston 35 cannot be stroked any further.
 ピストン42とバネ受け41の底端部内面との間に介設されるバネ43は圧縮バネであって、ピストン42を上方に付勢している。ポート部材40に対し上下摺動可能なバネ受け41の上下位置の調整により、バネ43の圧縮度が調整され、これにより、リリーフ弁33のリリーフ圧が調整される。 A spring 43 interposed between the piston 42 and the inner surface of the bottom end of the spring receiver 41 is a compression spring, and urges the piston 42 upward. The degree of compression of the spring 43 is adjusted by adjusting the vertical position of the spring receiver 41 that can slide up and down with respect to the port member 40, thereby adjusting the relief pressure of the relief valve 33.
 さらに、バネ43の基端に対するバネ受け41との間に一定距離を空けており(所定位置と称する)、バネ受け41が外部から力を受けていないとき、バネ43は自然長に保たれ、この状態は、後に詳述するように、旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6が入ったままの状態に保たれる操向レバー11の直立位置に対応する。 Furthermore, when a certain distance is provided between the spring receiver 41 and the base end of the spring 43 (referred to as “predetermined position”), when the spring receiver 41 receives no force from the outside, the spring 43 is kept at a natural length, This state corresponds to the upright position of the steering lever 11 that is kept in the state in which the side clutch 6 inside the turning is kept, as will be described in detail later.
 バネ受け41を上下に移動させる手段として、図7、図8に示すように、油路ブロック38内にて、リリーフ弁33の下方にカム板44が配設されている。ここで、図7に示すように、バネ受け44の底端部の外面は、正(後)面視、円弧状に下向きに突出しており、その形状に合わせて、カム板44の上端部には、正(後)面視において、円弧状の凹部44aが形成されている。この、カム板44における凹部44aの左右両側部分がカムとなって、ここにバネ受け41の底端部が乗り上げることで、バネ受け41が上昇する構造となっている。 As a means for moving the spring receiver 41 up and down, a cam plate 44 is disposed below the relief valve 33 in the oil passage block 38 as shown in FIGS. Here, as shown in FIG. 7, the outer surface of the bottom end portion of the spring receiver 44 protrudes downward in a circular arc shape in a normal (rear) view, and the upper end portion of the cam plate 44 conforms to the shape. Is formed with an arcuate recess 44a in a normal (rear) view. The left and right side portions of the concave portion 44a of the cam plate 44 serve as cams, and the spring receiver 41 rises when the bottom end of the spring receiver 41 rides on the cam.
 油路ブロック38には、前後方向に軸心を有するカム枢軸部材45が挿入されており、その内端部が、図8に示す如きブッシュ45aに嵌入されて、油路ブロック38内で回動自在に軸受けされている。この油路ブロック38内にて、カム枢軸部材45に前記カム板44が固設されている。カム枢軸部材45の外端部は、油路ブロック38の外側に配されており、この外端部に、カム操作アーム46が固設されている。 A cam pivot member 45 having an axial center in the front-rear direction is inserted into the oil passage block 38, and an inner end portion thereof is fitted into a bush 45a as shown in FIG. It is freely supported. In the oil passage block 38, the cam plate 44 is fixed to the cam pivot member 45. An outer end portion of the cam pivot member 45 is disposed outside the oil passage block 38, and a cam operation arm 46 is fixed to the outer end portion.
 なお、図6及び図8に示すように、油路ブロック38内で、前記油路38bの下方にて、該油路38bと平行の油路38cを形成しており、両油路38b・38cをドレンポート38dに連通させている。 6 and 8, an oil passage 38c parallel to the oil passage 38b is formed below the oil passage 38b in the oil passage block 38, and both oil passages 38b and 38c are formed. Is connected to the drain port 38d.
 図7、図8、図10に示すように、カム操作アーム46は、リンク機構50を介して、操向レバー11の扇形アーム52に連結されている。リンク機構50は、扇形アーム52側のリンクロッド47、カム操作アーム46側のリンクロッド49、該リンクロッド47とリンクロッド49とを連結するリンクアーム48より構成される。リンクロッド47の一端部47aは、扇形アーム52に枢結され、リンクロッド47の他端部47bはリンクアーム48の一端部に枢結されている。リンクロッド49の一端部49aは、リンクアーム48の他端部に枢結され、リンクロッド49の他端部49bはカム操作アーム46の先端に枢結されている。リンクアーム48は、リンクロッド47・49に枢結される両端部の間の部分にて、枢軸48aに枢支されている。 7, 8, and 10, the cam operation arm 46 is connected to the sector arm 52 of the steering lever 11 through the link mechanism 50. The link mechanism 50 includes a link rod 47 on the fan-shaped arm 52 side, a link rod 49 on the cam operation arm 46 side, and a link arm 48 that connects the link rod 47 and the link rod 49. One end 47 a of the link rod 47 is pivoted to the sector arm 52, and the other end 47 b of the link rod 47 is pivoted to one end of the link arm 48. One end 49 a of the link rod 49 is pivotally connected to the other end of the link arm 48, and the other end 49 b of the link rod 49 is pivotally connected to the tip of the cam operation arm 46. The link arm 48 is pivotally supported by a pivot shaft 48a at a portion between both ends pivotally connected to the link rods 47 and 49.
 操向レバー11の回動により、リンクロッド47が押し引きされることにより、リンクアーム48が枢支軸48aを中心にして回動し、これによりリンクロッド49を押し引きして、カム操作アーム46を回動させる。図8において、カム操作アーム46の操作位置Sは、操向レバー11の直進位置(傾倒角度T=0)に対応する。カム操作アーム46は、この直進位置Sから上方・下方に回動可能となっており、上方の位置Lmは、操向レバー11の左傾倒角度LTを最大角度Tmaxにした状態に対応する。一方、直進位置Sより下方の位置Rmは、操向レバー11の右傾倒角度RTを最大角度Tmaxにした状態に対応する。 As the steering lever 11 rotates, the link rod 47 is pushed and pulled, whereby the link arm 48 rotates about the pivot shaft 48a, thereby pushing and pulling the link rod 49, and the cam operating arm. 46 is rotated. In FIG. 8, the operation position S of the cam operation arm 46 corresponds to the straight position (tilt angle T = 0) of the steering lever 11. The cam operation arm 46 can be rotated upward and downward from the rectilinear position S, and the upper position Lm corresponds to a state in which the left tilt angle LT of the steering lever 11 is set to the maximum angle Tmax. On the other hand, a position Rm below the straight traveling position S corresponds to a state where the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 is set to the maximum angle Tmax.
 以上の如く操向レバー11に連係されているリリーフ弁33において、直進位置から右方または左方に傾倒した操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT1となるときに、バネ受け41の位置が、バネ43を自然長に保つ範囲の限界位置である前記所定位置となる。一方、作動状態の操向用アクチュエータ34において、作動油室34aがリリーフポート34bに連通開始するときのピストン35の摺動位置(ピストンロッド36の伸長量)が、クラッチ爪6bを分配ギア22のクラッチ爪6aから外すときの、すなわち、サイドクラッチ6を切るときの、シフタ5の摺動位置に対応するものとしている。 In the relief valve 33 linked to the steering lever 11 as described above, when the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 tilted to the right or left from the straight traveling position is T1, the position of the spring receiver 41 is The predetermined position, which is the limit position of the range in which the spring 43 is kept at a natural length, is obtained. On the other hand, in the steering actuator 34 in the activated state, the sliding position of the piston 35 (the extension amount of the piston rod 36) when the hydraulic oil chamber 34a starts to communicate with the relief port 34b determines that the clutch pawl 6b is connected to the distribution gear 22. It corresponds to the sliding position of the shifter 5 when it is removed from the clutch pawl 6a, that is, when the side clutch 6 is disengaged.
 したがって、操向レバー11を直進位置から角度T1まで傾倒させた場合は、サイドクラッチ6が切れた時点で、作動状態(旋回内側)の旋回用アクチュエータ34のリリーフポート34bからリリーフ弁33の吸入ポート33aへと作動油室34a内の油がリリーフされる。ここで、バネ受け41は前記所定位置より上方移動するも、バネ43の自然長は維持され、バネ43の付勢力(すなわちリリーフ圧)が略0の状態なので、吸入ポート33aにリリーフポート34bからの油が流入するや、直ちにピストン42は、その油の流入圧で押し下げられ、吸入ポート33aと吐出ポート33bとを連通し、リリーフ弁33を開弁する。したがって、ピストン35はストロークを停止し、シフタ5は、サイドクラッチ6が切れた(まだサイドブレーキ7がかかっていない)時点での摺動位置にとどめられる。 Therefore, when the steering lever 11 is tilted from the straight traveling position to the angle T1, when the side clutch 6 is disengaged, the suction port of the relief valve 33 from the relief port 34b of the turning actuator 34 in the activated state (turning inner side). The oil in the hydraulic oil chamber 34a is relieved to 33a. Here, although the spring receiver 41 moves upward from the predetermined position, the natural length of the spring 43 is maintained and the urging force (that is, the relief pressure) of the spring 43 is substantially zero, so that the suction port 33a is connected to the relief port 34b. As soon as the oil flows, the piston 42 is pushed down by the inflow pressure of the oil, and the suction port 33a and the discharge port 33b are communicated to open the relief valve 33. Therefore, the piston 35 stops the stroke, and the shifter 5 is kept in the sliding position when the side clutch 6 is disengaged (the side brake 7 is not yet applied).
 リリーフポート34bが作動油室34aに連通して以後は、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tの、角度T1から最大角度Tmaxまでの範囲での任意設定に基づき、バネ受け41の移動に基づき、ピストン42に対しての付勢力に相当するバネ43の圧縮度、すなわち、リリーフ弁33のリリーフ圧が設定されることとなる。したがって、作動状態(旋回内側)の操向用アクチュエータ34のピストン35は、作動油室34a内の油圧が、このように設定されたリリーフ圧になるまで押動されてシフタ5を摺動し、該油圧がリリーフ圧となってリリーフ弁33が開弁した時点でピストン35及びシフタ5の摺動が停止する。そのときの操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT2以上になっているのであれば、その傾倒角度Tに対応する圧接度で旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7の制動板7a・7b同士が圧接し、その圧接度に相応する制動力が旋回内側の車軸4に対してはたらくこととなる。 After the relief port 34b communicates with the hydraulic oil chamber 34a, the piston is moved based on the movement of the spring receiver 41 based on the arbitrary setting of the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 in the range from the angle T1 to the maximum angle Tmax. The degree of compression of the spring 43 corresponding to the urging force against 42, that is, the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 is set. Accordingly, the piston 35 of the steering actuator 34 in the operating state (inside of turning) is slid on the shifter 5 by being pushed until the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic oil chamber 34a reaches the relief pressure set in this way, When the hydraulic pressure becomes the relief pressure and the relief valve 33 is opened, the sliding of the piston 35 and the shifter 5 stops. If the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 at that time is equal to or greater than T2, the brake plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn are pressed against each other with a pressure contact degree corresponding to the tilt angle T, A braking force corresponding to the degree of pressure contact acts on the axle 4 inside the turn.
 操向レバー11の左傾動角度LTが最大角度Tmaxになると、カム操作アーム46の位置が、図4に示す「Lm」位置となり、カム板44によるバネ受け41の押し上げ量が最大になり、バネ43の付勢力(圧縮度)、すなわちリリーフ弁33のリリーフ圧が最大になって、左シフタ5Lは最大外側方摺動位置に達し、左サイドブレーキ7Lの制動力は最大になる。 When the left tilt angle LT of the steering lever 11 reaches the maximum angle Tmax, the position of the cam operation arm 46 becomes the “Lm” position shown in FIG. 4, and the push-up amount of the spring receiver 41 by the cam plate 44 is maximized. The urging force (compression degree) 43, that is, the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 becomes maximum, the left shifter 5L reaches the maximum outward sliding position, and the braking force of the left side brake 7L becomes maximum.
 ここで、図2及び図9に示す、ミッションケース20の、車両操向用アクチュエータセット2を取り付ける部分に、ブリーザ160を構成した実施例について説明する。なお、図9には、トランスミッション1の左右方向と上下方向とを示す。 Here, a description will be given of an embodiment in which a breather 160 is configured in a portion where the vehicle steering actuator set 2 is attached to the mission case 20 shown in FIGS. FIG. 9 shows the left-right direction and the up-down direction of the transmission 1.
 図3に示すように、ミッションケース20を構成する左右ハウジング120L・120Rの前面部には、車両操向用アクチュエータセット2の油路ブロック38を取り付けるためのマウントリブ130が前方隆起状に形成されている。マウントリブ130には螺子孔134が形成されている。油路ブロック38は、各螺子孔134に螺入されたボルト38fによって、ミッションケース20に締止される。 As shown in FIG. 3, a mounting rib 130 for attaching the oil passage block 38 of the vehicle steering actuator set 2 is formed in a front bulging shape on the front surface of the left and right housings 120 </ b> L and 120 </ b> R constituting the mission case 20. ing. A screw hole 134 is formed in the mount rib 130. The oil passage block 38 is fastened to the transmission case 20 by a bolt 38f screwed into each screw hole 134.
 マウントリブ130は、第一仕切壁130aと第二仕切壁130bとを含む。マウントリブ130によって囲まれる領域は、第一仕切壁130aと第二仕切壁130bとにより、第一室131と第二室132と第三室133に区画される。ミッションケース20の前面部には、ミッションケース20の内部と第一室131とを連通する連通孔161が形成されている。更に、ミッションケース20の内部には、空気導入口20iが形成されている(図2参照)。第一室131の内部には、連通口161と空気導入口20iとを通って空気が導入される。 The mount rib 130 includes a first partition wall 130a and a second partition wall 130b. A region surrounded by the mounting rib 130 is partitioned into a first chamber 131, a second chamber 132, and a third chamber 133 by the first partition wall 130a and the second partition wall 130b. A communication hole 161 that communicates the inside of the mission case 20 and the first chamber 131 is formed in the front portion of the mission case 20. Furthermore, an air inlet 20i is formed inside the mission case 20 (see FIG. 2). Air is introduced into the first chamber 131 through the communication port 161 and the air introduction port 20i.
 第一仕切壁130aには、第一室131と第二室132とを連通する連通溝162が形成されている。第二仕切壁130bには、第二室132と第三室133とを連通する連通溝163が形成されている。更に、マウントリブ130のうち、第三室133を囲う部分には、スリット状のブリーザ溝164と、連通口165とが形成されている。ブリーザ溝164は、第三室133とミッションケース20の外部とを連通する。なお、ブリーザ溝164に代えて、必要に応じてマウントリブ130の側面に連通口を設けてもよい。連通口165は、第三室133とミッションケース20の外部とを連通する小孔である。連通口165には、上方を向くブリーザ管166が取り付けられる。図9においては、ブリーザ溝164とブリーザ管166との両方を図示しているが、ブリーザ160は少なくとも何れか一つを有していればよい。 The first partition wall 130a is formed with a communication groove 162 that allows the first chamber 131 and the second chamber 132 to communicate with each other. A communication groove 163 that connects the second chamber 132 and the third chamber 133 is formed in the second partition wall 130b. Further, a slit-like breather groove 164 and a communication port 165 are formed in a portion of the mount rib 130 surrounding the third chamber 133. The breather groove 164 communicates the third chamber 133 and the outside of the mission case 20. Instead of the breather groove 164, a communication port may be provided on the side surface of the mount rib 130 as necessary. The communication port 165 is a small hole that communicates the third chamber 133 with the outside of the mission case 20. A breather pipe 166 facing upward is attached to the communication port 165. In FIG. 9, both the breather groove 164 and the breather pipe 166 are illustrated, but the breather 160 may have at least one of them.
 次に、シフタ5の所謂「弾き」を回避するため、クラッチ切り状態でのシフタ5の動きに対し抵抗を付与する構成に関するいくつかの実施例について説明する。なお、シフタ5の「弾き」とは、サイドクラッチ6が切断状態から接続状態に移行する際に、シフタ5のクラッチ爪6bが分配ギア22のクラッチ爪6aとうまく同期せずに噛み合わず、シフタ5のクラッチ爪6bが回転中の分配ギア22のクラッチ爪6aに「弾かれる」現象をいう。このシフタ5の「弾き」は、クラッチ爪6a・6bの磨耗やバネ5aの焼き付きといった問題を引き起こすものである。 Next, in order to avoid the so-called “bounce” of the shifter 5, some embodiments relating to a configuration for imparting resistance to the movement of the shifter 5 in the clutch disengaged state will be described. The “flip” of the shifter 5 means that when the side clutch 6 shifts from the disconnected state to the connected state, the clutch pawl 6b of the shifter 5 does not synchronize well with the clutch pawl 6a of the distribution gear 22, and the shifter 5 No. 5 clutch pawl 6b is “bounced” by the clutch pawl 6a of the rotating distribution gear 22. This “flipping” of the shifter 5 causes problems such as wear of the clutch claws 6a and 6b and seizure of the spring 5a.
 シフタ5の当該動きに対する抵抗を付与する構造としては、操向レバー11の回動に抵抗を付与する構造と、サイドクラッチ軸21に対するシフタ5の摺動に抵抗を付与する構造とがある。そのうち、まず、操向レバー11の動きに抵抗を付与する構造に関する第一実施例としての、図11に示す抵抗機構170について説明する。抵抗機構170は、リニア式の流体ダンパを備える。なお、代わって、ロータリ式の流体ダンパを備えるものとしてもよい。抵抗機構170は、シリンダ172、枢軸173、アーム174、及び、ピストンロッド175を有する。シリンダ172は、ケース172aとケース172bとを接合することによって形成されており、車両のフレームやダッシュボード等に固定される等して、該車両に配設されている。シリンダ172の内部には、油又は気体が封入されている。 As a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the shifter 5, there are a structure for imparting resistance to rotation of the steering lever 11 and a structure for imparting resistance to sliding of the shifter 5 with respect to the side clutch shaft 21. First, a resistance mechanism 170 shown in FIG. 11 will be described as a first embodiment relating to a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the steering lever 11. The resistance mechanism 170 includes a linear fluid damper. Instead, a rotary fluid damper may be provided. The resistance mechanism 170 includes a cylinder 172, a pivot 173, an arm 174, and a piston rod 175. The cylinder 172 is formed by joining the case 172a and the case 172b, and is disposed in the vehicle by being fixed to the frame or dashboard of the vehicle. Oil or gas is sealed inside the cylinder 172.
 ピストンロッド175の先端にアーム174が固設されており、アーム174は、枢軸173を介して操向レバー11に枢結されている。操向レバー11が左方に傾倒すると、ピストンロッド175は、図中の左方に移動し、且つ、操向レバー11が右方に傾倒すると、ピストンロッド175は、図中の右方に移動する。シリンダ172において、ピストンロッド175が貫通するケース172a・172bの壁部には、それぞれ、オイルシール176a・176bが取り付けられている。 An arm 174 is fixed to the tip of the piston rod 175, and the arm 174 is pivotally connected to the steering lever 11 via a pivot 173. When the steering lever 11 tilts to the left, the piston rod 175 moves to the left in the figure, and when the steering lever 11 tilts to the right, the piston rod 175 moves to the right in the figure. To do. In the cylinder 172, oil seals 176a and 176b are respectively attached to the walls of the cases 172a and 172b through which the piston rod 175 passes.
 シリンダ172の内部には、受圧室171が形成されている。受圧室171内には、流体が満たされている。受圧室171は、サイドクラッチ領域Rn、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfa、及び、左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbを含む。シリンダ172の内周壁の形状によって、これらの領域の境界を形成する内周壁の位置が領域ごとに異なっている。詳細には、シリンダ172の内周壁のうち、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaを形成する穴172d及び左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbを形成する穴172eの口径は、サイドクラッチ領域Rnを形成する穴172cの口径よりも大きく、ピストン部175cの外径に近い。 A pressure receiving chamber 171 is formed inside the cylinder 172. The pressure receiving chamber 171 is filled with fluid. The pressure receiving chamber 171 includes a side clutch region Rn, a right side brake region Rfa, and a left side brake region Rfb. Depending on the shape of the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172, the position of the inner peripheral wall that forms the boundary between these regions differs from region to region. Specifically, the diameter of the hole 172d that forms the right side brake region Rfa and the hole 172e that forms the left side brake region Rfb in the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172 is larger than the diameter of the hole 172c that forms the side clutch region Rn. It is large and close to the outer diameter of the piston portion 175c.
 ピストンロッド175のピストン部175cは、ピストンロッド175の中部においてフランジ状に突出する部分である。ピストン部175cには、オリフィス孔175dが形成されている。オリフィス孔175dは、ピストン部175cの右押圧面175eから左押圧面175fに渡って貫通している。また、ピストン部175cの外周壁面175hには、オイルシール176cが取り付けられている。ピストン部175cは、操向レバー11の傾倒に伴って、ピストンロッド175とともに移動する。 The piston portion 175c of the piston rod 175 is a portion protruding in a flange shape at the middle portion of the piston rod 175. An orifice hole 175d is formed in the piston portion 175c. The orifice hole 175d penetrates from the right pressing surface 175e of the piston portion 175c to the left pressing surface 175f. An oil seal 176c is attached to the outer peripheral wall surface 175h of the piston portion 175c. The piston portion 175 c moves together with the piston rod 175 as the steering lever 11 is tilted.
 シリンダ172の内周壁には、段差172fと段差172hとが形成されている。段差172fを境に、シリンダ172の内部が右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaとサイドクラッチ領域Rnとに区画される。段差172hを境に、シリンダ172の内部がサイドクラッチ領域Rnと左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbとに区画される。 A step 172f and a step 172h are formed on the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172. The inside of the cylinder 172 is partitioned into a right side brake region Rfa and a side clutch region Rn with the step 172f as a boundary. The inside of the cylinder 172 is partitioned into a side clutch region Rn and a left side brake region Rfb with the step 172h as a boundary.
 受圧室171内の流体は、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaをピストン部175cが移動する場合及び左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbをピストン部175cが移動する場合には、オリフィス孔175dを通過する必要がある。そのため、サイドクラッチ領域Rnにあるピストン部175cが右方に移動することによってピストン部175cの右押圧面175eが右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaに進入する時には、操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗が増大する。一方、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaにあるピストン部175cが左方に移動することによってピストン部175cの外周壁面175hが段差172fを通過する時には、操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗が減少する。サイドクラッチ領域Rnと左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbとの間を移動するピストン部175cによって、操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗は同様に増大又は減少する。 The fluid in the pressure receiving chamber 171 needs to pass through the orifice hole 175d when the piston portion 175c moves in the right side brake region Rfa and when the piston portion 175c moves in the left side brake region Rfb. Therefore, when the right pressing surface 175e of the piston portion 175c enters the right side brake region Rfa due to the rightward movement of the piston portion 175c in the side clutch region Rn, the operation resistance applied to the steering lever 11 increases. On the other hand, when the outer peripheral wall surface 175h of the piston portion 175c passes through the step 172f due to the leftward movement of the piston portion 175c in the right side brake region Rfa, the operation resistance applied to the steering lever 11 decreases. The operating resistance applied to the steering lever 11 is similarly increased or decreased by the piston portion 175c moving between the side clutch region Rn and the left side brake region Rfb.
 サイドクラッチ領域Rnから右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaへ右押圧面175eが進入を開始する時点は、右サイドクラッチ6Rの切断の開始点に一致する。サイドクラッチ領域Rnから右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaへ右押圧面175eが進入を開始する時点とは、ピストン部175cが移動する方向に沿って、右押圧面175eの位置が段差172fの位置に一致する時点である。サイドクラッチ領域Rnから左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbへ左押圧面175fが進入を開始する時点は、左サイドクラッチ6Lの切断の開始点に一致する。サイドクラッチ領域Rnから左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbへ左押圧面175fが進入を開始する時点とは、ピストン部175cが移動する方向に沿って、左押圧面175fの位置が段差172hの位置に一致する時点である。 The time when the right pressing surface 175e starts to enter from the side clutch region Rn to the right side brake region Rfa coincides with the starting point of disconnection of the right side clutch 6R. The time when the right pressing surface 175e starts to enter the right side brake region Rfa from the side clutch region Rn is the time when the position of the right pressing surface 175e matches the position of the step 172f along the direction in which the piston portion 175c moves. It is. The time when the left pressing surface 175f starts to enter the left side brake region Rfb from the side clutch region Rn coincides with the starting point of disconnection of the left side clutch 6L. The time point when the left pressing surface 175f starts to enter the left side brake region Rfb from the side clutch region Rn is the time point when the position of the left pressing surface 175f matches the position of the step 172h along the direction in which the piston portion 175c moves. It is.
 なお、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfa内のピストン部175cの右押圧面175eが、右シフタ5Rの外側方(右方)摺動量が最大値に達して右サイドブレーキ7Rが最大制動力を発揮する状態となるまでに、シリンダ172の内周壁の一端面172iに当接するに至ることはない。また、左サイドブレーキ領域Rfb内のピストン部175cの左押圧面175fが、左サイドブレーキ7Lの外側方(左方)摺動量が最大値に達して左サイドブレーキ7Lが最大制動力を発揮する状態となるまでに、シリンダ172の内周壁の他端面172jに当接するに至ることもない。 The right pressing surface 175e of the piston portion 175c in the right side brake region Rfa is in a state where the outer side (right side) sliding amount of the right shifter 5R reaches the maximum value and the right side brake 7R exhibits the maximum braking force. By the time, it does not come into contact with the one end surface 172i of the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172. In addition, the left pressing surface 175f of the piston portion 175c in the left side brake region Rfb reaches the maximum value of the outer side (left side) sliding amount of the left side brake 7L, and the left side brake 7L exhibits the maximum braking force. Until reaching the other end surface 172j of the inner peripheral wall of the cylinder 172.
 一方、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaからサイドクラッチ領域Rnに向かってピストン部175cが移動する場合には、ピストン部175cが移動する方向に沿って右押圧面175eの位置が段差172fの位置に一致する時点までに、操向レバー11に操作抵抗が掛かる。この操作抵抗によって操向レバー11の回動が抑制されるため、右サイドクラッチ6Rの切断状態から接続状態への移行が抑制される。これにより、右シフタ5Rの「弾き」が抑止される。そして、右サイドブレーキ領域Rfaからサイドクラッチ領域Rnに向かってピストン部175cが移動する場合に、ピストン部175cの外周壁面175hが段差172fを通過した後には、操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗が解消される。 On the other hand, when the piston portion 175c moves from the right side brake region Rfa toward the side clutch region Rn, the time when the position of the right pressing surface 175e matches the position of the step 172f along the direction in which the piston portion 175c moves. By the time, the operating resistance is applied to the steering lever 11. Since the rotation of the steering lever 11 is suppressed by this operation resistance, the transition from the disconnected state to the connected state of the right side clutch 6R is suppressed. Thereby, “playing” of the right shifter 5R is suppressed. When the piston portion 175c moves from the right side brake region Rfa toward the side clutch region Rn, the operation resistance applied to the steering lever 11 is eliminated after the outer peripheral wall surface 175h of the piston portion 175c passes through the step 172f. Is done.
 また、左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbからサイドクラッチ領域Rnに向かってピストン部175cが移動する場合に、ピストン部175cが移動する方向に沿って左押圧面175fの位置が段差172hの位置に一致する時点までには、操向レバー11に操作抵抗が掛かる。この操作抵抗によって操向レバー11の回動が抑制されるため、左サイドクラッチ6Lの切断状態から接続状態への移行が抑制される。これにより、左シフタ5Lの「弾き」が抑止される。そして、左サイドブレーキ領域Rfbからサイドクラッチ領域Rnに向かってピストン部175cが移動する場合に、ピストン部75cの外周壁面175hが段差172hを通過した後には、操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗が解消される。 Further, when the piston portion 175c moves from the left side brake region Rfb toward the side clutch region Rn, until the position of the left pressing surface 175f matches the position of the step 172h along the direction in which the piston portion 175c moves. Therefore, an operating resistance is applied to the steering lever 11. Since the rotation of the steering lever 11 is suppressed by this operation resistance, the transition from the disconnected state to the connected state of the left side clutch 6L is suppressed. Thereby, “playing” of the left shifter 5L is suppressed. Then, when the piston portion 175c moves from the left side brake region Rfb toward the side clutch region Rn, after the outer peripheral wall surface 175h of the piston portion 75c passes through the step 172h, the operation resistance applied to the steering lever 11 is eliminated. Is done.
 このように、抵抗機構170は、サイドブレーキ7が最大制動力を発揮する状態から、サイドクラッチ6Rの切断状態と接続状態との切換点(操向レバー11の傾動角度TがT1となる位置)までにシフタ5が戻るまでの期間、操向レバー11に操作抵抗Rを付与する(厳密にいえば、操作抵抗Rが増大して、所定の値Rhになる)ことで、サイドクラッチ6を接続する方向におけるシフタ5の摺動速度を遅くし、シフタ5Rのクラッチ爪6bが、「弾き」を生じることなく分配ギア22のクラッチ爪6aと噛合するようにしている。一旦、クラッチ爪6bがクラッチ爪6bと噛合する(サイドクラッチ6が接続される)と、操向レバー11を直進位置に戻すまで操向抵抗がかかることはなく、また、逆に、操向レバー11を直進位置(T=0)から傾倒角度T1まで傾倒させるまでは操作抵抗Rがかからない(厳密にいえば、操作抵抗Rが最小値R0となる)ので、この傾倒範囲での操向レバー11の傾動によるサイドクラッチ6の迅速な反応を確保している。 In this way, the resistance mechanism 170 switches from the state in which the side brake 7 exhibits the maximum braking force to the switching state between the disconnected state and the connected state of the side clutch 6R (position where the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is T1). During the period until the shifter 5 returns, the side clutch 6 is connected by applying the operating resistance R to the steering lever 11 (strictly speaking, the operating resistance R increases to a predetermined value Rh). In this direction, the sliding speed of the shifter 5 is slowed so that the clutch pawl 6b of the shifter 5R meshes with the clutch pawl 6a of the distribution gear 22 without causing "playing". Once the clutch pawl 6b is engaged with the clutch pawl 6b (the side clutch 6 is connected), no steering resistance is applied until the steering lever 11 is returned to the straight position, and conversely, the steering lever The operating resistance R is not applied until the motor 11 is tilted from the straight position (T = 0) to the tilting angle T1 (strictly speaking, the operating resistance R becomes the minimum value R0), and therefore the steering lever 11 in this tilting range is used. The quick reaction of the side clutch 6 due to the tilting of is ensured.
 以上の操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tと操向レバー11に掛かる抵抗機構170による操作抵抗Rとの関係を示したものが、図12のグラフである。 FIG. 12 is a graph showing the relationship between the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 and the operating resistance R by the resistance mechanism 170 applied to the steering lever 11.
 次に、操向レバー11の動きに抵抗を付与する構造に関する第二実施例としての、図13(A)及び図13(B)に示す摩擦(抵抗)機構180について説明する。操向レバー11の抵抗機構の一実施例としての摩擦機構180は、アーム181、押当部材182、ストッパ183、支持杆184、枢軸185、ボス186、及び、引張バネ187を有する。 Next, a friction (resistance) mechanism 180 shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B as a second embodiment relating to a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the steering lever 11 will be described. A friction mechanism 180 as an example of a resistance mechanism of the steering lever 11 includes an arm 181, a pressing member 182, a stopper 183, a support rod 184, a pivot 185, a boss 186, and a tension spring 187.
 支持杆184の途中部に形成されるボス186が、枢軸185に環設され、枢軸185にて支持杆84を枢支している。支持杆184は、枢軸185の中心軸線185cを中心にして回転できる。支持杆184の一端には押当部材182が設けられ、他端部には引張バネ187の一端が取り付けられている。引張バネ187の他端は、車両のフレーム等に固定されている。 A boss 186 formed in the middle of the support rod 184 is provided around the pivot shaft 185, and the support rod 84 is pivotally supported by the pivot shaft 185. The support rod 184 can rotate around the central axis 185 c of the pivot 185. A pressing member 182 is provided at one end of the support rod 184, and one end of a tension spring 187 is attached to the other end. The other end of the tension spring 187 is fixed to a vehicle frame or the like.
 アーム181は、操向レバー11の操作に応じて回転可能に、ボス11aに取り付けられる。アーム181は、ボス11aを挟んで、操向レバー11の反対側に位置する。扇形状を有するアーム181のうち、円弧形状の縁の中心部は、その両脇の部分よりも凹んでいる。この中心部を非摩擦領域181aと称し、これら両脇の部分を摩擦領域181b・181cと称する。なお、図示しないが、図13(A)及び図13(B)の操向レバー11にも、図10の操向レバー11に設けられているような左右のバルブスイッチ53L・53Rが備えられており、それらのONとOFFとを切り替える機構を備えている。 The arm 181 is attached to the boss 11 a so as to be rotatable according to the operation of the steering lever 11. The arm 181 is located on the opposite side of the steering lever 11 with the boss 11a interposed therebetween. In the arm 181 having a fan shape, the center part of the edge of the arc shape is recessed more than the parts on both sides. This central portion is referred to as a non-friction region 181a, and the portions on both sides thereof are referred to as friction regions 181b and 181c. Although not shown, the steering lever 11 in FIGS. 13A and 13B is also provided with left and right valve switches 53L and 53R as provided in the steering lever 11 in FIG. And a mechanism for switching between ON and OFF.
 引張コイルバネ187は、押当部材182をアーム181に向かわせるように支持杆184を引っ張っている。これにより、支持杆184には、支持杆184を枢軸185回りに回転させる弾性力が掛かっている。言い換えると、支持杆184には、押当部材182を上方に移動させる弾性力が掛かっている。 The tension coil spring 187 pulls the support rod 184 so that the pressing member 182 faces the arm 181. As a result, an elastic force is applied to the support rod 184 to rotate the support rod 184 about the pivot 185. In other words, the support rod 184 is applied with an elastic force that moves the pressing member 182 upward.
 ストッパ183は、車両のフレーム等に対して固定されている。操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tが角度T1未満である状態においては、支持杆184がストッパ183に接触することにより、押当部材182が非摩擦領域181aの下方に位置してアーム181に接触しない。 The stopper 183 is fixed to the vehicle frame or the like. In a state where the tilting angle T of the steering lever 11 is less than the angle T1, the pressing member 182 is positioned below the non-friction region 181a and does not contact the arm 181 when the support rod 184 contacts the stopper 183. .
 押当部材182は、操向レバー11の傾倒に応じて、サイドブレーキ7が作動する状態のときにアーム181に接触し、制動力が解消されるとアーム181との接触が解消される。 The pressing member 182 contacts the arm 181 when the side brake 7 is activated according to the tilt of the steering lever 11, and the contact with the arm 181 is canceled when the braking force is released.
 操向レバー11が傾倒することにより、傾倒角度Tが角度T1に達する時点において、アーム181の摩擦領域181b・181cに対する押当部材182の接触が開始されるため、支持杆184とストッパ183との接触が解消される。操向レバー11が右方に傾倒する場合には、摩擦領域181bにてアーム181が押当部材182に接触する。操向レバー11が左方に傾倒する場合には、摩擦領域181cにてアーム181が押当部材182に接触する。摩擦領域181b・181cにてアーム181が押当部材182と当接するときには、アーム181の円弧形状の縁と押当部材182との間において摩擦が生じるため、操向レバー11の傾倒を抑制する操作抵抗が操向レバー11に掛かる。 When the steering lever 11 is tilted, when the tilt angle T reaches the angle T1, the contact of the pressing member 182 with the friction regions 181b and 181c of the arm 181 is started, so that the support rod 184 and the stopper 183 contact each other. Contact is resolved. When the steering lever 11 tilts to the right, the arm 181 contacts the pressing member 182 in the friction region 181b. When the steering lever 11 tilts to the left, the arm 181 contacts the pressing member 182 in the friction region 181c. When the arm 181 comes into contact with the pressing member 182 in the friction regions 181b and 181c, friction is generated between the arc-shaped edge of the arm 181 and the pressing member 182, so that the operation of suppressing the tilt of the steering lever 11 is suppressed. Resistance is applied to the steering lever 11.
 直進位置から右方に傾倒した操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT1を経過した後は、傾倒角度Tが右方最大傾倒角度Tmaxに至るまで、すなわち、右シフタ5Rの外側方(右方)摺動量が最大値に達して右サイドブレーキ7Rが最大制動力を発揮する状態になるまで、押当部材182が、摩擦領域181bで円弧状アーム181の縁に接触し、一定の摩擦抵抗(図13に示す操作抵抗Rh)をアーム181に付与し続ける。一方、直進位置から左方に傾倒した操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT1を経過した後は、傾倒角度Tが左方最大傾倒角度Tmaxに至るまで、すなわち、左シフタ5Lの外側方(左方)摺動量が最大値に達して左サイドブレーキ7Lが最大制動力を発揮する状態になるまで、押当部材182が、摩擦領域181cで円弧状アーム181の縁に接触し、一定の摩擦抵抗(図13に示す操作抵抗Rh)をアーム181に付与し続ける。 After the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 tilted to the right from the straight traveling position has passed T1, until the tilt angle T reaches the maximum right tilt angle Tmax, that is, outward (rightward) of the right shifter 5R. The pressing member 182 contacts the edge of the arc-shaped arm 181 in the friction region 181b until the sliding amount reaches the maximum value and the right side brake 7R exhibits the maximum braking force. 13 continues to be applied to the arm 181. On the other hand, after the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 tilted to the left from the straight traveling position has passed T1, until the tilt angle T reaches the maximum left tilt angle Tmax, that is, outside the left shifter 5L (left The pushing member 182 contacts the edge of the arc-shaped arm 181 in the friction region 181c until the sliding amount reaches the maximum value and the left side brake 7L reaches the maximum braking force. (Operation resistance Rh shown in FIG. 13) is continuously applied to the arm 181.
 摩擦領域181bにてアーム181が押当部材182と接触している状態、あるいは摩擦領域181cにてアーム181が押当部材182と接触している状態から操向レバー11が左方もしくは右方に傾倒する場合に、押当部材182からアーム181が離間するまでには、操向レバー11に操作抵抗(Rh)が掛かる。そして、アーム181が非摩擦領域181aにて押当部材182に対峙するようになって押当部材182から離間するようになってからは、アーム181が直進位置まで左回転する間、操向レバー11には、押当部材182による操作抵抗がかからない状態となる(操作抵抗が最小値R0である)。 From the state where the arm 181 is in contact with the pressing member 182 in the friction region 181b or the state where the arm 181 is in contact with the pressing member 182 in the friction region 181c, the steering lever 11 is moved to the left or right. In the case of tilting, an operation resistance (Rh) is applied to the steering lever 11 until the arm 181 is separated from the pressing member 182. Then, after the arm 181 is opposed to the pressing member 182 in the non-friction region 181a and is separated from the pressing member 182, the steering lever is operated while the arm 181 rotates counterclockwise to the rectilinear position. 11, the operation resistance by the pressing member 182 is not applied (the operation resistance is the minimum value R0).
 このように、摩擦機構180は、サイドブレーキ7が最大制動力を発揮する状態から、サイドクラッチ6の切断状態から接続状態への移行開始点までにシフタ5が戻る間に、サイドクラッチ6の切断状態から接続状態への移行を抑制する操作抵抗を操向レバー11に付与し続けシフタ5Lの「弾き」を抑止する。 As described above, the friction mechanism 180 disengages the side clutch 6 while the shifter 5 returns from the state in which the side brake 7 exhibits the maximum braking force to the start point of transition from the disconnected state of the side clutch 6 to the connected state. The operation resistance that suppresses the transition from the state to the connected state is continuously applied to the steering lever 11 and “play” of the shifter 5L is suppressed.
 次に、サイドクラッチ軸21に対するシフタ5の摺動に抵抗を付与する構造の実施例として、図14に示す抵抗機構188について説明する。 Next, a resistance mechanism 188 shown in FIG. 14 will be described as an example of a structure for imparting resistance to the sliding of the shifter 5 with respect to the side clutch shaft 21.
 抵抗機構188は、シフタ5の摺動するサイドクラッチ軸21の外周面に摩擦部21fを設けたものである。摩擦部21fは、摩擦部21fを設けていないサイドクラッチ軸21の外周面の摩擦係数よりも大きな摩擦係数を有する。摩擦部21fを設ける手段としては、サイドクラッチ軸21の外周面に摩擦材を被覆することが考えられるが、摩擦材を被覆する方法としては、シート状の摩擦材を貼り付ける方法や、液状の摩擦材を吹きつけたり塗布したりする方法等が考えられる。あるいは、サイドクラッチ軸21とは別の摩擦材を設けるのではなく、サイドクラッチ軸21自体の外周面を表面加工する方法も考えられる。なお、図14は、摩擦部21fを設けた左サイドクラッチ軸21を図示しているが、図14に図示されていない右サイドクラッチ軸21にも摩擦部21fが設けられている。 The resistance mechanism 188 is provided with a friction portion 21f on the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 on which the shifter 5 slides. The friction part 21f has a friction coefficient larger than the friction coefficient of the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 where the friction part 21f is not provided. As a means for providing the friction portion 21f, it is conceivable to coat the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 with a friction material. As a method of coating the friction material, a method of attaching a sheet-like friction material, A method of spraying or applying a friction material can be considered. Alternatively, instead of providing a friction material different from the side clutch shaft 21, a method of surface processing the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21 itself is also conceivable. 14 shows the left side clutch shaft 21 provided with the friction portion 21f, the friction portion 21f is also provided on the right side clutch shaft 21 not shown in FIG.
 図12に示すように、サイドクラッチ軸21上でのシフタ5の移動中、シフタ5の内周部のブッシュ5dが摩擦部21fに接触する時には、シフタ5に一定の摺動抵抗Rhがかかり、ブッシュ5dが摩擦部21fに接触しない時(サイドクラッチ軸21の外周面のうち摩擦部21f以外の部分と接触する時)には、摺動抵抗の最小値R0がかかる。摺動抵抗がR0とRhとの間で変化するシフタ5の位置は、サイドクラッチ6が接続状態と切断状態との間で移行する位置に該当し、操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT1となる位置に該当する。 As shown in FIG. 12, during the movement of the shifter 5 on the side clutch shaft 21, when the bush 5d of the inner peripheral portion of the shifter 5 comes into contact with the friction portion 21f, a certain sliding resistance Rh is applied to the shifter 5, When the bush 5d does not contact the friction part 21f (when it contacts the part other than the friction part 21f on the outer peripheral surface of the side clutch shaft 21), the minimum value R0 of the sliding resistance is applied. The position of the shifter 5 where the sliding resistance changes between R0 and Rh corresponds to the position where the side clutch 6 moves between the connected state and the disconnected state, and the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is T1. Corresponds to the position.
 サイドクラッチ6を切るべくシフタ5が外側方(シフタ5が左シフタ5Lならば左方)に移動する中で、当初は最小値R0だった摺動抵抗が一定の摺動抵抗Rhへと増大する。シフタ5が外側方に移動することによってブッシュ5dの外端5d1と摩擦部21fとの接触が開始される時点は、そのサイドクラッチ6の切断の開始点に一致する。すなわち、シフタ5が摺動しつつもサイドクラッチ6が入っている間(クラッチ爪6a・6bが噛み合っている間)は、摺動抵抗は最小値R0であり、クラッチ爪6bがクラッチ爪6bから外れた途端、シフタ5には摺動抵抗Rhがかかり、以後、シフタ5の外側方への摺動中、一定値Rhの摺動抵抗がかかる。サイトブレーキ7によりサイドクラッチ軸21にかかる制動力が最大値となるシフタ5の外側方への摺動の終端位置に到達した時点においても、ブッシュ5dの内端5d2は、摩擦部21fよりも外側方(図14中の左方)には位置しておらず、ブッシュ5dは摩擦部21fに接触しているので、シフタ5には摺動抵抗Rhがかかったままである。 While the shifter 5 moves outward (to the left if the shifter 5 is the left shifter 5L) to disengage the side clutch 6, the sliding resistance that was initially the minimum value R0 increases to a constant sliding resistance Rh. . When the shifter 5 moves outward, the contact point between the outer end 5d1 of the bush 5d and the friction part 21f is coincident with the starting point of the side clutch 6 being disengaged. That is, the sliding resistance is the minimum value R0 while the side clutch 6 is engaged while the shifter 5 is sliding (while the clutch claws 6a and 6b are engaged), and the clutch pawl 6b is separated from the clutch pawl 6b. As soon as the shifter 5 is detached, a sliding resistance Rh is applied to the shifter 5, and thereafter, a sliding resistance of a constant value Rh is applied during the outward sliding of the shifter 5. Even when the braking force applied to the side clutch shaft 21 by the site brake 7 reaches the end position of the outward sliding of the shifter 5, the inner end 5d2 of the bush 5d is outside the friction portion 21f. Since the bush 5d is in contact with the friction portion 21f, the shifter 5 is still subjected to the sliding resistance Rh.
 シフタ5が内側方(図14で右方)に移動する場合に、ブッシュ5dと摩擦部21fとの接触が解消される時点までは、シフタ5に摺動抵抗Rhが掛かる。この摺動抵抗Rhにより、サイドクラッチ6の切断状態から接続状態への移行が抑制される。これにより、シフタ5の「弾き」が抑止される。シフタ5のクラッチ爪6bが分配ギア22のクラッチ爪6aと噛合開始する時点で、ブッシュ5dの外端5d1が摩擦部21fを通過し、以後は、シフタ5に掛かる摺動抵抗が解消される(摺動抵抗は最小値R0となる)。 When the shifter 5 moves inward (rightward in FIG. 14), the sliding resistance Rh is applied to the shifter 5 until the contact between the bush 5d and the friction portion 21f is eliminated. The sliding resistance Rh suppresses the transition of the side clutch 6 from the disconnected state to the connected state. Thereby, the “play” of the shifter 5 is suppressed. When the clutch pawl 6b of the shifter 5 starts to mesh with the clutch pawl 6a of the distribution gear 22, the outer end 5d1 of the bush 5d passes through the friction portion 21f, and thereafter the sliding resistance applied to the shifter 5 is eliminated ( The sliding resistance is the minimum value R0).
 以上の説明でわかるように、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tとシフタ5にかかる摩擦機構188による摺動抵抗との関係により、図12に示すような操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tと操向レバー11に掛かる操作抵抗の値との関係が現出される。 As can be understood from the above description, the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 and the steering as shown in FIG. A relationship with the value of the operating resistance applied to the lever 11 appears.
 次に、操向レバー11の動きに抵抗を付与する構造に関する他の実施例としての、図15(A)及び15(B)に示す抵抗機構189について説明する。 Next, a resistance mechanism 189 shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (B) as another embodiment relating to a structure for imparting resistance to the movement of the steering lever 11 will be described.
 抵抗機構189は、デテント機構190を含む。デテント機構190は、ボール193、ボール193が摺接する板部191並びにそれと対向するボール193保持用のケース192、及び、圧縮コイルバネであるバネ194を有する。板部191には、右側凹部191aと左側凹部191bとが設けられている。右側凹部191aと左側凹部191bとは、板部191の表面191cから窪んだ部分である。板部191は、トランスミッション1が搭載される車両のフレームやダッシュボード等に固定される。 The resistance mechanism 189 includes a detent mechanism 190. The detent mechanism 190 includes a ball 193, a plate portion 191 with which the ball 193 is slidably contacted, a case 192 for holding the ball 193 facing the ball 193, and a spring 194 that is a compression coil spring. The plate portion 191 is provided with a right recess 191a and a left recess 191b. The right recess 191a and the left recess 191b are portions that are recessed from the surface 191c of the plate portion 191. The plate portion 191 is fixed to a frame or dashboard of a vehicle on which the transmission 1 is mounted.
 ケース192は、操向レバー11に固定されている。ケース192は、フック部192aとキャップ部192bとを含む。バネ194は、キャップ部192bの底に受けられている。ボール193は、キャップ部192bの外に向かってバネ194に押されている。ケース192においては、フック部192aが操向レバー11に固定されている。操向レバー11が傾倒すると、ケース192も一緒に移動する。そのときのケース192の移動軌跡と一致するように、板部191はアーチ状に形成されている。 The case 192 is fixed to the steering lever 11. Case 192 includes a hook portion 192a and a cap portion 192b. The spring 194 is received at the bottom of the cap portion 192b. The ball 193 is pushed by the spring 194 toward the outside of the cap portion 192b. In the case 192, the hook portion 192 a is fixed to the steering lever 11. When the steering lever 11 is tilted, the case 192 moves together. The plate portion 191 is formed in an arch shape so as to coincide with the movement locus of the case 192 at that time.
 操向レバー11が直進位置にある場合には、ボール193は、右側凹部191aと左側凹部191bとの中間に位置して何れにも嵌っておらず、板部191の表面191cに接している。また、傾倒角度Tが増大して角度T1に達する時点においても、ボール193は板部191の表面191cに接している。操向レバー11の右傾倒角度RTが角度T2に達する時点においては、右側凹部191aにボール193が嵌り込む。 When the steering lever 11 is in the rectilinear position, the ball 193 is positioned between the right concave portion 191a and the left concave portion 191b and does not fit in either, and is in contact with the surface 191c of the plate portion 191. Further, even when the tilt angle T increases to reach the angle T1, the ball 193 is in contact with the surface 191c of the plate portion 191. When the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 reaches the angle T2, the ball 193 is fitted into the right recess 191a.
 操向レバー11の左傾倒角度LTが角度T2に達する時点においては、左側凹部191bにボール193が嵌り込む。傾倒角度Tが角度T2以上で操向レバー11が更に傾倒する場合に、ボール193は、右側凹部191a又は左側凹部191bから板部191の表面191cに乗り上げたうえで、再度、表面191c上を移動する。右側凹部191a又は左側凹部191bに嵌り込んだボール193を板部191の表面191cに乗り上げさせる場合にだけ、オペレータが操作する操向レバー11に、値Rhの操作抵抗Rが掛かる。 When the left tilt angle LT of the steering lever 11 reaches the angle T2, the ball 193 is fitted into the left recess 191b. When the steering lever 11 further tilts when the tilt angle T is equal to or greater than the angle T2, the ball 193 rides on the surface 191c of the plate portion 191 from the right recess 191a or the left recess 191b and then moves again on the surface 191c. To do. Only when the ball 193 fitted in the right concave portion 191a or the left concave portion 191b rides on the surface 191c of the plate portion 191, the manipulation resistance R of the value Rh is applied to the steering lever 11 operated by the operator.
 左右のサイドブレーキ7L・7Rが最大制動力を発揮する状態において、ボール193は、表面191cに接触している。ボール193が表面191cの上を滑動するときには、操向レバー11に最低値R0の操作抵抗Rが掛かる。 In the state where the left and right side brakes 7L and 7R exhibit the maximum braking force, the ball 193 is in contact with the surface 191c. When the ball 193 slides on the surface 191c, the operation resistance R of the minimum value R0 is applied to the steering lever 11.
 このように、抵抗機構189は、サイドブレーキ7が最大制動力を発揮する状態から、サイドクラッチ6の切断状態から接続状態への移行開始点までシフタ5が戻るときに、当該移行開始点の直前の一瞬だけサイドクラッチ6の切断状態から接続状態への移行を抑制する操作抵抗が操向レバー11に付与され、シフタ5の「弾き」を防止するものである。 Thus, when the shifter 5 returns from the state in which the side brake 7 exhibits the maximum braking force to the transition start point of the side clutch 6 from the disconnected state to the connected state, the resistance mechanism 189 immediately before the transition start point. An operation resistance that suppresses the transition of the side clutch 6 from the disconnected state to the connected state for a moment is applied to the steering lever 11 to prevent the “shift” of the shifter 5.
 次に、補助クラッチ8の接合圧設定操作手段及び接合圧増大操作手段について説明する。図1に示すように、トランスミッション1を備えた車両には、補助クラッチ8の接合圧の設定用操作具として、補助クラッチ接合圧設定用レバー(以下、単に「レバー」)12が設けられている。前記のアーム16は、レバー12の操作位置に対応した位置へと回動し、これにより、補助クラッチ用シフタ9の位置を制御し、補助クラッチ8における摩擦板8a・8b同士の圧接度を、レバー12にて設定した値に対応したものとする。 Next, the joining pressure setting operation means and the joining pressure increasing operation means of the auxiliary clutch 8 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, a vehicle equipped with a transmission 1 is provided with an auxiliary clutch engagement pressure setting lever (hereinafter simply referred to as “lever”) 12 as an operation tool for setting the engagement pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. . The arm 16 is rotated to a position corresponding to the operation position of the lever 12, thereby controlling the position of the auxiliary clutch shifter 9, and the pressure contact degree between the friction plates 8 a and 8 b in the auxiliary clutch 8 is determined. It is assumed that it corresponds to the value set by lever 12.
 さらに、図1に示すように、トランスミッション1を備えた車両に、補助クラッチ接合圧を、レバー12で設定した値から任意で増大させることができるように、補助クラッチ接合圧増大用ペダル(以下、単に「ペダル」)13が設けられている。ペダル13は、リンク機構14を用いて、補助クラッチ用シフタ9制御用のアーム16に機械的に連係されている。このペダル13の使用態様としては、例えば、車両が旋回中にぬかるみにはまった場合に、レバー12で設定した接合圧で接合している補助クラッチ8を介して、旋回外側の駆動列3から、サイドクラッチ6が切れた状態の旋回内側の駆動列3へと駆動力が伝達されるが、その設定された補助クラッチ8の接合圧では、ぬかるみを脱するには動力の伝達量が足りないと感じた場合等に、緊急的にペダル13を踏み込み、その踏込み量に応じて、補助クラッチ8の接合力を増大させるものである。 Further, as shown in FIG. 1, an auxiliary clutch engagement pressure increasing pedal (hereinafter referred to as “auxiliary clutch engagement pressure increase pedal”) can be increased in a vehicle equipped with the transmission 1 from the value set by the lever 12. A simply “pedal”) 13 is provided. The pedal 13 is mechanically linked to an arm 16 for controlling the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 using a link mechanism 14. As an aspect of use of the pedal 13, for example, when the vehicle gets muddy during turning, the auxiliary clutch 8 joined with the joining pressure set by the lever 12 is used from the drive train 3 outside the turning, The driving force is transmitted to the driving train 3 on the inner side of the turn with the side clutch 6 disengaged, but with the set joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, there is not enough power to be transmitted to remove the muddyness. When it feels, the pedal 13 is urgently depressed, and the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased according to the depression amount.
 図18に示す実施例では、ペダル13の非踏込み位置を画定するストッパ68を上下に可動とし、この可動ストッパ68の位置が、レバー12の操作位置の検出に基づきコントローラ10にて制御される電子制御式アクチュエータ67にて制御されものとしている。この図7の実施例におけるレバー12、ペダル13、アーム16の関連構造について詳述する。 In the embodiment shown in FIG. 18, a stopper 68 that demarcates the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 is movable up and down. It is controlled by a control type actuator 67. The related structure of the lever 12, the pedal 13, and the arm 16 in the embodiment of FIG. 7 will be described in detail.
 ペダル13は、基端に形成したボス13aを、左右方向の軸心を有する枢軸70に装着しており、枢軸70を中心に上下に回動自在となっている。ボス13aからは下方にアーム13bが延設されており、ペダル13を踏み込んで下降させると、アーム13bが前方に回動する構造となっている。アーム13bの直後方にはアウタワイヤ受け63が設置されており、該アーム13bの先端(下端)とアウタワイヤ受け63との間にバネ64を介設している。バネ64はアーム13bを後方に付勢し、これによりペダル13を上方(非踏込み位置)へと付勢している。ペダル13の踏み込みは、このバネ64に抗して行われることとなり、ペダル13への踏込みを解除すると、ペダル13は、バネ64の付勢力にて上方回動して非踏込み位置に復帰する。 The pedal 13 has a boss 13a formed at the base end mounted on a pivot 70 having a horizontal axis, and is pivotable up and down around the pivot 70. An arm 13b extends downward from the boss 13a, and when the pedal 13 is depressed and lowered, the arm 13b rotates forward. An outer wire receiver 63 is installed immediately after the arm 13 b, and a spring 64 is interposed between the tip (lower end) of the arm 13 b and the outer wire receiver 63. The spring 64 urges the arm 13b rearward, thereby urging the pedal 13 upward (non-depressed position). The depression of the pedal 13 is performed against the spring 64. When the depression of the pedal 13 is released, the pedal 13 is rotated upward by the urging force of the spring 64 and returns to the non-depressed position.
 アーム16の近傍にもアウタワイヤ受け65が設置されていて、アウタワイヤ63・65にアウタワイヤ62の両端の各々が固定されている。アウタワイヤ62にはインナワイヤ61が挿通されていて、アウタワイヤ受け63に固定されるアウタワイヤ62の一端部より延出されるインナワイヤ61の一端部61aがアーム13bに枢結され、アウタワイヤ受け65に固定されるアウタワイヤ62の他端部より延出されるインナワイヤ61の他端部61bがアーム13bの先端に枢結されている。こうして、インナワイヤ61、アウタワイヤ62、アウタワイヤ受け63・65にて、ペダル13とアーム16とを連係する前記リンク機構14が構成されており、ペダル13を踏み込むと、アーム13bがバネ64に抗して回動してインナワイヤ61を引っ張り、これにより、アーム16を補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大方向に回動させる。 The outer wire receiver 65 is also installed in the vicinity of the arm 16, and both ends of the outer wire 62 are fixed to the outer wires 63 and 65. An inner wire 61 is inserted into the outer wire 62, and one end portion 61 a of the inner wire 61 extending from one end portion of the outer wire 62 fixed to the outer wire receiver 63 is pivotally connected to the arm 13 b and is fixed to the outer wire receiver 65. The other end 61b of the inner wire 61 extending from the other end of 62 is pivoted to the tip of the arm 13b. Thus, the inner wire 61, the outer wire 62, and the outer wire receivers 63, 65 constitute the link mechanism 14 that links the pedal 13 and the arm 16, and when the pedal 13 is depressed, the arm 13b resists the spring 64. It rotates and pulls the inner wire 61, thereby rotating the arm 16 in the increasing direction of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8.
 レバー12は、その基端のボス12aを、左右方向の枢軸71に装着することで、枢軸71周りに前後に回動可能となっている。レバー12は、例えば車両のコンソールに設けた前後方向のレバーガイド溝19に挿通しており、レバーガイド溝19の前端から後端までの範囲で回動可能とされている。こうしてレバーガイド溝19にて画定されるレバー12の前後回動範囲において、その前端位置となるレバー12の操作位置を、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を最小値(例えば0)に設定するための操作位置である「最小接合圧設定位置Cmin」とし、後端位置となるレバー12の操作位置を、補助クラッチ8の接合圧をレバー12での設定範囲内での最大値に設定するための操作位置である「最大接合圧設定位置Cmax」としている。すなわち、レバー12を後方に回動することで、設定される補助クラッチ8の接合圧が高くなる構成としている。 The lever 12 is pivotable back and forth around the pivot 71 by mounting the boss 12a at the base end thereof to the pivot 71 in the left-right direction. The lever 12 is inserted through a lever guide groove 19 in the front-rear direction provided on the console of the vehicle, for example, and is rotatable in a range from the front end to the rear end of the lever guide groove 19. Thus, in the longitudinal rotation range of the lever 12 defined by the lever guide groove 19, an operation for setting the operation position of the lever 12 as the front end position thereof to the minimum value (for example, 0) of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set. The operation position for setting the operation pressure of the lever 12 as the rear end position to the maximum value within the setting range of the lever 12 is set as the operation position of the lever 12 as the rear end position. "Maximum bonding pressure setting position Cmax". In other words, by turning the lever 12 rearward, the set joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased.
 レバーガイド溝19には、補助クラッチ8の接合圧の各設定値に対応するレバー12の操作位置ごとに、デテント用のノッチ(鋸歯)が形成されている。補助クラッチ8の接合圧を設定する際には、オペレータは、レバー12に手をかけてこれをガイド溝19に沿って回動し、目標の接合圧に対応する操作位置に配置する。ここで、当該操作位置に形成されたノッチにレバー12を係止させることで、レバー12から手を離しても、該レバー12は、その操作位置に固定されることとなる。こうして、レバー12がその操作位置にて固定されていて、かつ、ペダル13を非踏込み位置にしている限り、補助クラッチ8の接合圧は、レバー12の操作位置に対応する設定値で保持される。補助クラッチ8の接合圧を変更する場合には、レバー12を、元の操作位置のノッチから外し、該レバー12を他の操作位置へと回動し、該他の操作位置に該当するノッチに該レバー12を係止するものである。 In the lever guide groove 19, notches (saw teeth) for detent are formed for each operation position of the lever 12 corresponding to each set value of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. When setting the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the operator puts his hand on the lever 12 and rotates it along the guide groove 19 and arranges it at the operation position corresponding to the target joining pressure. Here, by locking the lever 12 in the notch formed at the operation position, the lever 12 is fixed at the operation position even when the lever 12 is released. Thus, as long as the lever 12 is fixed at the operating position and the pedal 13 is set to the non-depressed position, the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is held at a set value corresponding to the operating position of the lever 12. . When the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is changed, the lever 12 is removed from the notch at the original operation position, the lever 12 is rotated to another operation position, and the notch corresponding to the other operation position is set. The lever 12 is locked.
 レバー12の近傍には、レバー12の回動位置(操作位置)を検出する位置検出センサ66が配設されている。コントローラ10は、位置検出センサ66の検出信号に基づいてアクチュエータ67に指令信号を送り、アクチュエータ67は、該指令信号に対応してストッパ68を位置決めする。バネ64にて上方付勢されるペダル13がストッパ68に押接する位置が、そのときにレバー12にて補助クラッチ8の接合圧を設定した状態においてのペダル13の非踏込み位置となる。レバー12にて設定する補助クラッチ8の接合圧が高いほど、ストッパ68の位置が低くなり、その位置のストッパ68にて規定される非踏込み位置にあるペダル13の位置も低くなり、リンク機構14、アーム16、シフタ9を介して、補助クラッチ8の接合圧も高められる。 In the vicinity of the lever 12, a position detection sensor 66 for detecting the rotation position (operation position) of the lever 12 is disposed. The controller 10 sends a command signal to the actuator 67 based on the detection signal of the position detection sensor 66, and the actuator 67 positions the stopper 68 in response to the command signal. The position where the pedal 13 urged upward by the spring 64 presses against the stopper 68 is the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 in a state where the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set by the lever 12 at that time. The higher the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 set by the lever 12, the lower the position of the stopper 68, and the lower the position of the pedal 13 at the non-depressed position defined by the stopper 68 at that position. The joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is also increased through the arm 16 and the shifter 9.
 こうして、レバー12の操作にて、ペダル13を非踏込み位置にしている状態での補助クラッチ8の接合圧が設定されるものであり、その接合圧では足りないと感じたときに、オペレータがその非踏込み位置からペダル13を踏み込むことで、補助クラッチ8の接合圧が、レバー12にて設定された値から、ペダル13の踏込み量に応じた値まで増大する。 Thus, when the lever 12 is operated, the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 in the state where the pedal 13 is in the non-depressed position is set. When the operator feels that the joint pressure is not sufficient, By depressing the pedal 13 from the non-depressed position, the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 increases from a value set by the lever 12 to a value corresponding to the depressing amount of the pedal 13.
 車両旋回のための操向レバー11の操作時において、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7の制動板7a・7bの圧接度は、前述の如く、操向レバー11の、T2~Tmaxの範囲での傾倒角度Tの設定に応じて決まる。このとき、旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6は切れているが、レバー12で補助クラッチ8の接合圧を設定していると、サイドブレーキ7は、補助クラッチ8を介して旋回外側の駆動列3の駆動力の一部を受けて駆動する旋回内側の駆動列3を制動することとなる。ここで、ペダル13を踏み込んだ場合、旋回内側の駆動列3にはさらに駆動力が伝達され、サイドブレーキ7に対する抵抗が増大し、サイドブレーキ7の摩擦板7a・7b及び補助クラッチ8の摩擦板8a・8bの双方に焼き付きが生じやすくなる。一方で、ペダル13を踏み込む場面として考えられるのは、旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度が、想定した速度よりも落ちてしまう場合であり、つまり、この状態でさらにサイドブレーキ7をかけるよりも、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を上げて旋回外側の駆動列3から旋回内側の駆動列3への動力の伝達量を増やしてまで、旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度を上げたい場合である。 When the steering lever 11 for turning the vehicle is operated, the pressure contact degree of the braking plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 inside the turning is the tilt angle of the steering lever 11 in the range of T2 to Tmax as described above. It depends on the setting of T. At this time, the side clutch 6 on the inner side of the turn is disconnected, but if the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set by the lever 12, the side brake 7 drives the drive train 3 on the outer side of the turn via the auxiliary clutch 8. The drive train 3 inside the turning which is driven by receiving a part of the force is braked. Here, when the pedal 13 is depressed, the driving force is further transmitted to the driving train 3 inside the turning, the resistance against the side brake 7 is increased, and the friction plates 7a and 7b of the side brake 7 and the friction plates of the auxiliary clutch 8 are increased. Image sticking is likely to occur in both 8a and 8b. On the other hand, a situation where the pedal 13 is depressed is considered to be a case where the rotational speed of the axle 4 inside the turn falls below the assumed speed, that is, rather than applying the side brake 7 further in this state, This is a case where it is desired to increase the rotational speed of the axle 4 on the inside of the turn until the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased to increase the amount of power transmitted from the drive train 3 on the outside of the turn to the drive train 3 on the inside of the turn.
 そこで、ペダル13の踏込みとサイドブレーキ7の作動とが同時に行われないように(すなわち、これらのうちの一方が行われているときは他方が行われないように)、操向レバー11に、図16乃至図18に示すような牽制機構18を設けている。この牽制機構18の構造について、図16乃至図18の実施例により説明する。牽制機構18は、前記扇形アーム52に設けた押当子54、規制部材55、枢軸部材56等より構成されている。操向レバー11の近傍に規制部材55が配設されており、この規制部材55がリンク機構60を介してペダル13に連係されていることで、ペダル13の踏込みに連動して、規制部材55が操向レバー11の傾動を規制する状態に切り換えられるものとなっている。 Therefore, in order to prevent the depression of the pedal 13 and the operation of the side brake 7 from being performed at the same time (that is, not to perform the other when one of them is being performed) A check mechanism 18 as shown in FIGS. 16 to 18 is provided. The structure of the check mechanism 18 will be described with reference to the embodiments shown in FIGS. The check mechanism 18 includes a pusher 54 provided on the fan-shaped arm 52, a regulating member 55, a pivot member 56, and the like. A regulating member 55 is disposed in the vicinity of the steering lever 11, and this regulating member 55 is linked to the pedal 13 via the link mechanism 60, so that the regulating member 55 is interlocked with the depression of the pedal 13. Is switched to a state in which the tilting of the steering lever 11 is restricted.
 図16に示すように、操向レバー11の近傍には、枢軸部材56が設置されている。枢軸部材56は、車両の運転室の壁等に固設された上下一対の水平板状のブラケット56b・56b間に鉛直の枢軸56aを介設してなるものである。規制部材55は、鉛直のボス55cを有している。該規制部材55は、該ボス55cより一方に、上下一対の水平板状の規制部55a・55bを平行状に延設している。さらに、該規制部材55は、該ボス55cより他方に、すなわち、該規制部55a・55bに対し枢軸56aを介して反対側にて、該ボス55cより水平板状のアーム55dを延設している。 As shown in FIG. 16, a pivot member 56 is installed in the vicinity of the steering lever 11. The pivot member 56 is formed by interposing a vertical pivot 56a between a pair of upper and lower horizontal plate- like brackets 56b and 56b fixed to the wall or the like of the cab of the vehicle. The restricting member 55 has a vertical boss 55c. The restriction member 55 has a pair of upper and lower horizontal plate- like restriction portions 55a and 55b extending in parallel to one side from the boss 55c. Further, the restricting member 55 has a horizontal plate-like arm 55d extending from the boss 55c to the other side of the boss 55c, that is, on the opposite side of the restricting portions 55a and 55b via the pivot 56a. Yes.
 一方、操向レバー11に一体に形成されている前記扇形アーム52の、前記リンク機構50におけるリンクロッド47の一端部47aが枢結される部分が、操向レバー11を直進位置にしているときに水平に延出する状態となる延出部52bとして形成されており、その先端部に、前記規制部材55の規制部55aまたは55bに押当可能な押当子54が設けられている。操向レバー11を直進位置に配しているときの延出部52b及び押当子54の位置は、上下方向において、上・下の規制部55a間の丁度中間の位置となる。 On the other hand, when the one end portion 47a of the link rod 47 of the link mechanism 50 of the fan-shaped arm 52 formed integrally with the steering lever 11 is pivoted, the steering lever 11 is in the straight advance position. The pusher 54 is formed as an extension part 52b that extends horizontally, and a pusher 54 that can be pushed against the restriction part 55a or 55b of the restriction member 55 is provided at the tip part. The positions of the extension part 52b and the pusher 54 when the steering lever 11 is arranged at the straight-ahead position are just intermediate positions between the upper and lower restricting parts 55a in the vertical direction.
 また、この実施例では、車両の右旋回のために操向レバー11を右方に回動すると、延出部52b及び押当子54が上方に回動し、車両の左旋回のために操向レバー11を左方に回動すると、延出部52b及び押当子54が下方に回動する構成としている。したがって、上側の規制部55aが、直進位置から右方への操向レバー11の回動を規制するためのものであり、下側の規制部55bが、直進位置から左方への操向レバー11の回動を規制するためのものであるが、この操向レバー11の左右の回動方向と上下の規制部55a・55bとの関係は、逆でもよい。 Further, in this embodiment, when the steering lever 11 is rotated to the right for turning the vehicle to the right, the extending portion 52b and the pusher 54 are rotated upward to turn the vehicle to the left. When the steering lever 11 is rotated to the left, the extending portion 52b and the pressing element 54 are configured to rotate downward. Accordingly, the upper restricting portion 55a is for restricting the rotation of the steering lever 11 from the straight traveling position to the right, and the lower restricting portion 55b is the steering lever from the straight traveling position to the left. However, the relationship between the left and right turning directions of the steering lever 11 and the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b may be reversed.
 逆に、押当子54が、上側の規制部55aより上方にあるか、下側の規制部55bより下方にある場合、すなわち、上・下の規制部55a・55bの間の範囲から外れている場合は、押当子54及び扇形アーム52の延出部52bが、上・下の規制部55a・55bの、扇形アーム52に向かっての回動を規制するものとなる。これにより、後述の如く規制部材55に連係されているペダル13の踏込みを規制するものである。 Conversely, when the pressing element 54 is above the upper restricting portion 55a or below the lower restricting portion 55b, that is, out of the range between the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b. In this case, the pusher 54 and the extending portion 52b of the fan-shaped arm 52 restrict the rotation of the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b toward the fan-shaped arm 52. As a result, the depression of the pedal 13 linked to the regulating member 55 is regulated as will be described later.
 規制部材55のアーム55dの近傍にはアウタワイヤ受け59が設置されており、アウタワイヤ58の一端部がアウタワイヤ受け59に固定されている一方、アウタワイヤ58の他端部が、前記アウタワイヤ受け63に固定されている。アウタワイヤ58にはインナワイヤ57が挿通されている。インナワイヤ57は、アウタワイヤ受け59に固定されたアウタワイヤ58の一端部より延出されて、その一端部57aを、アーム55dの先端に枢結している。一方、インナワイヤ57は、アウタワイヤ受け63に固定されたアウタワイヤ58の他端部より延出されて、その他端部57bを、ペダル13のアーム13bに枢結されている。このように、インナワイヤ57、アウタワイヤ58、アウタワイヤ受け59・63にて、規制部材55とペダル13とを連係するリンク機構60が構成されている。 An outer wire receiver 59 is installed in the vicinity of the arm 55 d of the regulating member 55, and one end portion of the outer wire 58 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 59, while the other end portion of the outer wire 58 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 63. ing. An inner wire 57 is inserted into the outer wire 58. The inner wire 57 extends from one end of the outer wire 58 fixed to the outer wire receiver 59, and the one end 57a is pivotally connected to the tip of the arm 55d. On the other hand, the inner wire 57 extends from the other end portion of the outer wire 58 fixed to the outer wire receiver 63, and the other end portion 57 b is pivotally connected to the arm 13 b of the pedal 13. In this manner, the inner wire 57, the outer wire 58, and the outer wire receivers 59 and 63 constitute the link mechanism 60 that links the restricting member 55 and the pedal 13.
 なお、図20に示す実施例では、アウタワイヤ受け63において、アウタワイヤ58がアウタワイヤ62の上方に配置され、該アウタワイヤ受け63からアーム13bまで延出されるインナワイヤ57・61のうち、インナワイヤ57をインナワイヤ61の上方に配置しているが、この上下関係は逆でもよい。また、両インナワイヤ57・61の端部57b・61bがアーム13bの一側に枢結されているが、これらをアーム13bの他側に枢結してもよいし、あるいは、インナワイヤ57の端部57bをアーム13bの一側に、インナワイヤ61の端部61bをアーム13bの他側に、それぞれ枢結するものとしてもよい。 In the embodiment shown in FIG. 20, in the outer wire receiver 63, the outer wire 58 is disposed above the outer wire 62. Of the inner wires 57 and 61 extending from the outer wire receiver 63 to the arm 13 b, the inner wire 57 is the Although arranged above, this vertical relationship may be reversed. Further, the end portions 57b and 61b of both the inner wires 57 and 61 are pivoted to one side of the arm 13b, but these may be pivoted to the other side of the arm 13b, or the end portions of the inner wire 57 57b may be connected to one side of the arm 13b, and the end 61b of the inner wire 61 may be connected to the other side of the arm 13b.
 以上のようなリンク機構60の構成により、ペダル13を踏み込むにつれ、インナワイヤ57がアーム13bに引っ張られて、規制部材55におけるアーム55dが鉛直の枢軸56a周りにて水平回動し、それと一体状に上・下の規制部55a・55bが水平回動する。 With the structure of the link mechanism 60 as described above, as the pedal 13 is depressed, the inner wire 57 is pulled by the arm 13b, and the arm 55d of the restricting member 55 rotates horizontally around the vertical pivot 56a, and is integrated therewith. The upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b rotate horizontally.
 ここで、図16乃至図18には、上・下の規制部55a・55bの規制解除位置X及び規制位置Yが図示されている。上・下規制部55a・55bが規制解除位置Xにあるときは、操向レバー11とともに扇形アーム52が回動する中で、押当子54が上側の規制部55aまたは下側の規制部55bに押当することはなく、すなわち、扇形アーム52の回動は規制されないので、操向レバー11を、その傾倒角度Tが最大角度Tmaxに至るまで回動することができる。したがって、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を制動状態に作動することができる。 Here, FIGS. 16 to 18 show the restriction release position X and the restriction position Y of the upper and lower restriction portions 55a and 55b. When the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are in the restriction release position X, the pusher 54 is moved upward or downward with the steering lever 11 while the fan-shaped arm 52 rotates. In other words, since the rotation of the sector arm 52 is not restricted, the steering lever 11 can be rotated until the tilt angle T reaches the maximum angle Tmax. Therefore, the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn can be operated in the braking state.
 上・下規制部55a・55bが規制位置Yにあるときは、操向レバー11を直進位置からある角度まで傾倒すると、押当子54が上側の規制部55aまたは下側の規制部55bに押当し、その角度より先に操向レバー11を傾倒することができない。すなわち、操向レバー11及び扇形アーム52の回動が規制される。この、押当子54が上側の規制部55aまたは下側の規制部55bに押当するときの操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tは、T1~T2の範囲にある角度とする。これにより、旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6は切れるものの、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7はかからないものとなる。 When the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are in the restricting position Y, when the steering lever 11 is tilted from the straight advance position to an angle, the pusher 54 is pushed against the upper restricting portion 55a or the lower restricting portion 55b. The steering lever 11 cannot be tilted before the angle. That is, the turning of the steering lever 11 and the fan-shaped arm 52 is restricted. The tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 when the pressing element 54 presses against the upper restricting portion 55a or the lower restricting portion 55b is an angle in the range of T1 to T2. Thereby, although the side clutch 6 inside the turning is cut off, the side brake 7 inside the turning is not applied.
 また、上・下規制部55a・55bが規制解除位置Xにある間に、操向レバー11の傾倒角度TをT2~Tmaxの範囲にまで到達させて、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7をかけた状態において、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させるべくペダル13を踏み込もうとすると、ペダル13の踏込みにより規制部材55が回動するものの、上側の規制部55aまたは下側の規制部55b(例えば操向レバー11を右方に傾倒している場合は上側の規制部55a)が、扇形アーム52の延出部52b及び押当子54に阻まれて、規制位置Yまで到達することはできない。このように、規制部材55の回動が阻まれることにより、それがリンク機構60を介して伝わって、ペダル13の下方回動も阻まれることとなる。これにより、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7がかかっている場合は、ペダル13の踏込みによる補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大が規制されるものである。 In addition, while the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are in the restriction release position X, the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 reaches the range of T2 to Tmax and the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn is applied. When the pedal 13 is to be depressed to increase the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the restriction member 55 is rotated by the depression of the pedal 13, but the upper restriction part 55a or the lower restriction part 55b (for example, the control member 55). When the direction lever 11 is tilted to the right, the upper restricting portion 55 a) cannot reach the restricting position Y by being blocked by the extending portion 52 b and the pusher 54 of the fan-shaped arm 52. In this way, when the rotation of the restricting member 55 is prevented, it is transmitted via the link mechanism 60 and the downward rotation of the pedal 13 is also prevented. As a result, when the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn is applied, an increase in the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 due to the depression of the pedal 13 is restricted.
 図18では、ペダル13がストッパ68に押当して非踏込み位置にあるときに、上・下規制部55a・55bが前記規制解除位置Xに配置され、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込んだときに、上・下規制部55a・55bが前記規制位置Yに配置される態様を図示している。ここで、前述の如く、ペダル13の非踏込み位置は、レバー12の操作に基づくストッパ68の位置決めにより画定されるが、補助クラッチ8の接合圧がレバー12で設定された範囲内で設定されている間は、サイドブレーキ7がかかるようにしておく必要がある。そのため、踏込み位置Dは、レバー12にて設定される範囲での補助クラッチ8の最大接合圧(レバー12を最大接合圧設定位置Cmaxに配置することにより得られる接合圧)に対応するペダル13の位置(上下可動域の最下位置に位置するストッパ68で規定されるペダル13の非踏込み位置)よりも下方の、最大踏込み位置までの範囲で設定されている。後述の、図19乃至図28の各実施例でも、このように設定されたペダル13の踏込み位置Dを採用するものとする。 In FIG. 18, when the pedal 13 is pressed against the stopper 68 and is in the non-depressed position, the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are arranged at the restriction release position X and the pedal 13 is depressed to the depressed position D. Further, a mode in which the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are arranged at the restricting position Y is illustrated. Here, as described above, the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 is defined by the positioning of the stopper 68 based on the operation of the lever 12, but the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set within the range set by the lever 12. The side brake 7 needs to be applied while the vehicle is on. Therefore, the depression position D corresponds to the maximum joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 in the range set by the lever 12 (joint pressure obtained by placing the lever 12 at the maximum joint pressure setting position Cmax). The position is set in a range from the position (the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 defined by the stopper 68 positioned at the lowest position of the vertical movable range) to the maximum depressed position. In each of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 19 to 28 described later, the depression position D of the pedal 13 set in this way is adopted.
 車両の直進中や、車両旋回時で旋回内側のサイドクラッチ6は切れているがサイドサイドブレーキ7はかかっていない段階において、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込むと、補助クラッチ8の接合圧は、レバー12での設定範囲での最大値を超えて増大される。この状態から操向レバー11をさらに傾倒させてサイドブレーキ7をきかせようとしても、規制部材55の上・下規制部55a・55bが規制位置Yに配置されていて、そこから操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tを、T2を超える範囲にまで到達させることはできず、サイドブレーキ7がかかることはない。 When the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D while the vehicle is traveling straight or when the side clutch 6 inside the turn is turned off but the side side brake 7 is not applied when the vehicle is turning, the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is It is increased beyond the maximum value in the setting range of the lever 12. Even if the steering lever 11 is further tilted from this state and the side brake 7 is to be applied, the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b of the restricting member 55 are disposed at the restricting position Y, and the steering lever 11 The tilt angle T cannot reach a range exceeding T2, and the side brake 7 is not applied.
 一方、ペダル13は非踏込み位置にある状態においては、上・下規制部55a・55bは規制解除位置Xにあり、車両旋回のために操向レバー11を傾倒させて、その傾倒角度TをT2~Tmaxの範囲に到達させると、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7が作用する(制動状態となる)。この状態から、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を高めようとペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込もうとしても、押当子54や扇形アーム52の延出部52bが、規制部材55の回動を阻んで、上・下規制部55a・55bは規制位置Yまで回動することはできず、したがって、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込むことはできない。 On the other hand, in the state where the pedal 13 is in the non-depressed position, the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b are in the restriction releasing position X, and the steering lever 11 is tilted for turning the vehicle, and the tilt angle T is set to T2. When reaching the range of ~ Tmax, the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turning acts (becomes a braking state). From this state, even if the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D in order to increase the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the pusher 54 and the extending portion 52 b of the fan-shaped arm 52 prevent the restriction member 55 from rotating. Thus, the upper / lower restricting portions 55a and 55b cannot be rotated to the restricting position Y, and therefore the pedal 13 cannot be depressed to the depressed position D.
 以上のような構成により、補助クラッチ8の接合圧の値がレバー12にて設定可能な範囲内にあるときは、操向レバー11を傾倒角度T2から最大角度Tmaxまでの範囲に傾倒させることができて、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かせることができる。そして、ペダル13の踏込みにて、補助クラッチ8の接合圧がレバー12で設定可能な範囲を超えるまで増大された場合に、牽制機構18において規制部材55が扇形アーム52・押当子54の回動を阻むことにより、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tは、T2に達するまでのところで規制され、サイドブレーキ7が効かない状態となる。一方、操向レバー11を傾倒角度T2から最大角度Tmaxまでの範囲に傾倒させて旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かせた状態のときに、牽制機構18において扇形アーム52・押当子54が規制部材55の回動を阻むことにより、ペダル13は、踏込み位置Dに達するまでのところで規制され、レバー12で設定可能な範囲を超えて増大させようとした補助クラッチ8の接合圧を、当該踏込み位置Dに対応する接合圧の値まで増大することはできない。 With the configuration as described above, when the value of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is within the range that can be set by the lever 12, the steering lever 11 can be tilted to the range from the tilt angle T2 to the maximum angle Tmax. Thus, the side brake 7 inside the turn can be applied. When the pedal 13 is depressed to increase the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 beyond a range that can be set by the lever 12, the restricting member 55 rotates the fan-shaped arm 52 and the pusher 54 in the check mechanism 18. By blocking the movement, the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is restricted until T2 is reached, and the side brake 7 does not work. On the other hand, when the steering lever 11 is tilted in the range from the tilt angle T2 to the maximum angle Tmax and the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn is applied, the fan-shaped arm 52 and the pusher 54 are regulated in the check mechanism 18. By blocking the rotation of the member 55, the pedal 13 is restricted until reaching the stepping position D, and the stepping-on pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 that attempts to increase beyond the range that can be set by the lever 12 is applied. It cannot be increased to the value of the bonding pressure corresponding to the position D.
 以上のように、図16乃至図18に示す実施例においては、操向レバー11に牽制機構18を設けるとともに、リンク機構60を介して該牽制機構18をペダル13に連係させる構成としており、該牽制機構18及びリンク機構60は、サイドブレーキ7をかけるための操向レバー11の傾倒操作と、設定範囲を超えて補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させるためのペダル13の踏込み操作とが同時に行われようとするときに、一方の操作を規制するように機能するよう構成されているのである。 As described above, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the control mechanism 18 is provided in the steering lever 11 and the control mechanism 18 is linked to the pedal 13 via the link mechanism 60. The check mechanism 18 and the link mechanism 60 simultaneously perform the tilting operation of the steering lever 11 for applying the side brake 7 and the depression operation of the pedal 13 for increasing the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 beyond the set range. It is configured to function so as to restrict one operation when trying to break.
 以上、図16乃至図18に示される、車両旋回のための操向操作手段としての操向レバー11、補助クラッチ8の接合圧の設定のための操作手段としてのレバー12、及び、補助クラッチ8の接合圧の設定値からの増大のためのペダル13の連関構造に関しての実施例(第一実施例)について説明した。図19乃至図26には、このような連関構造に関する他の実施例(第二乃至第五実施例)が示されている。以下、これらの実施例について説明する。なお、各実施例を示す図面の中で、その実施例の説明の前に説明したものと同じ部材や部分、あるいは同じ機能を有する部材や部分には、同じ符合を付しており、これらについては、原則的に説明を省略する。 As described above, the steering lever 11 as the steering operating means for turning the vehicle, the lever 12 as the operating means for setting the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, and the auxiliary clutch 8 shown in FIGS. The embodiment (first embodiment) related to the linkage structure of the pedal 13 for increasing the set pressure of the joint pressure of the pedal has been described. FIGS. 19 to 26 show other embodiments (second to fifth embodiments) relating to such an association structure. Hereinafter, these examples will be described. In the drawings showing the respective embodiments, the same members and parts as those described before the description of the embodiments or the members and parts having the same functions are denoted by the same reference numerals. Will be omitted in principle.
 まず、図19及び図20に示す第二実施例について説明する。この実施例においては、レバー12の操作位置の検出に基づきペダル13の非踏込み位置を画定するストッパ68の位置をアクチュエータ67にて制御する構造は、図16乃至図18の第一実施例のものと同じである。 First, the second embodiment shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 will be described. In this embodiment, the structure in which the position of the stopper 68 that defines the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 is controlled by the actuator 67 based on the detection of the operation position of the lever 12 is that of the first embodiment of FIGS. Is the same.
 操向レバー11のボス11aからは、扇形アーム72が延出されており、前述の扇形アーム52と同様に、操向レバー11を直進位置にしたときにバルブスイッチ53の押当子53aが嵌入するように構成されたデテント溝72aを扇形アーム72の円弧縁の一部に形成しており、また、リリーフ弁33のリリーフ圧制御用のカム操作アーム46に連結されるリンク機構50のリンクロッド47の端部47aが扇形アーム72に枢結されている。 A fan-shaped arm 72 extends from the boss 11 a of the steering lever 11, and the pusher 53 a of the valve switch 53 is fitted when the steering lever 11 is set to the straight movement position, as in the above-described fan-shaped arm 52. The detent groove 72a configured to be formed in a part of the arc edge of the sector arm 72, and the link rod of the link mechanism 50 connected to the cam operating arm 46 for relief pressure control of the relief valve 33 An end 47 a of 47 is pivotally connected to the fan-shaped arm 72.
 本実施例においては、操向レバー11とペダル13との同時操作を規制するための牽制機構として別形態の牽制機構18Aが次のような構成で操向レバー11に設けられている。扇形アーム72の円弧縁の他の部分には、規制溝72bが形成されている。扇形アーム72の近傍には、操向レバー11の回動支点軸としての枢支軸51に対し平行な前後水平方向に延設された枢軸73周りに回動可能である規制部材74が配置されている。規制部材74は、枢軸73の外周面に装着されるボス74aを有し、ボス74aより規制アーム74b及び連結アーム74cを延設している。規制アーム74bの先端にはローラ75が枢支されており、規制アーム74bが扇形アーム72に向けて回動することで、ローラ75が扇形アーム72の規制溝72bに嵌入する構成となっている。 In this embodiment, another type of check mechanism 18A as a check mechanism for restricting simultaneous operation of the steering lever 11 and the pedal 13 is provided in the steering lever 11 as follows. A restriction groove 72 b is formed in the other part of the arc edge of the sector arm 72. In the vicinity of the fan-shaped arm 72, a regulating member 74 that is rotatable around a pivot 73 that extends in the front-rear horizontal direction parallel to the pivot 51 as a pivot fulcrum of the steering lever 11 is disposed. ing. The restricting member 74 has a boss 74a mounted on the outer peripheral surface of the pivot 73, and a restricting arm 74b and a connecting arm 74c are extended from the boss 74a. A roller 75 is pivotally supported at the tip of the regulation arm 74 b, and the roller 75 is fitted into the regulation groove 72 b of the sector arm 72 by rotating the regulation arm 74 b toward the sector arm 72. .
 一方、枢軸70には、ペダル13に隣接配置される押動部材81が枢支されている。押動部材81は、ボス81aを有し、これを、ペダル13のボス13aに隣接するように、枢軸70に装着している。ボス81aからは押当杆81bが延出されている。該押当杆81bは、枢軸70の径方向に延出された後、曲折して、枢軸70に対し平行に延出し、この延出部分を、ペダル13のアーム13bの直前方に配置している。なお、押動部材81は、図外の付勢手段にて、押当杆81bがアーム13bの前端に押圧されるように付勢されている。 On the other hand, a pushing member 81 disposed adjacent to the pedal 13 is pivotally supported on the pivot 70. The pushing member 81 has a boss 81 a, which is attached to the pivot 70 so as to be adjacent to the boss 13 a of the pedal 13. A pressing rod 81b extends from the boss 81a. The pushing rod 81b extends in the radial direction of the pivot 70, then bends and extends in parallel to the pivot 70, and this extended portion is disposed immediately before the arm 13b of the pedal 13. Yes. The pushing member 81 is urged by urging means (not shown) so that the pushing rod 81b is pressed against the front end of the arm 13b.
 押動部材81には、さらに、連結アーム81cが、枢軸70の他の径方向にボス81aより延出するように形成されている。前記の規制部材74の連結アーム74cの近傍にはアウタワイヤ受け78が配置され、押動部材81の連結アーム81cの近傍にはアウタワイヤ受け79が配置されている。アウタワイヤ受け78にはアウタワイヤ77の一端部が固定され、アウタワイヤ受け79にはアウタワイヤ77の他端部が固定されている。アウタワイヤ77にはインナワイヤ76が挿通されて、アウタワイヤ受け78に固定されるアウタワイヤ77の一端部より延出されるインナワイヤ76の一端部76aが連結アーム74cの先端に枢結され、アウタワイヤ受け79に固定されるアウタワイヤ77の他端部より延出されるインナワイヤ76の他端部76bが連結アーム81cの先端に枢結されている。こうして、インナワイヤ76、アウタワイヤ77、アウタワイヤ受け78・79にて、操向レバー11側の規制部材74と、ペダル13側の押動部材81とを連係するリンク機構80が構成されている。 Further, a connecting arm 81 c is formed on the push member 81 so as to extend from the boss 81 a in the other radial direction of the pivot 70. An outer wire receiver 78 is disposed in the vicinity of the connecting arm 74 c of the restricting member 74, and an outer wire receiver 79 is disposed in the vicinity of the connecting arm 81 c of the pushing member 81. One end of the outer wire 77 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 78, and the other end of the outer wire 77 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 79. An inner wire 76 is inserted into the outer wire 77, and one end 76 a of the inner wire 76 extending from one end of the outer wire 77 fixed to the outer wire receiver 78 is pivotally connected to the tip of the connecting arm 74 c and fixed to the outer wire receiver 79. The other end 76b of the inner wire 76 extending from the other end of the outer wire 77 is pivotally connected to the tip of the connecting arm 81c. Thus, the inner wire 76, the outer wire 77, and the outer wire receivers 78 and 79 constitute a link mechanism 80 that links the control member 74 on the steering lever 11 side and the pushing member 81 on the pedal 13 side.
 ペダル13を下降させると、アーム13bが前方回動して、アーム13bの前端に押接される押当杆81bを押動する。これにより、押動部材81が枢軸70を中心に回動し、連結アーム81cが、リンク機構80のインナワイヤ76を介して、連結アーム74cを引っ張り、枢軸73を中心に規制部材74を回動させる。この回動により、規制アーム74aが扇形アーム72に向かって回動する。ペダル13が踏込み位置Dまで踏み込まれると、扇形アーム72に向かって回動する規制アーム74bのローラ75が扇形アーム72の規制溝72bに嵌入する。 When the pedal 13 is lowered, the arm 13b rotates forward to push the pressing rod 81b pressed against the front end of the arm 13b. As a result, the pushing member 81 rotates about the pivot 70, the connecting arm 81 c pulls the connecting arm 74 c via the inner wire 76 of the link mechanism 80, and rotates the regulating member 74 about the pivot 73. . By this rotation, the restriction arm 74 a is rotated toward the sector arm 72. When the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D, the roller 75 of the restriction arm 74 b that rotates toward the sector arm 72 is fitted into the restriction groove 72 b of the sector arm 72.
 規制溝72bは、扇形アーム72の円弧縁の方向に、ある程度の幅をもっており、規制溝72bに嵌入した場合のローラ75が、操向レバー11の直進位置からの傾動による扇形アーム72の回動に伴って、規制溝72b内での相対位置を移動可能となっている。この規制溝72bの幅は、直進位置から左方または右方に傾動した操向レバー11の傾倒角度TがT1~T2の範囲での角度に達したときに、ローラ75が、規制溝72bの端部に達して、それ以上扇形アーム72を回動できないようにするよう、設定されている。 The restricting groove 72b has a certain width in the direction of the arc edge of the fan-shaped arm 72, and the roller 75 when fitted into the restricting groove 72b is rotated by the tilt of the steering lever 11 from the straight position. Accordingly, the relative position in the regulation groove 72b can be moved. The width of the restriction groove 72b is such that when the tilting angle T of the steering lever 11 tilted to the left or right from the straight traveling position reaches an angle in the range of T1 to T2, the roller 75 has the width of the restriction groove 72b. It is set so that the fan-shaped arm 72 cannot be rotated any more after reaching the end.
 以上のように牽制機構18Aやリンク機構80等が構成されていることにより、車両の直進時や、サイドブレーキ7がかからない状態での旋回時において、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込むと、規制部材74のローラ75が扇形アーム72の規制溝72bに嵌入して、扇形アーム72の回動が規制されることとなり、これにより、操向レバー11の直進位置からの傾倒が、傾倒角度T2までの範囲で制限され、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7が効かないものである。 By configuring the check mechanism 18A, the link mechanism 80, and the like as described above, when the pedal 13 is depressed to the depressed position D when the vehicle is traveling straight or when the side brake 7 is not applied, the regulating member 74 rollers 75 are inserted into the restriction grooves 72b of the fan-shaped arm 72, and the rotation of the fan-shaped arm 72 is restricted. As a result, the tilt of the steering lever 11 from the rectilinear position reaches the tilt angle T2. The range is limited, and the side brake 7 inside the turn does not work.
 一方、傾倒角度TがT2を超えるまで操向レバー11を傾倒して、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7が作動している状態においては、扇形アーム72の規制溝72bは、規制アーム74b先端のローラ75の回動軌跡から外れる。この状態から、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込もうとしても、ローラ75は、規制溝72bの外の、扇形アーム72の円弧縁に押当し、規制部材74の回動が規制されることとなり、これにより、ペダル13の踏込みが、踏込み位置Dまでの範囲で制限され、補助クラッチ8の接合圧をそこまで増大できないものである。 On the other hand, in the state where the steering lever 11 is tilted until the tilt angle T exceeds T2 and the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turning is operating, the restriction groove 72b of the sector arm 72 has a roller 75 at the tip of the restriction arm 74b. Deviate from the rotation trajectory. In this state, even if the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D, the roller 75 is pressed against the arc edge of the sector arm 72 outside the restriction groove 72b, and the rotation of the restriction member 74 is restricted. Thus, the depression of the pedal 13 is limited in the range up to the depression position D, and the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 cannot be increased to that extent.
 次に、図21及び図22に示す第三実施例について説明する。この実施例では、操向レバー11には図16乃至図18に示す第一実施例のものと同様の牽制機構18が設けられている一方、レバー12及びペダル13とは別体のアーム82が設けられており、補助クラッチ用シフタ9に連係されるアーム16に接続されるリンク機構14は、このアーム82とアーム16との間に介設されている。アーム82は、レバー12及びペダル13に機械的に連係されており、レバー12の操作により回動して、リンク機構14を介してアーム16を回動(補助クラッチ8の接合圧を変更)するものであり、また、レバー12が補助クラッチ8の接合圧をその設定範囲において最大値とする操作位置に達してからは、ペダル13の踏込みにより回動して、リンク機構14を介してアーム16を回動するものである。 Next, a third embodiment shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 will be described. In this embodiment, the steering lever 11 is provided with a check mechanism 18 similar to that of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, while an arm 82 separate from the lever 12 and the pedal 13 is provided. The link mechanism 14 provided and connected to the arm 16 linked to the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 is interposed between the arm 82 and the arm 16. The arm 82 is mechanically linked to the lever 12 and the pedal 13, and rotates by the operation of the lever 12 to rotate the arm 16 via the link mechanism 14 (changes the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8). In addition, after the lever 12 reaches the operation position where the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the maximum value in the set range, the lever 12 is rotated by depressing the pedal 13 and is then connected via the link mechanism 14 to the arm 16. Is rotated.
 アーム82の基端にはボス82aが形成されており、該ボス82aを、レバー12のボス12aに隣接した状態で、枢軸71に装着することで、アーム82が、レバー12から独立して枢軸71周りに前後方向に回動可能となっている。 A boss 82 a is formed at the base end of the arm 82. By mounting the boss 82 a on the pivot 71 in a state adjacent to the boss 12 a of the lever 12, the arm 82 is pivoted independently of the lever 12. It can be rotated in the front-rear direction around 71.
 レバー12には、ボス12aより延出される押当杆12bが形成されている。該押当杆12bは、枢軸71の径方向に延出された後、曲折して、枢軸71に対し平行に延出し、この延出部分を、アーム82の直前方に配置している。 The lever 12 is formed with a pressing rod 12b extending from the boss 12a. The pushing bar 12b extends in the radial direction of the pivot 71, then bends and extends in parallel to the pivot 71, and this extending portion is disposed immediately in front of the arm 82.
 アーム82の近傍にアウタワイヤ受け87が配設されており、該アウタワイヤ受け87に、リンク機構14のアウタワイヤ62の端部及びリンク機構60のアウタワイヤ58の端部が固定されている。アウタワイヤ62に挿通されて補助クラッチ用シフタ9の位置制御用アーム16に連結されているリンク機構14のインナワイヤ61がアウタワイヤ受け87より延出して、その端部61aをアーム82に枢結している。また、アウタワイヤ58に挿通されて規制部材55のアーム55dに連結されているリンク機構60のインナワイヤ57がアウタワイヤ受け87より延出して、その端部57bをアーム82に枢結している。 The outer wire receiver 87 is disposed in the vicinity of the arm 82, and the end of the outer wire 62 of the link mechanism 14 and the end of the outer wire 58 of the link mechanism 60 are fixed to the outer wire receiver 87. An inner wire 61 of the link mechanism 14 inserted through the outer wire 62 and connected to the position control arm 16 of the auxiliary clutch shifter 9 extends from the outer wire receiver 87, and its end 61 a is pivotally connected to the arm 82. . Further, the inner wire 57 of the link mechanism 60 inserted through the outer wire 58 and connected to the arm 55 d of the restricting member 55 extends from the outer wire receiver 87, and its end 57 b is pivotally connected to the arm 82.
 さらに、アーム82には、インナワイヤ83の一端部83aが枢結されており、インナワイヤ83の他端部83bがペダル13のアーム13bに枢結されている。インナワイヤ83はアウタワイヤ84に挿通されている。アウタワイヤ84の一端部が、ペダル13のアーム13b近傍のアウタワイヤ受け63に固定されている。一方、アウタワイヤ84の他端部が、レバー12に形成されたアウタワイヤ受け12cに固定されている。こうして、インナワイヤ83、アウタワイヤ84、アウタワイヤ受け12c・63により、アーム82とペダル13とを連係するリンク機構85が構成されている。 Furthermore, one end 83a of the inner wire 83 is pivotally connected to the arm 82, and the other end 83b of the inner wire 83 is pivotally connected to the arm 13b of the pedal 13. The inner wire 83 is inserted through the outer wire 84. One end of the outer wire 84 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 63 in the vicinity of the arm 13 b of the pedal 13. On the other hand, the other end of the outer wire 84 is fixed to an outer wire receiver 12 c formed on the lever 12. Thus, the inner wire 83, the outer wire 84, and the outer wire receivers 12c and 63 constitute the link mechanism 85 that links the arm 82 and the pedal 13.
 ペダル13のアーム13bとアウタワイヤ受け63との間には、ペダル13を上方付勢するためのバネ64が介設されている。アーム82には、リンク機構85を介してバネ64の付勢力が伝達され、該アーム82は前方回動するように付勢されており、直前に配置されるレバー12の押当杆12bに押圧されている。 A spring 64 for biasing the pedal 13 upward is interposed between the arm 13b of the pedal 13 and the outer wire receiver 63. The urging force of the spring 64 is transmitted to the arm 82 via the link mechanism 85, and the arm 82 is urged to rotate forward, and is pressed against the pressing rod 12b of the lever 12 disposed immediately before. Has been.
 なお、バネ64により上方付勢されるペダル13の回動範囲における上端位置を画定するストッパ86が設けられている。この図21及び図22に示す実施例で用いられるストッパ86は、固定されたものである。このストッパ86に押当しているときのペダル13は、補助クラッチ8の接合力を最小値(例えば0)とする位置に配置される。 Note that a stopper 86 is provided that delimits the upper end position in the rotation range of the pedal 13 biased upward by the spring 64. The stopper 86 used in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is fixed. The pedal 13 when pressed against the stopper 86 is disposed at a position where the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to a minimum value (for example, 0).
 この図21及び図22の実施例において、レバー12を用いて補助クラッチ8の接合圧の設定値を上げる場合は、レバー12を後方に回動する。このレバー12の後方回動に伴って、押当杆12bが、バネ64の付勢力に抗して、アーム82を後方へと押動する。このレバー12の後方回動は、リンク機構60を介して規制部材55にも伝達され、規制部材55の上・下の規制部55a・55bを回動するが、レバー12の、最小接合圧設定位置Cminから最大接合圧設定位置Cmaxまでの回動に基づいての規制部材55の回動範囲内では、規制部55a・55bは、例えば図示の規制解除位置Xにあり、扇形アーム52の回動を規制して旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かないようにすることはない。 21 and 22, when the lever 12 is used to increase the set value of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the lever 12 is rotated backward. As the lever 12 rotates backward, the pressing rod 12b pushes the arm 82 backward against the biasing force of the spring 64. The rearward rotation of the lever 12 is also transmitted to the restricting member 55 via the link mechanism 60, and the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b of the restricting member 55 are rotated. Within the rotation range of the restriction member 55 based on the rotation from the position Cmin to the maximum joining pressure setting position Cmax, the restriction portions 55a and 55b are, for example, at the restriction release position X shown in the figure, and the sector arm 52 is turned. Is not restricted so that the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn does not work.
 なお、このレバー12の回動の間、アーム82がレバー12とともに後方回動してリンク機構85のインナワイヤ83を後方に押動するが、アウタワイヤ受け12cがレバー12に一体形成されているため、インナワイヤ83はアウタワイヤ84ごと移動して撓むこととなる。したがって、インナワイヤ83がアウタワイヤ84に対し相対的に移動するわけではなく、アウタワイヤ受け63からペダル13のアーム13bへのインナワイヤ83の延出長に変化はない。このため、ペダル13は、ストッパ86に押当した位置のままで動かない。すなわち、本実施例では、アーム16に連結されるリンク機構14が、ペダル13とは別のアーム82に連結されており、レバー12の操作中に、ペダル13は、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を最小値(例えば0)とする操作位置に該当する、ストッパ86と押当する位置にて保持されている。言い換えれば、本実施例では、レバー12の操作とは関係なく、常に、ストッパ86と押当する位置がペダル13の非踏込み位置となる。 While the lever 12 rotates, the arm 82 rotates backward together with the lever 12 to push the inner wire 83 of the link mechanism 85 rearward. However, since the outer wire receiver 12c is integrally formed with the lever 12, The inner wire 83 moves and bends together with the outer wire 84. Therefore, the inner wire 83 does not move relative to the outer wire 84, and the extension length of the inner wire 83 from the outer wire receiver 63 to the arm 13b of the pedal 13 does not change. For this reason, the pedal 13 does not move in the position pressed against the stopper 86. That is, in this embodiment, the link mechanism 14 connected to the arm 16 is connected to an arm 82 different from the pedal 13, and the pedal 13 applies the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 during operation of the lever 12. The position is held at a position where it is pressed against the stopper 86, which corresponds to the operation position set to the minimum value (eg, 0). In other words, in this embodiment, the position of pressing against the stopper 86 is always the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 regardless of the operation of the lever 12.
 レバー12を最小接合圧設定位置Cminから最大接合圧設定位置Cmaxまでの範囲でのいずれかの設定位置に固定した状態で、ペダル13を踏み込んで、ストッパ86との押当位置である非踏込み位置から下降させると、ペダル13と一体にアーム13bが回動し、アーム13bは、リンク機構85のインナワイヤ83を引っ張り、これにより、アーム82を後方に回動する。 In a state where the lever 12 is fixed at any setting position within the range from the minimum joining pressure setting position Cmin to the maximum joining pressure setting position Cmax, the pedal 13 is depressed, and the non-depressed position that is a pushing position with the stopper 86 When the arm 13b is lowered, the arm 13b rotates integrally with the pedal 13, and the arm 13b pulls the inner wire 83 of the link mechanism 85, thereby rotating the arm 82 rearward.
 こうして、アーム82は、(前述のガイド溝19のノッチにて)設定位置に固定された状態のレバー12の押当杆12bから後方に離れて、さらに後方に回動する。このアーム82の後方回動が、リンク機構14を介してアーム16に伝達されて、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させる方向にシフタ9を作動する一方、リンク機構60を介して規制部材55にも伝達され、上・下の規制部55a・55bを回動させる。踏み込んだペダル13が、前記踏込み位置Dに達すると、規制部材55の上・下規制部55a・55bは規制位置Yに達し、操向レバー11の扇形アーム52の回動を規制し、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かないようにする。 Thus, the arm 82 moves rearward away from the pushing rod 12b of the lever 12 in a state of being fixed at the set position (at the notch of the guide groove 19 described above) and further rotated rearward. The rearward rotation of the arm 82 is transmitted to the arm 16 via the link mechanism 14 to operate the shifter 9 in a direction that increases the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, while Is also transmitted to rotate the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b. When the depressed pedal 13 reaches the depressed position D, the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b of the restricting member 55 reach the restricting position Y, restricting the rotation of the fan-shaped arm 52 of the steering lever 11, and turning inside The side brake 7 is not effective.
 一方、レバー12の操作位置を、最小接合圧設定位置Cminから最大接合圧設定位置Cmaxまでの範囲で変化させると、レバー12の動きがアーム82及びリンク機構60を介して規制部材55に伝わって、規制部材55が回動するものの、ペダル13を非踏込み位置に配している限り、上・下規制部55a・55bは、例えば図示の規制解除位置Xにある状態で、規制位置Yにまで至ることはなく、扇形アーム52・押当子54の回動を規制することはない。この状態で、操向レバー11の傾倒角度TをT2~Tmaxの範囲まで到達させて、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かせてから、補助クラッチ9の接合圧を増大させようとペダル13を踏み込むと、それにつれて規制部材55も回動するが、扇形アーム52の延出部52a及び押当子54に阻まれて、上・下規制部55a・55bが規制位置Yまで回動することができない。この規制部材55の回動規制により、アーム82の後方回動も規制されて、リンク機構85を介してペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させることはできず、かつ、ペダル13の踏込み位置Dに対応した値にまで補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させるまで、リンク機構14を介してアーム16を回動することができない。こうして、サイドブレーキ7が効いているときには、ペダル13の踏込みによる補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大が規制される。 On the other hand, when the operation position of the lever 12 is changed in the range from the minimum joining pressure setting position Cmin to the maximum joining pressure setting position Cmax, the movement of the lever 12 is transmitted to the regulating member 55 via the arm 82 and the link mechanism 60. As long as the regulating member 55 rotates, as long as the pedal 13 is placed in the non-depressed position, the upper / lower regulating portions 55a and 55b are, for example, in the state of the regulation release position X and to the regulation position Y. The rotation of the fan-shaped arm 52 and the pressing element 54 is not restricted. In this state, the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is reached to the range of T2 to Tmax, the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turn is applied, and then the pedal 13 is depressed to increase the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 9 Accordingly, the restricting member 55 also rotates. However, the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55b cannot be rotated to the restricting position Y by being blocked by the extending portion 52a and the pusher 54 of the fan-shaped arm 52. . Due to the rotation restriction of the restriction member 55, the backward rotation of the arm 82 is also restricted, and the pedal 13 cannot be lowered to the depression position D via the link mechanism 85, and the pedal 13 is brought to the depression position D. The arm 16 cannot be rotated via the link mechanism 14 until the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased to a corresponding value. Thus, when the side brake 7 is effective, an increase in the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 due to the depression of the pedal 13 is restricted.
 なお、前述の、レバー12を回動してのアーム82の回動時には、リンク機構85において、インナワイヤ83とともに、アウタワイヤ84の端部を固定しているアウタワイヤ受け12cもレバー12と一体に移動するが、ペダル13を踏み込んでのアーム82の回動時には、アウタワイヤ84に対しインナワイヤ83が相対移動し、アウタワイヤ84の端部を固定しているアウタワイヤ受け12cがインナワイヤ83に連れて移動することはないので、ペダル13が踏み込まれる間、レバー12は、そのときの(前記ノッチに係止された)設定位置にとどまる。したがって、ペダル13の踏込みを解除すると、バネ64の付勢力にて、ペダル13が上方回動して、前記非踏込み位置へと戻り、これにより、リンク機構85のインナワイヤ83が押されて、アーム82を、前記設定位置にて固定されているレバー12の押当杆12bに押当する位置まで戻すものである。また、アーム82が、設定位置にあるレバー12で画定される位置まで戻ることで、リンク機構14・60を介して、アーム16・55dも、レバー12の設定位置に対応する位置まで戻る。 When the arm 82 is rotated by rotating the lever 12, the outer wire receiver 12c that fixes the end of the outer wire 84 is moved together with the lever 12 together with the inner wire 83 in the link mechanism 85. However, when the arm 82 is rotated while the pedal 13 is depressed, the inner wire 83 moves relative to the outer wire 84, and the outer wire receiver 12 c that fixes the end of the outer wire 84 does not move along with the inner wire 83. Therefore, while the pedal 13 is depressed, the lever 12 remains in the set position (locked to the notch) at that time. Accordingly, when the depression of the pedal 13 is released, the pedal 13 is rotated upward by the urging force of the spring 64 and returned to the non-depressed position, whereby the inner wire 83 of the link mechanism 85 is pushed and the arm 82 is returned to a position where it is pressed against the pressing rod 12b of the lever 12 fixed at the set position. Further, when the arm 82 returns to the position defined by the lever 12 in the setting position, the arms 16 and 55d also return to the position corresponding to the setting position of the lever 12 via the link mechanisms 14 and 60.
 次に、図23及び図24に示す第四実施例について説明する。この実施例でも、図21及び図22の第三実施例と同様に、レバー12及びペダル13とは別体のアーム82が用いられ、アーム82が、リンク機構14を介してアーム16に連結され、また、リンク機構60を介して、牽制機構18の規制部材55に連結されている。 Next, a fourth embodiment shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 will be described. Also in this embodiment, as in the third embodiment of FIGS. 21 and 22, an arm 82 separate from the lever 12 and the pedal 13 is used, and the arm 82 is connected to the arm 16 via the link mechanism 14. In addition, it is connected to the restriction member 55 of the check mechanism 18 via the link mechanism 60.
 すなわち、本実施例では、図24に示すように、左右水平状の枢軸70に、レバー12のボス12a、アーム82のボス82a、ペダル13のボス13aが隣接して装着されており、アーム82は、レバー12とペダル13との間に配置されている。レバー12においては、ボス12aより押当杆12cが延設されて、その曲折して左右水平に延出した部分をアーム82の直前方に配している。一方、ペダル13においても、ボス13aから枢軸70の径方向に押当杆13cが延設されており、該押当杆13cは曲折してその先端に向かって左右水平方向に延出しており、この延出部を、アーム82の直前方にて、前記の押当杆12cの左右方向延出部に対し上下に位置をずらせて、すなわち、押当杆12c・13c同士がそれぞれの回動を干渉しないように、配置している。 That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the boss 12 a of the lever 12, the boss 82 a of the arm 82, and the boss 13 a of the pedal 13 are mounted adjacent to the horizontal pivot 70. Is disposed between the lever 12 and the pedal 13. In the lever 12, a pressing rod 12 c is extended from the boss 12 a, and a portion that is bent and extends horizontally to the left and right is disposed immediately before the arm 82. On the other hand, also in the pedal 13, a pressing rod 13c extends from the boss 13a in the radial direction of the pivot 70, and the pressing rod 13c is bent and extends in the horizontal direction toward the tip thereof. The extension part is shifted in the vertical direction with respect to the extension part in the left-right direction of the pressing rod 12c immediately before the arm 82, that is, the pressing rods 12c and 13c rotate with respect to each other. Arranged so as not to interfere.
 ペダル13のアーム13bの近傍にはバネ止め88が配設され、このバネ止め88とアーム13bとの間にバネ64を介設することで、ペダル13を、ストッパ86と押当する位置へと上方付勢している。アーム82は、バネ64とは別の図外の付勢手段にて前方回動するように付勢されており、これにより、その直前に配置されている押当杆12c・13cと押当している。 A spring stopper 88 is disposed in the vicinity of the arm 13b of the pedal 13, and a spring 64 is interposed between the spring stopper 88 and the arm 13b, so that the pedal 13 is brought into a position where the pedal 13 is pressed against the stopper 86. It is energizing upward. The arm 82 is biased so as to rotate forward by a biasing means (not shown) different from the spring 64, thereby pressing against the pressing rods 12 c and 13 c arranged immediately before the arm 82. ing.
 補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大すべくレバー12を後方回動すると、レバー12と一体に回動する押当杆12cが、アーム82を後方に押動する。このアーム82の後方回動が、リンク機構14・60を介して、アーム16・55dへと伝達される。このレバー12とアーム82とが一体的に回動する間、ペダル13はバネ64の付勢力にてストッパ86と押当する非踏込み位置に保持されたままであり、したがって、押当杆13cもその位置にとどまり、アーム82は、この押当杆13cから離れて後方回動するものである。 When the lever 12 is rotated backward to increase the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the pressing rod 12c that rotates integrally with the lever 12 pushes the arm 82 backward. The backward rotation of the arm 82 is transmitted to the arms 16 and 55d through the link mechanisms 14 and 60. While the lever 12 and the arm 82 are integrally rotated, the pedal 13 is held in the non-depressed position where the pedal 13 is pressed against the stopper 86 by the biasing force of the spring 64. The arm 82 stays in the position and rotates backward away from the pressing bar 13c.
 レバー12を最小接合圧設定位置Cminから最大接合圧設定位置Cmaxまでの範囲でのいずれかの設定位置に固定した状態で、バネ64に抗してペダル13を踏み込んで、ストッパ86との押当位置である非踏込み位置から下降させると、ペダル13と一体に押当杆13cが後方回動する。ここで、ペダル13がレバー12で設定した接合圧に対応する踏込み位置に達するまでは、押当杆13cのこの後方回動は、その後方に離れて配置されているアーム82との間の間隔を埋めるためのものとなり、当該踏込み位置にペダル13が達すると、押当杆13cはアーム82に押当することとなる。 In a state where the lever 12 is fixed at any setting position in the range from the minimum joining pressure setting position Cmin to the maximum joining pressure setting position Cmax, the pedal 13 is depressed against the spring 64 and pressed against the stopper 86. When the pedal 13 is lowered from the non-depressed position, the pressing rod 13c rotates backward integrally with the pedal 13. Here, until the pedal 13 reaches the stepping position corresponding to the joining pressure set by the lever 12, the rearward rotation of the pressing rod 13c is the distance between the arm 82 and the arm 82 disposed rearward. When the pedal 13 reaches the depressed position, the pressing rod 13c is pressed against the arm 82.
 そして、ペダル13が、レバー12で設定した接合圧に対応する踏込み位置よりさらに下降すると、押当杆13cがアーム82を後方に押動する。この際、レバー12は設定位置で固定されていて、アーム82は、その位置にとどまるレバー12の押当杆12cより後方に離れることとなる。このアーム82の後方回動により、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させる方向にシフタ9が作動するものであり、また、踏み込んだペダル13が、前記踏込み位置Dに達すると、規制部材55が操向レバー11の扇形アーム52の回動を規制し、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かないようにする。 Then, when the pedal 13 is further lowered from the stepping position corresponding to the joining pressure set by the lever 12, the pressing rod 13c pushes the arm 82 backward. At this time, the lever 12 is fixed at the set position, and the arm 82 is separated rearward from the pressing rod 12c of the lever 12 remaining at the position. When the arm 82 is rotated backward, the shifter 9 is operated in a direction to increase the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. The rotation of the sector arm 52 of the direction lever 11 is restricted so that the side brake 7 on the inner side of the turning is not effective.
 一方、ペダル13を非踏込み位置に配している間に、操向レバー11の傾倒角度TをT2~Tmaxの範囲まで到達させて、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7を効かせてから、補助クラッチ9の接合圧を増大させようとペダル13を踏み込むと、それにつれて規制部材55も回動するが、扇形アーム52の延出部52a及び押当子54に阻まれて、上・下規制部55a・55bは規制位置Yまで至ることはできない。この規制部材55の回動規制により、アーム82の後方回動も規制されて、ペダル13の踏込み位置Dまでの下降、及び、ペダル13の踏込み位置Dに対応した値にまで補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させるまでのアーム16の回動ができない状態となる。こうして、サイドブレーキ7が効いているときには、ペダル13の踏込みによる補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大が規制される。 On the other hand, while the pedal 13 is placed in the non-depressed position, the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is reached to the range of T2 to Tmax and the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn is applied, and then the auxiliary clutch 9 When the pedal 13 is depressed to increase the joint pressure, the restricting member 55 rotates as well. However, the upper and lower restricting portions 55a and 55a are blocked by the extension portion 52a and the pusher 54 of the sector arm 52. 55b cannot reach the restriction position Y. Due to the rotation restriction of the restriction member 55, the backward rotation of the arm 82 is also restricted, and the auxiliary clutch 8 is engaged to the value corresponding to the depression position D of the pedal 13 and the depression position D of the pedal 13. The arm 16 cannot be rotated until the pressure is increased. Thus, when the side brake 7 is effective, an increase in the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 due to the depression of the pedal 13 is restricted.
 次に、図25乃至図28に示す第五実施例について説明する。図25に示すように、前後水平状の枢軸51に装着される操向レバー11の基端のボス11aから左右一側に、扇形アーム90が延出されており、扇形アーム90の円弧縁の一部にデテント溝90aが形成され、操向レバー11を直線位置にしているときにバルブスイッチ53の押当子53aがデテント溝90aに嵌入するものとなっている。図16等に示す実施例と同様に、バルブスイッチ53は、押当子53aがデテント溝90aに嵌入することでスイッチオフして方向制御弁32を中立位置Nにし、また、押当子53aがデテント溝90aより外れることでスイッチオンして方向制御弁32を左旋回位置Lまたは右旋回位置Rにする。方向制御弁32を旋回位置Lとするか右旋回位置Rとするかは、操向レバー11が直進位置から左方・右方のいずれに回動したかが検知されて決定されるものとしている(カム操作アーム46の回動方向の検知に基づいて決定されるものとしてもよい)。 Next, a fifth embodiment shown in FIGS. 25 to 28 will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, a fan-shaped arm 90 is extended from the boss 11a at the base end of the steering lever 11 mounted on the front and rear horizontal pivot 51 to the left and right sides. A detent groove 90a is formed in part, and the pressing element 53a of the valve switch 53 is fitted into the detent groove 90a when the steering lever 11 is in the linear position. As in the embodiment shown in FIG. 16 and the like, the valve switch 53 is switched off when the pressing element 53a is inserted into the detent groove 90a, so that the directional control valve 32 is set to the neutral position N. By switching off from the detent groove 90a, the directional control valve 32 is turned to the left turning position L or the right turning position R. Whether the direction control valve 32 is set to the turning position L or the right turning position R is determined by detecting whether the steering lever 11 is rotated leftward or rightward from the straight traveling position. (It may be determined based on detection of the rotation direction of the cam operation arm 46).
 また、操向レバー11のボス11aから左右他側に、アーム91が延設されており、アーム91に押動ピン91aが突設されている。さらに、枢軸51には、上・下のアーム93・94が枢支されており、枢軸51からは、前記の左右他側、すなわち、アーム91と同じ側にアーム93・94が延出されている。上・下アーム93・94の間には、アーム91の押動ピン91a、及び、操向レバー11の回動にかかわらず位置固定されている固定ピン92が配置されている。上・下アーム93・94の先端部間には、バネ95が介設されている。該バネ95により、上・下アーム93・94は互いに向かって付勢されており、すなわち、両者間の押動ピン91a及び固定ピン92を挟持する方向に付勢されている。 Further, an arm 91 extends from the boss 11 a of the steering lever 11 to the left and right sides, and a push pin 91 a protrudes from the arm 91. Furthermore, upper and lower arms 93 and 94 are pivotally supported on the pivot 51, and the arms 93 and 94 are extended from the pivot 51 on the other left and right sides, that is, on the same side as the arm 91. Yes. Between the upper and lower arms 93 and 94, there are arranged a push pin 91a of the arm 91 and a fixed pin 92 which is fixed in position regardless of the rotation of the steering lever 11. A spring 95 is interposed between the tip portions of the upper and lower arms 93 and 94. The upper and lower arms 93 and 94 are urged toward each other by the spring 95, that is, urged in a direction in which the pressing pin 91a and the fixing pin 92 are sandwiched therebetween.
 本実施例では、操向レバー11を直進位置から右方に傾倒する(右傾倒角度RTを増大させる)ことで、上側のアーム93を上方に回動し、操向レバー11を直進位置から左方に傾倒する(左傾倒角度LTを増大させる)ことで、下側のアーム93を下方に回動する構成となっている。これについて詳述する。アーム91は操向レバー11と一体状に回動するものであって、図26に示すように、操向レバー11を直進位置から右方に回動すると、アーム91の押動ピン91aが上側のアーム93を上方に押し上げる。この間、位置固定されている固定ピン92は、下側のアーム94が上側のアーム93に追従して上方に回動しないように、操向レバー11が直進位置にあったときの位置に下側のアーム94をとどめている。一方、図示されていないが、図26からわかるように、操向レバー11を直進位置から左方に回動すると、アーム91の押動ピン91aが下側のアーム94を下方に押し下げる。この間、位置固定されている固定ピン92は、上側のアーム93が下側のアーム94に追従して下方に回動しないように、操向レバー11が直進位置にあったときの位置に上側のアーム93をとどめている。 In this embodiment, the steering lever 11 is tilted to the right from the straight traveling position (increasing the right tilting angle RT), thereby turning the upper arm 93 upward and moving the steering lever 11 to the left from the straight traveling position. By tilting in the direction (increasing the left tilt angle LT), the lower arm 93 is rotated downward. This will be described in detail. The arm 91 rotates integrally with the steering lever 11, and as shown in FIG. 26, when the steering lever 11 is rotated rightward from the straight position, the push pin 91a of the arm 91 is moved upward. The arm 93 is pushed upward. During this time, the fixed pin 92 whose position is fixed is located at a position where the steering lever 11 is in the straight traveling position so that the lower arm 94 does not rotate upward following the upper arm 93. The arm 94 is kept. On the other hand, although not shown, as can be seen from FIG. 26, when the steering lever 11 is rotated leftward from the straight advance position, the push pin 91a of the arm 91 pushes down the lower arm 94 downward. During this time, the fixed pin 92 is fixed so that the upper arm 93 follows the lower arm 94 and does not rotate downward so that the steering lever 11 is in the straight position. The arm 93 is kept.
 こうして、操向レバー11を直進位置から左方または右方に回動することで、上・下アーム93・94の先端部間の間隔が広がり、バネ95が伸長されて、アーム93・94を互いに向かって付勢する。直進位置から右方または左方に回動した操向レバー11から手を離すと、押動ピン91aにて押し上げまたは押し下げられて回動していたアーム93または94が、固定ピン92にて係止されているアーム93または94に向かって回動し、この回動するアーム93または94にて、押動ピン91aが押動され、押動ピン91aとともにアーム91が回動することにより、操向レバー11が回動する。やがて、図25に示すように、両アーム93・94が、押動ピン91a及び固定ピン92を挟持する状態に戻り、操向レバー11も直進位置へと戻る。 Thus, by turning the steering lever 11 from the straight position to the left or right, the distance between the tip portions of the upper and lower arms 93 and 94 is widened, the spring 95 is extended, and the arms 93 and 94 are moved. Energize towards each other. When the hand is released from the steering lever 11 that has been rotated right or left from the straight position, the arm 93 or 94 that has been rotated by being pushed up or down by the push pin 91a is engaged by the fixed pin 92. It rotates toward the arm 93 or 94 that is stopped, and the push pin 91a is pushed by the turning arm 93 or 94, and the arm 91 is turned together with the push pin 91a. The direction lever 11 rotates. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 25, both arms 93 and 94 return to the state of sandwiching the push pin 91a and the fixing pin 92, and the steering lever 11 also returns to the straight advance position.
 本実施例では、車両操向用アクチュエータセット2のリリーフ弁33制御用のカム操作アーム46に連結されるリンク機構50として、インナワイヤ98・アウタワイヤ99よりなるワイヤ部材を使用している。なお、図16で示すリンク機構50は、操向レバー11の左方回動でカム操作アーム46を上方回動させ、操向レバー11の右方回動でカム操作アーム46を下方回動させる構造となっているが、前述の如く、操向レバー11の回動方向とカム操作アーム46の回動方向との関係はこのように限定されるものではなく、リンク機構50が、アーム93または94の回動に基づいてカム操作アーム46を適切に回動するように構成されていればそれでよい。 In this embodiment, a wire member made of an inner wire 98 and an outer wire 99 is used as the link mechanism 50 connected to the cam operation arm 46 for controlling the relief valve 33 of the vehicle steering actuator set 2. The link mechanism 50 shown in FIG. 16 rotates the cam operation arm 46 upward by turning the steering lever 11 to the left, and rotates the cam operation arm 46 downward by rotating the steering lever 11 to the right. However, as described above, the relationship between the turning direction of the steering lever 11 and the turning direction of the cam operation arm 46 is not limited in this way. It is sufficient if the cam operation arm 46 is appropriately rotated based on the rotation of 94.
 アーム93・94のうちの一方にはアウタワイヤ受けを構成して、アウタワイヤ99の端部を固定するものとしており、アーム93・94のうちの他方には、インナワイヤ98の端部を枢結するものとしている。本実施例では、アウタワイヤ99の該端部を固定するアウタワイヤ受け94aを下側のアーム94に形成(または固設)しており、該アウタワイヤ受け94aから延出されるインナワイヤ98の端部98aを上側のアーム93に枢結している。 One of the arms 93 and 94 constitutes an outer wire receiver, and the end of the outer wire 99 is fixed. The other of the arms 93 and 94 is connected to the end of the inner wire 98. It is said. In the present embodiment, an outer wire receiver 94a for fixing the end portion of the outer wire 99 is formed (or fixed) on the lower arm 94, and the end portion 98a of the inner wire 98 extended from the outer wire receiver 94a is disposed on the upper side. The arm 93 is pivotally connected.
 さらに、下側のアーム94のアウタワイヤ受け94aには、ペダル13に連結されるインナワイヤ101を挿通したアウタワイヤ102の端部が固定されており、インナワイヤ101は、該アウタワイヤ受け94aより延出されて、その端部101aが、規制部材96の両端のうちの一方(本実施例では下端)に固設されている。規制部材96には、該規制部材96の両端間の方向(本実施例では略上下方向)に長く形成された長孔96aが設けられており、該長孔96aに、上側のアーム93より突設される規制ピン93aが嵌入されている。規制部材96の両端のうちの他方(本実施例では上端)と、車両の一部(位置固定されている箇所、例えば運転室の壁や計器パネルの一部)との間に、バネ97が介設されている。 Further, the outer wire receiver 94a of the lower arm 94 has an end portion of the outer wire 102 inserted through the inner wire 101 connected to the pedal 13, and the inner wire 101 extends from the outer wire receiver 94a. The end 101a is fixed to one of the ends of the restricting member 96 (the lower end in this embodiment). The restriction member 96 is provided with a long hole 96a formed long in the direction between both ends of the restriction member 96 (substantially in the vertical direction in the present embodiment). A restriction pin 93a to be provided is inserted. A spring 97 is provided between the other of the ends of the restricting member 96 (the upper end in the present embodiment) and a part of the vehicle (a part where the position is fixed, for example, a part of the wall of the cab or the instrument panel). It is installed.
 以上の如く、操向レバー11を直進位置に戻すための付勢手段としてアーム93・94やバネ95等を設けた本実施例における操向レバー11には、補助クラッチ8の接合圧増大のためのペダル13の踏込みとサイドクラッチ7の作動とが同時に行われないようにするための牽制機構として、規制部材96及びバネ97よりなる牽制機構18Bが備えられており、リンク機構100を介して、牽制機構18Bの規制部材96をペダル13に連係する構造としている。 As described above, the steering lever 11 in the present embodiment, in which the arms 93 and 94, the spring 95, and the like are provided as urging means for returning the steering lever 11 to the straight position, is used for increasing the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8. As a check mechanism for preventing the depression of the pedal 13 and the operation of the side clutch 7 from being performed at the same time, a check mechanism 18B including a restricting member 96 and a spring 97 is provided. The restriction member 96 of the check mechanism 18B is structured to be linked to the pedal 13.
 リンク機構100は、インナワイヤ101及びアウタワイヤ102よりなる。アウタワイヤ102の一端部は下側アーム94の前記アウタワイヤ受け94aに固定され、他端部はペダル13のアーム13b近傍のアウタワイヤ受け63に固定されている。インナワイヤ101はアウタワイヤ102に挿通され、アウタワイヤ受け94aより上方に延出されるインナワイヤ101の端部101aが規制部材96の下端部に係止されており、アウタワイヤ受け63より延出されるインナワイヤ101の端部101bがアーム13bに枢結されている。 The link mechanism 100 includes an inner wire 101 and an outer wire 102. One end of the outer wire 102 is fixed to the outer wire receiver 94a of the lower arm 94, and the other end is fixed to the outer wire receiver 63 in the vicinity of the arm 13b of the pedal 13. The inner wire 101 is inserted into the outer wire 102, the end 101 a of the inner wire 101 extending upward from the outer wire receiver 94 a is locked to the lower end of the restricting member 96, and the end of the inner wire 101 extending from the outer wire receiver 63. 101b is pivotally connected to the arm 13b.
 また、本実施例では、図16乃至図18の第一実施例と同様に、ペダル13のアーム13bとアーム16との間にインナワイヤ61・アウタワイヤ62等からなるリンク機構14を介設している。レバー12との関係では、図16乃至図18の第一実施例と同様に、レバー12での補助クラッチ8の接合圧の設定に応じてペダル13の非踏込み位置を画定するストッパ68の位置を変更することが考えられる。あるいは、図21及び図22の第三実施例や図23及び図24の第四実施例と同様に、固定状のストッパ86を設け、レバー12での補助クラッチ8の接合圧の設定とは関係なく、該ストッパ86と押当するペダル13の非踏込み位置を一定にすることも考えられる。いずれにおいても、本実施例での牽制機構18Bは、レバー12の、前記の最小接合圧設定位置Cminから最大接合圧設定位置Cmaxまでの操作範囲で得られる補助クラッチ8の接合圧については、サイドクラッチ7が作動するか否かとは関係なく、得られるように構成されている。 In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment of FIGS. 16 to 18, the link mechanism 14 including the inner wire 61, the outer wire 62, and the like is interposed between the arm 13 b and the arm 16 of the pedal 13. . In relation to the lever 12, as in the first embodiment of FIGS. 16 to 18, the position of the stopper 68 that defines the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 according to the setting of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 at the lever 12 is determined. It is possible to change. Alternatively, as in the third embodiment of FIGS. 21 and 22 and the fourth embodiment of FIGS. 23 and 24, a fixed stopper 86 is provided, which is related to the setting of the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 at the lever 12. Alternatively, it may be possible to make the non-depressed position of the pedal 13 pressed against the stopper 86 constant. In any case, the check mechanism 18B in the present embodiment is configured so that the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 obtained in the operation range of the lever 12 from the minimum joint pressure setting position Cmin to the maximum joint pressure setting position Cmax Regardless of whether or not the clutch 7 is operated, it can be obtained.
 牽制機構18Bにおける規制部材96は、上下方向の長孔96aを有しており、該長孔96aには、上側のアーム93に突設される規制ピン93aが、上下方向の長孔96aに沿って摺動自在に嵌入されている。長孔96aを挟んで配される規制部材96の上下端のうち、該下端には前述の如くインナワイヤ101の端部101aが係止されている一方、該上端には、バネ97の一端が係止されている。バネ97の他端は、車両の中で固定された(例えば運転室の壁)部分に係止されている。こうして、規制部材96は、リンク機構100の動き及びアーム93または94の動きに応じて上下に移動するものであり、バネ97は、規制部材96の上下動に応じて伸縮し、規制部材96の上下動を許容している。 The restricting member 96 in the check mechanism 18B has an elongated hole 96a in the vertical direction, and a restricting pin 93a projecting from the upper arm 93 extends along the elongated hole 96a in the vertical direction. And is slidably inserted. Of the upper and lower ends of the restricting member 96 arranged with the long hole 96a interposed therebetween, the end 101a of the inner wire 101 is locked to the lower end, as described above, and one end of the spring 97 is engaged with the upper end. It has been stopped. The other end of the spring 97 is locked to a portion (for example, a wall of a cab) fixed in the vehicle. Thus, the restricting member 96 moves up and down according to the movement of the link mechanism 100 and the movement of the arm 93 or 94, and the spring 97 expands and contracts according to the up and down movement of the restricting member 96. Allow vertical movement.
 図25は、操向レバー11を直進位置(傾倒角度T=0)に配し、ペダル13を非踏込み位置に配している場合を示している。上・下のアーム93・94は、操向レバー11の直進位置に対応した位置にあり、アウタワイヤ受け94aより規制部材96の下端までのインナワイヤ101の延出長は、アーム93・94がこの位置にある中では、最も長くなり、規制部材96が、その上下動の範囲での最上位置にあり、バネ97は最も圧縮した状態で、規制ピン93aは長孔96aの下端に当接している。 FIG. 25 shows a case where the steering lever 11 is disposed at the straight traveling position (tilt angle T = 0) and the pedal 13 is disposed at the non-depressed position. The upper and lower arms 93 and 94 are in a position corresponding to the straight position of the steering lever 11, and the extension length of the inner wire 101 from the outer wire receiver 94a to the lower end of the regulating member 96 is such that the arms 93 and 94 are in this position. , The restriction member 96 is at the uppermost position in the range of the vertical movement, the spring 97 is in the most compressed state, and the restriction pin 93a is in contact with the lower end of the long hole 96a.
 図25の状態から、ペダル13は非踏込み位置のまま、操向レバー11を直進位置から右方に傾動すると、図26に示すように、規制部材96は前述の位置に保持されたまま(バネ97が最も圧縮された状態のまま)、上側のアーム93が上方回動し、規制部材96aの長孔96a内での相対位置が上方に移動する。この場合、操向レバー11の右傾動角度RTを最大角度Tmaxに達するまでは、上方に移動する規制ピン93aが長孔96aの上端に当たることはなく、したがって、旋回内側の右サイドクラッチ7Rの接合圧を最大値まで増大させて、右駆動列3R及び右車軸4Rを完全な制動状態にまですることが可能である。 25, when the steering lever 11 is tilted to the right from the straight advance position while the pedal 13 remains in the non-depressed position, as shown in FIG. 26, the restricting member 96 remains held at the aforementioned position (spring 97 remains in the most compressed state), the upper arm 93 rotates upward, and the relative position of the restricting member 96a within the elongated hole 96a moves upward. In this case, the restriction pin 93a that moves upward does not hit the upper end of the long hole 96a until the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 reaches the maximum angle Tmax. It is possible to increase the pressure to the maximum value and bring the right drive train 3R and the right axle 4R to a complete braking state.
 一方で、このように上側のアーム93の上方回動で上昇させた規制ピン93aは、長孔96aの上端との距離を短くすることから、規制部材96の下方移動を規制することになる。ここで、操向レバー11の右傾動角度RTがT2までの範囲にあるときは、サイドブレーキ7Rはまだかかっていないが、このときの上側のアーム93の上方回動に伴って上方移動した規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との間の距離は、まだ充分にあり、ペダル13の踏込み位置Dまでの下降を許容する分の規制部材96の下降量は確保されている。 On the other hand, since the restriction pin 93a raised by the upward rotation of the upper arm 93 in this manner shortens the distance from the upper end of the long hole 96a, the downward movement of the restriction member 96 is restricted. Here, when the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 is in the range up to T2, the side brake 7R is not yet applied, but the restriction that has moved upward with the upward rotation of the upper arm 93 at this time. The distance between the pin 93a and the upper end of the long hole 96a is still sufficient, and the lowering amount of the restricting member 96 is ensured to allow the lowering of the pedal 13 to the depressed position D.
 しかし、操向レバー11の右傾動角度RTがT2を超えて、サイドブレーキ7Rがかかる状態に至ると、このときの規制ピン93aの長孔96a内での相対位置は高くなって、規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との間の距離が短くなり、その距離では、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させるだけの規制部材96の下降量には足りない。つまり、ペダル13を踏み込むと、規制部材96が下降するが、その下降が規制ピン93aで阻まれて、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させることはできず、これにより、サイドブレーキ7Rが効いている状態での、ペダル13の踏込みによる補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大を抑制しているのである。 However, when the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 exceeds T2 and the side brake 7R is applied, the relative position of the restriction pin 93a in the long hole 96a at this time increases, and the restriction pin 93a And the distance between the upper end of the long hole 96a is short, and that distance is not enough for the lowering amount of the restricting member 96 to lower the pedal 13 to the depressed position D. In other words, when the pedal 13 is depressed, the regulating member 96 is lowered, but the lowering is blocked by the regulating pin 93a, and the pedal 13 cannot be lowered to the depressed position D, whereby the side brake 7R is effective. In this state, an increase in the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 due to the depression of the pedal 13 is suppressed.
 一方、図25に示すように、ペダル13を非踏込み位置にし、操向レバー11を直進位置にしているときの、長孔96a内における規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との間の距離は、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させるだけの規制部材96の下降量を確保しており、したがって、ペダル13の踏込みによるオペレータの思い通りの補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大が可能である。 On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 25, the distance between the restriction pin 93a in the long hole 96a and the upper end of the long hole 96a when the pedal 13 is in the non-depressed position and the steering lever 11 is in the straight position. Therefore, the lowering amount of the restricting member 96 that only lowers the pedal 13 to the depression position D is ensured, and therefore, the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 can be increased as the operator desires by depression of the pedal 13.
 ここで、操向レバー11を直進位置に保持しながら、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで踏み込むと、図27に示すように、規制ピン93aの位置は保持されたまま、インナワイヤ101が下方に引かれて、規制部材96が下降し、バネ97が伸長する。したがって、長孔96a内における規制ピン93aの相対位置が上方に移動し、規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との間の距離が縮まる。ペダル13を踏込み位置Dにしているときの規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との距離は、上側のアーム93の上方回動に伴う規制ピン93aの上方移動量と比較して、操向レバー11の右傾動角度TがT1を超える(すなわち、サイドクラッチ6Rを切る状態とする)までの規制ピン93aの上方移動分については確保するが、操向レバー11の右傾動角度TがT2に至るまでの規制ピン93aの上方移動分には足りないものとなるように設定されている。 Here, when the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D while the steering lever 11 is held in the straight traveling position, the inner wire 101 is pulled downward while the position of the regulation pin 93a is maintained as shown in FIG. Thus, the regulating member 96 is lowered and the spring 97 is extended. Accordingly, the relative position of the restriction pin 93a in the long hole 96a moves upward, and the distance between the restriction pin 93a and the upper end of the long hole 96a is reduced. The distance between the restriction pin 93a and the upper end of the elongated hole 96a when the pedal 13 is in the depressed position D is compared with the upward movement amount of the restriction pin 93a accompanying the upward rotation of the upper arm 93. 11 is secured for the upward movement of the regulation pin 93a until the right tilt angle T of T11 exceeds T1 (that is, the side clutch 6R is disengaged), but the right tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 reaches T2. It is set so as to be insufficient for the upward movement of the restriction pin 93a up to the point.
 したがって、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させている状態から、操向レバー11の右傾倒角度RTがT2に到達するまでに上側アーム93が上方回動すると、図28に示すように、規制ピン93aが長孔96aの上端に押接し、それ以上は上側アーム93を上方回動できない状態となる。こうして、操向レバー11の右傾倒角度TがT2以上になるまでの操向レバー11の傾動を規制し、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dに踏み込んでいる間は旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7Rがかからないようにしているのである。 Therefore, when the upper arm 93 rotates upward from the state where the pedal 13 is lowered to the depression position D until the right tilt angle RT of the steering lever 11 reaches T2, as shown in FIG. 93a is pressed against the upper end of the long hole 96a, and beyond that, the upper arm 93 cannot be rotated upward. Thus, the tilting of the steering lever 11 until the right tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 becomes equal to or greater than T2 is restricted, and the side brake 7R inside the turn is not applied while the pedal 13 is depressed to the depression position D. -ing
 なお、操向レバー11を直進位置から左方に傾動して下側アーム94を下方回動させる場合は図示していないが、図25乃至図28を参照して、この場合について説明する。操向レバー11の左方傾動に伴って下側アーム94が下方回動すると、リンク機構100のインナワイヤ101をアウタワイヤ102とともに一体状に下方に押動する。これにより、規制部材96は下方に移動し、バネ97は伸長してこの規制部材96の動きを許容する。このとき、上側アーム93は操向レバー11を直進位置にしていたときの位置にて保持されているので、規制ピン93aは動かない。したがって、やはり下側アーム94の下方回動とともに、規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との間の距離が縮まることになる。 Although the case where the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left from the straight traveling position to rotate the lower arm 94 downward is not shown, this case will be described with reference to FIGS. When the lower arm 94 rotates downward as the steering lever 11 tilts to the left, the inner wire 101 of the link mechanism 100 is pushed downward together with the outer wire 102. As a result, the restricting member 96 moves downward, and the spring 97 extends to allow the restricting member 96 to move. At this time, since the upper arm 93 is held at the position when the steering lever 11 is set to the straight advance position, the regulation pin 93a does not move. Therefore, the distance between the restriction pin 93a and the upper end of the long hole 96a is reduced as the lower arm 94 is rotated downward.
 以上のように、リンク機構100においては、操向レバー11の左方傾動の場合には、下側アーム94が回動することにより、アウタワイヤ102がインナワイヤ101とともに移動する一方、ペダル13の踏込みの場合には、アウタワイヤ102はそのままで、インナワイヤ101のみがペダル13のアーム13bに引かれて動く。前述の如く操向レバー11を左方回動して、左傾動角度LTがT2に到達した場合、規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との距離は、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させるだけのインナワイヤ101の移動による規制部材96の下降量には足りず、したがって、ペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させることはできない。こうして、操向レバー11を左方に傾動して、サイドブレーキ7Lを効かせているときに、ペダル13を踏み込んでの補助クラッチ8の接合圧の増大を抑制している。 As described above, in the link mechanism 100, when the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left, the lower arm 94 rotates, so that the outer wire 102 moves together with the inner wire 101, while the pedal 13 is depressed. In this case, the outer wire 102 is left as it is, and only the inner wire 101 moves by being pulled by the arm 13 b of the pedal 13. As described above, when the steering lever 11 is rotated to the left and the left tilt angle LT reaches T2, the distance between the restriction pin 93a and the upper end of the long hole 96a is simply to lower the pedal 13 to the depressed position D. Accordingly, the amount of lowering of the regulating member 96 due to the movement of the inner wire 101 is not sufficient, and therefore, the pedal 13 cannot be lowered to the depressed position D. Thus, when the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left and the side brake 7L is applied, an increase in the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 when the pedal 13 is depressed is suppressed.
 一方、操向レバー11を直進位置にしているときにペダル13を踏込み位置Dまで下降させると、図27に示す状態となり、規制ピン93aと長孔96aの上端との間の距離が短くなっており、この距離は、操向レバー11の左傾倒角度LTがT2に至るまでの下側アーム94の下方回動に伴う規制部材96の下降量には足りず、したがって、操向レバー11の左傾倒角度LTをT2まで到達させることはできない。こうして、ペダル13を踏み込んで補助クラッチ8の接合圧を増大させているときに、操向レバー11を左方に傾動しても、サイドブレーキ7Lが効かないようにしている。 On the other hand, when the pedal 13 is lowered to the depressed position D while the steering lever 11 is in the straight traveling position, the state shown in FIG. This distance is not sufficient for the lowering amount of the regulating member 96 accompanying the downward rotation of the lower arm 94 until the left tilt angle LT of the steering lever 11 reaches T2, and therefore the left of the steering lever 11 The tilt angle LT cannot reach T2. In this way, when the pedal 13 is depressed to increase the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8, the side brake 7L does not work even if the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left.
 次に、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を自動調整可能としたトランスミッション1の実施例として、図29乃至図32に示すトランスミッション1A、及び、図33及び図34に示すトランスミッション1Bについて説明する。なお、図3も、トランスミッション1Aまたは1Bの内部構造を示す図として、これらの実施例を説明するのに用いるものとする。また、これまでに説明した実施例で用いた符号と同じ符号にて示される部材や部分は、前述の実施例中の当該部材や部分と同じものか同じ機能を有するものとして、その説明を省く。 Next, transmission 1A shown in FIGS. 29 to 32 and transmission 1B shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 will be described as examples of the transmission 1 in which the joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 can be automatically adjusted. FIG. 3 is also a diagram showing the internal structure of the transmission 1A or 1B, and is used to explain these embodiments. Further, the members and parts indicated by the same reference numerals as those used in the embodiments described so far are the same or have the same functions as the members and parts in the above-described embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted. .
 ここで、補助クラッチ8の接合圧を自動調整可能とするものとした技術的背景について説明しておく。補助クラッチ8の接合圧については、たとえば図1に示すように、オペレータによるペダル13の踏込み量の調整により、手動調整が可能である。しかし、土壌の状態等様々な条件の違いに対し、オペレータの判断のみで常に最善の補助クラッチ8の接合圧を選択するのは困難であり、選択ミスで目標どおりの旋回半径での旋回が得られないという可能性がある。そこで、以下の実施例の如く、操向用操作具(操向レバー11)の操作にて想定される所望の旋回半径での旋回が、土壌の状態の違い等にかかわらず正確に得られ、また、そのような旋回を可能とするためのオペレータの手間を不要とするものである。 Here, the technical background that enables the joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 to be automatically adjusted will be described. The joint pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 can be manually adjusted by adjusting the amount of depression of the pedal 13 by an operator, for example, as shown in FIG. However, it is difficult to always select the best joining pressure of the auxiliary clutch 8 only by the operator's judgment due to differences in conditions such as soil conditions. There is a possibility that it is not possible. Therefore, as in the following example, the turning at the desired turning radius assumed by the operation of the steering operation tool (steering lever 11) can be accurately obtained regardless of the difference in the state of the soil, etc. In addition, the operator's effort to enable such turning is unnecessary.
 まず、トランスミッション1A・1Bについては、左シフタ5L制御用の操向用アクチュエータを操向用アクチュエータSALとし、右シフタ5R制御用の操向用アクチュエータを操向用アクチュエータSARとし、これらを総称して操向用アクチュエータSAとしている。また、トランスミッション1A・1Bは、補助クラッチ8用のシフタ9の位置を自動制御するアクチュエータとして、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAを備えており、この補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとして、図32に示す如き電動モータ付きアクチュエータ(電動アクチュエータ)141を用いている。 First, for the transmissions 1A and 1B, the steering actuator for controlling the left shifter 5L is the steering actuator SAL, and the steering actuator for controlling the right shifter 5R is the steering actuator SAR. The steering actuator SA is used. The transmissions 1A and 1B include an auxiliary clutch actuator AA as an actuator for automatically controlling the position of the shifter 9 for the auxiliary clutch 8. The auxiliary clutch actuator AA has an electric motor as shown in FIG. An actuator (electric actuator) 141 is used.
 そして、トランスミッション1Aでは、前述の操向用アクチュエータセット2と同様の油圧回路構造を有するアクチュエータ制御システムを備え、油圧シリンダよりなる操向用アクチュエータ34L・34R(総称して「操向用アクチュエータ34」)を操向用アクチュエータSAL・SARとしている。なお、トランスミッション1Aでは、これらを、操向用アクチュエータSA(SAL・SAR)としての油圧シリンダ34(34L・34R)と称するものとする。 The transmission 1A includes an actuator control system having a hydraulic circuit structure similar to that of the steering actuator set 2 described above. ) Is the steering actuator SAL / SAR. In the transmission 1A, these are referred to as hydraulic cylinders 34 (34L and 34R) as steering actuators SA (SAL and SAR).
 一方、トランスミッション1Bでは、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとして用いた電動アクチュエータ141と同じものを操向用アクチュエータSAL・SARとして備えており、操向用アクチュエータSAL・SARとしての電動アクチュエータ141を操向用電動アクチュエータ141L・141Rと称するものとする。 On the other hand, the transmission 1B includes the same steering actuators SAL / SAR as the electric actuator 141 used as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, and the steering actuator SAL / SAR as the steering actuator SAL / SAR. The actuators 141L and 141R will be referred to.
 図3、図29乃至図32等により、トランスミッション1Aについて説明する。前述のトランスミッション1の説明でも述べたように、ミッションケース20の後部には前後方向に延設された回動軸17が内外貫通状に枢支されている。ミッションケース20の外側(後方)における回動軸17の外端には、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとしての補助クラッチ用電動アクチュエータ141が設けられている。 The transmission 1A will be described with reference to FIG. 3, FIG. 29 to FIG. As described in the description of the transmission 1 described above, the rotation shaft 17 extending in the front-rear direction is pivotally supported at the rear portion of the transmission case 20 so as to penetrate inside and outside. An auxiliary clutch electric actuator 141 serving as an auxiliary clutch actuator AA is provided on the outer end of the rotation shaft 17 outside (rearward) the transmission case 20.
 図29に示すように、操向用アクチュエータSAL・SARしての油圧シリンダ34L・34R及び補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとしての電動アクチュエータ141は、コントローラ10からの指令信号に基づいて制御される。ここで、各操向用アクチュエータSAについては、該当するシフタ5を内側方の最大摺動位置にしてサイドクラッチ6を接合させるようセットされた状態を、操向用アクチュエータSAの非作動状態とし、内側方の最大摺動位置から少しでも外側方にシフタ5を摺動させるようセットされた状態を操向用アクチュエータSAの作動状態とする。一方、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAについては、シフタ9をクラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置にして補助クラッチ8を離間させるようセットされた状態を、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAの非作動状態とし、クラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置から少しでもクラッチ接合側にシフタ9を摺動させるようセットされた状態を補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAの作動状態とする。 29, the hydraulic cylinders 34L and 34R as the steering actuators SAL and SAR and the electric actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA are controlled based on a command signal from the controller 10. Here, with respect to each steering actuator SA, the state where the corresponding shifter 5 is set to the maximum sliding position on the inner side and the side clutch 6 is joined is referred to as a non-operating state of the steering actuator SA. A state where the shifter 5 is set to slide slightly outward from the maximum sliding position on the inner side is defined as the operating state of the steering actuator SA. On the other hand, for the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, the state in which the shifter 9 is set to the maximum sliding position on the clutch separating side to separate the auxiliary clutch 8 is referred to as the non-operating state of the auxiliary clutch actuator AA. The state in which the shifter 9 is set to slide to the clutch engagement side even a little from the maximum sliding position is defined as the operating state of the auxiliary clutch actuator AA.
 また、車両には、旋回制御用及び補助クラッチ制御用の操作具として、操向レバー11、補助クラッチ自動制御スイッチ112(以下、単に「スイッチ112」とする)、補助クラッチ接合力設定ダイヤル113(以下、単に「ダイヤル113」とする)が設けられており、操向レバー11の操作位置を検出すべく該操向レバー11の基部に設けたポテンショメータ11p、スイッチ112、ダイヤル113が、コントローラ10に対する入力手段として備えている。すなわち、ポテンショメータ11p、スイッチ112、ダイヤル113のそれぞれに設けられた検出手段にて、それぞれの操作具の操作位置が検出され、それら操作位置を示す検出信号11s、112s、113sがコントローラ10に入力されるものとしている。 In addition, the vehicle includes a steering lever 11, an auxiliary clutch automatic control switch 112 (hereinafter simply referred to as “switch 112”), and an auxiliary clutch engagement force setting dial 113 ( Hereinafter, the dial 113 is simply provided), and a potentiometer 11p, a switch 112, and a dial 113 provided at the base of the steering lever 11 to detect the operation position of the steering lever 11 are connected to the controller 10. It is provided as an input means. In other words, the detection means provided in each of the potentiometer 11p, the switch 112, and the dial 113 detects the operation positions of the respective operation tools, and detection signals 11s, 112s, and 113s indicating the operation positions are input to the controller 10. It is supposed to be.
 さらに、左右車軸4L・4Rには、それぞれの回転数を検出するための回転数センサ114L・114Rが設けられており、各回転数センサ114L・114Rの検出信号114Ls、114Rsがコントローラ10に入力されるものとしている。コントローラ10においては、入力される検出信号11s、112s、113s、114Ls、114Rsに対応して、油圧シリンダ34L・34R及び補助クラッチ用電動アクチュエータ141に対する指令内容を決定し、その決定に基づく指令信号を発するものである。 Further, the left and right axles 4L and 4R are provided with rotation speed sensors 114L and 114R for detecting the respective rotation speeds, and detection signals 114Ls and 114Rs of the respective rotation speed sensors 114L and 114R are input to the controller 10. It is supposed to be. In the controller 10, in response to the input detection signals 11s, 112s, 113s, 114Ls, and 114Rs, command contents for the hydraulic cylinders 34L and 34R and the auxiliary clutch electric actuator 141 are determined, and a command signal based on the determination is sent. It is something that is emitted.
 操向レバー11を直進位置から左側に傾動してその傾倒角度Tを増大させるにつれ、ポテンショメータ11pがその傾倒角度及び方向に応じた値の信号11sを出力し、該信号11sがコントローラ10に入力される。コントローラ10は、この信号11sに対応するように、方向制御弁32に指令信号32Lsを送信してソレノイド32aを励磁し、方向制御弁32を「L」位置として、操向用アクチュエータ34Lのピストンロッドを伸長させる一方、リリーフ弁33に指令信号33sを送信して、ピストンロッド伸長量を画定する(すなわち、シフタ5Lの摺動位置を画定する)ためのリリーフ弁33のリリーフ圧を決定する。一方、操向レバー11を直進位置から右側に傾動してその傾倒角度Tを増大させるにつれ、ポテンショメータ11pの発する信号11sがコントローラ10に入力され、コントローラ10は、この信号11sに対応するように、方向制御弁32に指令信号32Rsを送信してソレノイド32aを励磁し、方向制御弁32を「R」位置として、操向用アクチュエータ34Rのピストンロッドを伸長させる一方、リリーフ弁33に指令信号33sを送信して、ピストンロッド伸長量を画定する(すなわち、シフタ5Rの摺動位置を画定する)ためのリリーフ弁33のリリーフ圧を決定する。 As the steering lever 11 is tilted to the left from the straight traveling position to increase the tilt angle T, the potentiometer 11p outputs a signal 11s having a value corresponding to the tilt angle and direction, and the signal 11s is input to the controller 10. The The controller 10 transmits a command signal 32Ls to the direction control valve 32 to excite the solenoid 32a so as to correspond to this signal 11s, and the direction control valve 32 is set to the “L” position so that the piston rod of the steering actuator 34L. The command signal 33s is transmitted to the relief valve 33, and the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 for defining the piston rod extension amount (that is, defining the sliding position of the shifter 5L) is determined. On the other hand, as the steering lever 11 is tilted to the right from the straight traveling position to increase the tilt angle T, the signal 11s generated by the potentiometer 11p is input to the controller 10, and the controller 10 corresponds to the signal 11s. The command signal 32Rs is transmitted to the direction control valve 32 to excite the solenoid 32a, the direction control valve 32 is set to the “R” position, the piston rod of the steering actuator 34R is extended, and the command signal 33s is supplied to the relief valve 33. This is transmitted to determine the relief pressure of the relief valve 33 for defining the piston rod extension amount (that is, defining the sliding position of the shifter 5R).
 なお、方向制御弁32に指令信号32Lsまたは32Rsを送信するためのコントローラ10への入力手段としては、図1、図10、図16等に示すようなバルブスイッチ53を設けるものとしてもよい。 In addition, as an input means to the controller 10 for transmitting the command signal 32Ls or 32Rs to the direction control valve 32, a valve switch 53 as shown in FIGS. 1, 10, 16 or the like may be provided.
 スイッチ112は、補助クラッチ8の自動制御を行うか否か(手動制御とするか否か)を決定するための切換操作手段であり、当該自動制御を行うものとする「ON」位置と、当該自動制御を行わない(手動にて補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを設定する)ものとする「OFF」位置との、2位置に切り換えられる。 The switch 112 is a switching operation means for deciding whether or not to perform automatic control of the auxiliary clutch 8 (whether or not to perform manual control), and an “ON” position for performing the automatic control, It is switched to two positions, “OFF” position, in which automatic control is not performed (joint force F of auxiliary clutch 8 is manually set).
 ダイヤル113は、補助クラッチ8の接合力を手動で設定するものとした場合、すなわち、スイッチ112を「OFF」位置にセットした場合における、当該接合力の設定用手段である。ダイヤル113は、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを0とする(すなわち補助クラッチ8を切る)「0」位置から接合力Fを最大値Fmaxとする「Fmax」位置まで回動可能であり、その回動位置に応じて、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fが設定される。ダイヤル113の位置が「Fmax」位置に近いほど、大きな接合力Fが設定される。なお、「0」位置から「Fmax」位置までの間にいくつかの設定位置を決めておき、ダイヤル113を、これらの設定位置のいずれかにセットすることで、接合力Fを段階的に設定するものとしてもよいし、あるいは、接合力Fを無段階に変更可能とし、「0」位置から「Fmax」位置まで無段階に回動可能なダイヤル113の任意の回動位置に対応して接合力Fを設定するものとしてもよい。 The dial 113 is a means for setting the joining force when the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is manually set, that is, when the switch 112 is set to the “OFF” position. The dial 113 can be rotated from a “0” position where the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is 0 (that is, when the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged) to an “Fmax” position where the joining force F is the maximum value Fmax. The joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set according to the moving position. As the position of the dial 113 is closer to the “Fmax” position, a larger bonding force F is set. Note that several setting positions are determined between the “0” position and the “Fmax” position, and the dial 113 is set to one of these setting positions, so that the joining force F is set stepwise. Alternatively, the joining force F can be changed in a stepless manner, and the dial 113 can be joined in correspondence with an arbitrary turning position of the dial 113 that can be turned steplessly from the “0” position to the “Fmax” position. The force F may be set.
 なお、前記スイッチ112及び前記ダイヤル113の設置箇所としては、例えば、車両において、操向レバー11の前方に設けられたダッシュボードにおける、車両の速度やエンジン回転数を表示する計器パネル上に設置することが考えられる。さらにこのような計器パネルに、図41に示すような、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fの実際値(現在値)を示す補助クラッチ接合力メータ117を設置することが考えられる。オペレータは、自動制御にて刻々変化する補助クラッチ8の接合力Fの現在値を、補助クラッチ接合力メータ117にて視認することができる。なお、本実施例では、補助クラッチ接合力メータ117として、液晶表示装置を用いているが、どのような構造の表示手段でもよい。また、本実施例では、最大接合力Fmaxを「100%」の接合力Fとすることを前提として、接合力Fの実際値が最大接合力Fmaxの何%であるかを棒グラフで表すものとしているが、オペレータが現在の補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを認識できる表示方法であれば、どのような表示方法であってもよい。 The switch 112 and the dial 113 are installed on an instrument panel that displays a vehicle speed and an engine speed on a dashboard provided in front of the steering lever 11 in the vehicle, for example. It is possible. Furthermore, it is conceivable to install an auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117 indicating the actual value (current value) of the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 as shown in FIG. 41 on such an instrument panel. The operator can visually check the current value of the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 that changes every moment by automatic control with the auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the auxiliary clutch engagement force meter 117, but display means having any structure may be used. Further, in this embodiment, on the assumption that the maximum bonding force Fmax is a bonding force F of “100%”, the bar graph indicates what percentage of the maximum bonding force Fmax the actual value of the bonding force F is. However, any display method may be used as long as the operator can recognize the current joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8.
 また、左右シフタ5L・5Rの位置決め用操作手段、補助クラッチ8の接合力の自動制御/手動制御の切換用操作手段、手動制御設定時における補助クラッチ8の接合力の設定用操作手段としては、以上に述べた操向レバー11、スイッチ112、ダイヤル113のような形態に限らず、それぞれに求められる機能を確保できる構造のものであればよい。たとえば、図1に示すように、スイッチ112をレバー12に、ダイヤル113をペダル13に置き換えてもよい。 Further, as positioning operation means for the left and right shifters 5L and 5R, an operation means for switching automatic control / manual control of the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8, and an operation means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8 when setting the manual control, The structure is not limited to the steering lever 11, switch 112, and dial 113 described above, and any structure may be used as long as the functions required for each can be ensured. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the switch 112 may be replaced with the lever 12 and the dial 113 may be replaced with the pedal 13.
 あるいは、図42、図43に示すように、手動制御設定時における補助クラッチ8の接合力の設定用操作手段としてのダイヤル113Aを、操向レバー11の握り部11bの上端部に前置することも考えられる。本実施例において、ダイヤル113Aは、操向レバー11の握り部11bに固定されている固定部113aと、該固定部113aに環設されて、該操向レバー11の軸心を中心にR方向に回動自在の回動部113bとよりなり、回動部113bには、オペレータが手の親指のスナップで回動操作できるようにツマミ部113cが形成されている。固定部113aには、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fの度数(本実施例では0、1、2、3、4)を表す目盛りが印字されており、オペレータはツマミ部113cを介して回動部13bをR方向に回動し、該回動部113bに印字された指標を固定部の目盛りのいずれかに合わせて、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fの度数を任意に設定するものである。 Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, a dial 113A as an operating means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8 at the time of manual control setting is placed in front of the upper end portion of the grip portion 11b of the steering lever 11. Is also possible. In this embodiment, the dial 113A includes a fixed portion 113a fixed to the grip portion 11b of the steering lever 11, and an annular direction around the shaft center of the steering lever 11 provided around the fixed portion 113a. The rotary portion 113b is formed with a knob portion 113c so that the operator can rotate it with a thumb snap. The fixed portion 113a is printed with a scale indicating the frequency of the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 (0, 1, 2, 3, 4 in this embodiment), and the operator can turn the rotating portion via the knob portion 113c. 13b is rotated in the R direction, and the index printed on the rotating portion 113b is adjusted to one of the scales of the fixed portion, so that the frequency of the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is arbitrarily set.
 補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとして、図31及び図32に示す如くミッションケース20の外側(後方)に装着される電動アクチュエータ141は、その駆動源として正逆回転可能な電動モータ142を有しており、該電動モータ142の出力軸はウォーム144となっている。電動モータ142にはギアケース144が連設されており、ギアケース143にて、前述の回動軸17の外端部を軸支するとともに、該ウォーム144に対し直角方向でかつ該回動軸17に対し平行に延設したカウンタ軸145を支持している。カウンタ軸145には、ウォームホイル146及びピニオン147が固設されており、ウォームホイル146はウォーム144と噛合している。回動軸17の外端部にはセクタギア148が固設されていて、ピニオン147と噛合している。 As the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, as shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the electric actuator 141 mounted on the outside (rear) of the mission case 20 has an electric motor 142 that can rotate forward and backward as its drive source. The output shaft of the electric motor 142 is a worm 144. A gear case 144 is connected to the electric motor 142, and the gear case 143 supports the outer end portion of the rotating shaft 17, and is perpendicular to the worm 144 and the rotating shaft. A counter shaft 145 extending in parallel with 17 is supported. A worm wheel 146 and a pinion 147 are fixed to the counter shaft 145, and the worm wheel 146 meshes with the worm 144. A sector gear 148 is fixed to the outer end of the rotating shaft 17 and meshes with the pinion 147.
 コントローラ10は、前述の入力手段である操向レバー11、スイッチ112、ダイヤル113、回転数センサ114L・114Rからの入力信号11s、112s、113s、114Ls・114Rsに基づいて、電動モータ142の回動方向及び回動量を決定し、必要に応じて電動モータ142に指令信号142sを発する。電動モータ142の回動は、ウォーム144、ウォームホイル146、カウンタ軸145、ピニオン146、セクタギア148を介して回動軸17に伝達され、回動軸17の回動に基づく前述の如きカム面17aの傾倒角度に応じて補助クラッチ8制御用のシフタ9の摺動位置が決定される。 The controller 10 rotates the electric motor 142 based on the steering lever 11, the switch 112, the dial 113, and the input signals 11s, 112s, 113s, 114Ls and 114Rs from the rotation speed sensors 114L and 114R, which are the aforementioned input means. The direction and amount of rotation are determined, and a command signal 142s is issued to the electric motor 142 as necessary. The rotation of the electric motor 142 is transmitted to the rotation shaft 17 via the worm 144, the worm wheel 146, the counter shaft 145, the pinion 146, and the sector gear 148, and the cam surface 17a as described above based on the rotation of the rotation shaft 17 is transmitted. The sliding position of the shifter 9 for controlling the auxiliary clutch 8 is determined according to the tilt angle.
 指令信号142sは、例えば電動モータ142を目的の回動位置まで回動させるよう設定された電圧であり、この電圧は、シフタ9のバネ9eの付勢力に抗してシフタ9のフォーク軸9a及びフォーク9bを目的の摺動位置まで摺動させるだけのトルクを回動軸17に付与するものである。この電圧が0になれば、バネ9eの付勢力により、シフタ9のフォーク軸9aは、前記のクラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置に配される。このように、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとしての電動アクチュエータ141については、シフタ9のフォーク軸9aがクラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置に配されるように電動モータ142を非駆動状態とした状態が、その非作動状態に該当するものであり、クラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置から少しでもシフタ9のフォーク軸9aをクラッチ接合側に摺動した状態となるよう電動モータ142を駆動した状態が、その作動状態に該当する。 The command signal 142s is, for example, a voltage set to rotate the electric motor 142 to a target rotation position. This voltage is against the biasing force of the spring 9e of the shifter 9 and the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 and A torque sufficient to slide the fork 9b to the target sliding position is applied to the rotating shaft 17. When this voltage becomes zero, the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is arranged at the maximum sliding position on the clutch separating side by the biasing force of the spring 9e. Thus, with respect to the electric actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, the state in which the electric motor 142 is in the non-driven state so that the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is disposed at the maximum sliding position on the clutch disengagement side, The state in which the electric motor 142 is driven so that the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is slid to the clutch engagement side even slightly from the maximum sliding position on the clutch disengagement side corresponds to the inoperative state. Corresponds to the operating state.
 次に、図3、図33及び図34等により、トランスミッション1Bについて説明する。本実施例は、補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAとして電動アクチュエータ141を用いる一方、この電動アクチュエータ141と同じものを、操向用アクチュエータSAL・SARとして用いるものである。 Next, the transmission 1B will be described with reference to FIG. 3, FIG. 33, FIG. In this embodiment, the electric actuator 141 is used as the auxiliary clutch actuator AA, while the same actuator as the electric actuator 141 is used as the steering actuators SAL and SAR.
 コントローラ10は、前述の入力手段である操向レバー11基部のポテンショメータ11p、スイッチ112、ダイヤル113、回転数センサ114L・14Rからの入力信号111s、112s、113s、114Ls・114Rsに基づいて、操向用電動アクチュエータ141L・141Rの電動モータ142の回動方向及び回動量を決定し、必要に応じてそれぞれの電動モータ142に指令信号142Ls・142Rsを発する。操向用電動アクチュエータ141L・141Rそれぞれの電動モータ142の回動は、ウォーム144、ウォームホイル146、カウンタ軸145、ピニオン146、セクタギア148を介して回動軸30に伝達され、回動軸30の回動に基づくシフタ5の摺動位置が決定される。 The controller 10 steers based on the input signals 111 s, 112 s, 113 s, 114 Ls, 114 Rs from the potentiometer 11 p of the steering lever 11 base, which is the input means, the switch 112, the dial 113, and the rotation speed sensors 114L, 14R. The direction and amount of rotation of the electric motor 142 of the electric actuators 141L and 141R are determined, and command signals 142Ls and 142Rs are issued to the electric motors 142 as necessary. The rotation of the electric motor 142 of each of the steering electric actuators 141L and 141R is transmitted to the rotation shaft 30 via the worm 144, the worm wheel 146, the counter shaft 145, the pinion 146, and the sector gear 148. The sliding position of the shifter 5 based on the rotation is determined.
 指令信号142Ls・142Rsは、例えばそれぞれの電動モータ142を目的の回動位置まで回動させるよう設定された電圧であり、この電圧は、シフタ5L・5Rそれぞれのバネ5aの付勢力に抗して当該シフタ5を目的の摺動位置まで摺動させるだけのトルクを回動軸30に付与するものである。この電圧が0になれば、バネ5aの付勢力により、シフタ5は、前記の内側方の最大摺動位置に配される。 The command signals 142Ls and 142Rs are, for example, voltages set so as to rotate the respective electric motors 142 to the target rotation positions. These voltages are against the urging force of the springs 5a of the shifters 5L and 5R. A torque sufficient to slide the shifter 5 to a target sliding position is applied to the rotating shaft 30. When this voltage becomes zero, the shifter 5 is arranged at the maximum sliding position on the inner side by the biasing force of the spring 5a.
 このように、トランスミッション1Bでは、左右シフタ5L・5R制御用の操向用アクチュエータSAL・SAR及び補助クラッチ用アクチュエータAAの全てを電動アクチュエータ141とすることにより、操向制御システム1Aに比べ、操向用アクチュエータを制御するための油圧回路を構成する油圧ポンプ31、方向制御弁32、可変リリーフ弁33を不要とし、したがって、アクチュエータセット2のコンパクト化に有利である。 As described above, in the transmission 1B, the steering actuators SAL and SAR for controlling the left and right shifters 5L and 5R and the auxiliary clutch actuator AA are all electric actuators 141, so that the steering is compared with the steering control system 1A. Therefore, the hydraulic pump 31, the directional control valve 32, and the variable relief valve 33 that constitute the hydraulic circuit for controlling the actuator for use are not required, which is advantageous for making the actuator set 2 compact.
 以上の如き構成のトランスミッション1A・1Bにおけるコントローラ10にて実施される制御フローチャートが図35にて示されており、これについて説明する。まず、コントローラ10は、スイッチ112からの入力信号112sを読み取り、補助クラッチ8の制御が自動モードに設定されているかどうか(スイッチ112が「ON」位置に設定されているかどうか)を判断する(ステップS01)。自動モードに設定されていない(スイッチ112が「OFF」位置に設定されている)場合(ステップS01でNO)は、ダイヤル113からの入力信号113sを読み取り、補助クラッチ114の接合力Fがダイヤル113のセット位置に対応する設定値Fsとなるように、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを制御する。設定値Fsは、例えば、ダイヤル13を前記「0」位置にセットした場合は、0であり、この場合、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを非作動状態にし、シフタ9のフォーク軸9aをクラッチ離間側の最大摺動位置に配して、補助クラッチ8を切ることとなる(図1に示すダイヤル13及びシフタ9を参照)。ダイヤル113を前記「Fmax」位置にセットした場合の設定値Fsは、接合力Fの最大値Fmaxに該当する。この場合、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを作動状態にし、シフタ9のフォーク軸9aをクラッチ接合側の最大摺動位置に配して、補助クラッチ9の接合力Fを最大にする(図10に示すシフタ9を参照)。 A control flowchart executed by the controller 10 in the transmissions 1A and 1B having the above-described configuration is shown in FIG. 35, which will be described. First, the controller 10 reads the input signal 112s from the switch 112, and determines whether the control of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the automatic mode (whether the switch 112 is set to the “ON” position) (step). S01). When the automatic mode is not set (the switch 112 is set to the “OFF” position) (NO in step S01), the input signal 113s from the dial 113 is read, and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 114 is set to the dial 113. The auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is controlled so as to be the set value Fs corresponding to the set position. For example, the setting value Fs is 0 when the dial 13 is set to the “0” position. In this case, the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is deactivated, and the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is disengaged from the clutch. The auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged at the maximum sliding position on the side (see the dial 13 and the shifter 9 shown in FIG. 1). The setting value Fs when the dial 113 is set at the “Fmax” position corresponds to the maximum value Fmax of the bonding force F. In this case, the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is activated, the fork shaft 9a of the shifter 9 is arranged at the maximum sliding position on the clutch engagement side, and the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 9 is maximized (see FIG. 10). See shifter 9 shown).
 補助クラッチ8の制御が自動モードに設定されている(スイッチ12が「ON」位置に設定されている)場合(ステップS01でYES)は、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを作動状態にし、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを、自動モード用に設定された所定値Fv(0より大きな値)にする(ステップS03)。次に、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tを検出すべく、ポテンショメータ11pの入力信号11sを読み取る。傾倒角度Tが0、すなわち、操向レバー11が直進位置にあるとき(ステップS04でYES)は、両操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAL・SARを非作動状態とする(ステップS05)。これにより、左右両シフタ5L・5Rがそれぞれの内側方の最大摺動位置(左シフタ5Lは摺動右端位置、右シフタ5Rは摺動左端位置)に配され、両サイドクラッチ6L・6Rが接合される。 When the control of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the automatic mode (the switch 12 is set to the “ON” position) (YES in step S01), the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is set in the operating state, and the auxiliary clutch The joining force F of 8 is set to a predetermined value Fv (a value greater than 0) set for the automatic mode (step S03). Next, in order to detect the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11, the input signal 11s of the potentiometer 11p is read. When the tilt angle T is 0, that is, when the steering lever 11 is in the straight traveling position (YES in step S04), the steering electronic control actuators SAL and SAR are deactivated (step S05). As a result, the left and right shifters 5L and 5R are arranged at the maximum inner sliding positions (the left shifter 5L is the sliding right end position and the right shifter 5R is the sliding left end position), and the both side clutches 6L and 6R are joined. Is done.
 なお、このように、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tの検出に基づき車両を直進させるか旋回させるか判断する前の段階で、自動モード設定であれば補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを所定値Fvにすることで、直進走行中において、一方の車軸4がスリップ状態になりそうな状況であっても、補助クラッチ8を介して、他方の車軸4に対して付与される駆動力の一部が該一方の車軸4に伝達され、このようなスリップ状態にならないか、あるいはスリップ状態になっても容易に脱することができる。 In this way, at the stage before determining whether to move the vehicle straight or turn based on the detection of the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11, if the automatic mode is set, the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to a predetermined value Fv. Thus, even when one axle 4 is likely to be slipped during straight traveling, a part of the driving force applied to the other axle 4 via the auxiliary clutch 8 is obtained. It is transmitted to the one axle 4 so that it does not become such a slip state or can be easily detached even if it becomes a slip state.
 操向レバー11を直進位置から回動する(ステップS04でNO)と、旋回外側の操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAは非作動状態のままで、旋回内側の操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAを作動させる(ステップS07、S13)。操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tに応じて、操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAの作動量(油圧シリンダ34であればピストンロッドの伸長量、電動モータ付きアクチュエータ141であれば、電動モータ142にかける電圧量)が決定され、その作動量に対応する摺動位置に旋回内側のシフタ5が配置される。その傾倒角度Tが最大値Tmax未満である場合(ステップS06でYES)、旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度、あるいは、旋回外側の車軸4に対する旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度比について、操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tに対応する目的値Stと、回転数センサ114L・114Rからの入力信号114Ls・114Rsより算出される実測値Saとが比較され、実測値Saと目的値Stとの間に差がある場合には、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fの調整により、左右駆動列3L・3R間で伝達されるトルク量を調整して、その差を低減もしくは解消するという制御が行われる。 When the steering lever 11 is rotated from the straight position (NO in step S04), the steering electronic control actuator SA inside the turning is operated while the steering outside electronic control actuator SA remains in an inoperative state. (Steps S07 and S13). Depending on the tilting angle T of the steering lever 11, the operating amount of the steering electronic control actuator SA (if the hydraulic cylinder 34, the amount of expansion of the piston rod, if the actuator 141 with electric motor, the voltage applied to the electric motor 142 Amount) is determined, and the shifter 5 on the inner side of the turning is arranged at the sliding position corresponding to the operation amount. If the tilt angle T is less than the maximum value Tmax (YES in step S06), the steering lever is used to determine the rotational speed of the axle 4 inside the turn or the ratio of the rotational speed of the axle 4 inside the turn to the axle 4 outside the turn. 11 is compared with the actual value Sa calculated from the input signals 114Ls and 114Rs from the rotational speed sensors 114L and 114R, and the difference between the actual value Sa and the target value St is compared. If there is, control is performed to adjust the amount of torque transmitted between the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R by adjusting the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 to reduce or eliminate the difference.
 すなわち、車両の旋回中において、実測値Saと目的値Stとの間に差がない(差が許容範囲内である場合を含む)場合(ステップS08でYES)、車両は、目標の旋回半径で旋回していることになるので、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAの現作動状態は保持され、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fが現在値のままで保持される(ステップS09)。 That is, when there is no difference between the actual measurement value Sa and the target value St during the turning of the vehicle (including the case where the difference is within the allowable range) (YES in step S08), the vehicle has the target turning radius. Since the vehicle is turning, the current operating state of the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is maintained, and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is maintained at the current value (step S09).
 旋回中の実測値Saが目的値Stより大きい場合(ステップS10でYES)、旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度(回転速度比)が高すぎて目標の旋回半径より大きな旋回半径で旋回してしまうことになるので、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAの作動量を低下させ、すなわち、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAとしてのアクチュエータ141の電動モータ142にかける指令信号142sとしての電圧を低下して、シフタ9のフォーク軸9aをクラッチ離間側に摺動し、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを低減して(ステップS11)、旋回外側の駆動列3から旋回内側の駆動列3への伝達トルクを低減する。これにより旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度(回転速度比)を低減し、旋回半径を小さくして目標の旋回半径に近づける。 If the actually measured value Sa during turning is larger than the target value St (YES in step S10), the rotational speed (rotational speed ratio) of the axle 4 inside the turn is too high and the vehicle turns with a turning radius larger than the target turning radius. Therefore, the operation amount of the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is reduced, that is, the voltage as the command signal 142s applied to the electric motor 142 of the actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is reduced, and the shifter The fork shaft 9a is slid to the clutch disengagement side, the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is reduced (step S11), and the transmission torque from the drive train 3 on the outside of the turn to the drive train 3 on the inside of the turn is reduced. . As a result, the rotational speed (rotational speed ratio) of the axle 4 inside the turn is reduced, and the turning radius is reduced to approach the target turning radius.
 一方、実測値Saが目的値St以下の場合(ステップS10でNO)、旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度(回転速度比)が低すぎて目標の旋回半径より大きな旋回半径で旋回してしまうことになるので、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAの作動量を増加させ、すなわち、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAとしてのアクチュエータ141の電動モータ142にかける指令信号142sとしての電圧を増加して、シフタ9のフォーク軸9aをクラッチ接合側に摺動し、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを増加して(ステップS12)、旋回外側の駆動列3から旋回内側の駆動列3への伝達トルクを増大する。これにより旋回内側の車軸4の回転速度(回転速度比)を増大し、旋回半径を大きくして目標の旋回半径に近づける。 On the other hand, if the actual measurement value Sa is equal to or less than the target value St (NO in step S10), the rotational speed (rotational speed ratio) of the axle 4 inside the turn is too low and the vehicle turns with a turning radius larger than the target turning radius. Therefore, the operation amount of the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is increased, that is, the voltage as the command signal 142s applied to the electric motor 142 of the actuator 141 as the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is increased, and the shifter 9 The fork shaft 9a is slid to the clutch engagement side, the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased (step S12), and the transmission torque from the outer drive train 3 to the inner drive train 3 is increased. As a result, the rotational speed (rotational speed ratio) of the axle 4 inside the turn is increased, and the turning radius is increased to approach the target turning radius.
 操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tが最大値Tmaxである場合(ステップS06でNO)、旋回内側の操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAの作動量を最大にして、旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7が完全にかかった状態にする(旋回内側の駆動列3及び車軸4にかかる制動力を最大にする)。同時に、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを非作動状態にし、補助クラッチ8を切ることで、旋回内側の車軸4にかかる旋回内側のサイドブレーキ7の制動力が、旋回外側の駆動列3及び車軸4に伝わるのを防ぐと共に補助クラッチ8の耐久性を向上させる。 When the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 is the maximum value Tmax (NO in step S06), the operation amount of the steering electronic control actuator SA inside the turning is maximized, and the side brake 7 inside the turning is completely applied. (The braking force applied to the drive train 3 and the axle 4 inside the turn is maximized). At the same time, the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is deactivated and the auxiliary clutch 8 is disengaged, so that the braking force of the side brake 7 on the inside of the turn applied to the axle 4 on the inside of the turn is applied to the drive train 3 and the axle 4 on the outside of the turn. And the durability of the auxiliary clutch 8 is improved.
 次に、図36乃至図38により、トランスミッション1A・1Bにおけるサイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキシステムを用いての駐車ブレーキ操作について説明する。従来、サイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式操向制御システムを適用したトランスミッションを搭載する車両では、左右両サイドブレーキを同時にかけるか、あるいは、左右サイドブレーキとは別に、両車軸に制動力を付与するように構成された駐車ブレーキを車両に設けるという方法が適用されていた。しかし、同時に左右両サイドブレーキをかける方法では、左右両サイドブレーキがかかる直前に、左右両サイドクラッチが同時に切れる(両方の車軸が非駆動状態になる)という状態が現出し、傾斜地で駐車ブレーキをかけるときに制動開始の遅れによる車両の姿勢のブレ等の要因となっていた。一方、別途に駐車ブレーキを設けることはコスト面やトランスミッションのコンパクト化という面で不利であった。 Next, the parking brake operation using the side clutch / side brake system in the transmissions 1A and 1B will be described with reference to FIGS. Conventionally, in vehicles equipped with a transmission that uses a side clutch / side brake steering control system, both the left and right side brakes are applied simultaneously, or a braking force is applied to both axles separately from the left and right side brakes. A method of providing a configured parking brake on a vehicle has been applied. However, if the left and right side brakes are applied simultaneously, the right and left side clutches will be disengaged at the same time (both axles will be in a non-driven state) immediately before the left and right side brakes are applied. This was a factor such as blurring of the posture of the vehicle due to a delay in starting braking. On the other hand, providing a parking brake separately is disadvantageous in terms of cost and downsizing of the transmission.
 ここで、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを最大値Fmaxにすることで、両駆動列3L・3R及び両車軸4L・4Rが完全にデフロックされた状態になり、左右駆動列3L・3Rのうち一方が制動されると、その制動力が補助クラッチ8を介して他方に及び、両車軸4L・4Rが同時に制動され、駐車ブレーキとして機能するように構成されている。 Here, by setting the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 to the maximum value Fmax, the two drive trains 3L and 3R and the two axles 4L and 4R are completely deflocked, and one of the left and right drive trains 3L and 3R When the vehicle is braked, the braking force extends to the other via the auxiliary clutch 8, and both the axles 4L and 4R are braked simultaneously to function as a parking brake.
 すなわち、本実施例に係るトランスミッション1Aまたは1Bを搭載した車両には、駐車ブレーキ操作具として、図36に示す如き駐車ブレーキペダル115が備えられ、その踏込み操作の有無により、駐車ブレーキスイッチ115aのON・OFFが切り換えられるものとなっている。そして、操向制御システム1におけるコントローラ10に、駐車ブレーキスイッチ115aのON・OFFを示す信号115sが入力される。 That is, the vehicle equipped with the transmission 1A or 1B according to the present embodiment is provided with a parking brake pedal 115 as shown in FIG. 36 as a parking brake operation tool, and the parking brake switch 115a is turned on depending on whether or not the stepping operation is performed.・ OFF can be switched. Then, a signal 115s indicating ON / OFF of the parking brake switch 115a is input to the controller 10 in the steering control system 1.
 このように操向制御システム1が駐車ブレーキとして機能するように、図38に示すようなルーチンが、図35に示す如き車両旋回用のコントローラ10の制御フローに組み込まれている。すなわち、駐車ブレーキスイッチ115aがONしていることが検出される(ステップS21、ON)と、コントローラ10は、一対の操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAL・SARのうち、一方(図37の実施例では操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAR)については非作動状態に保持して前述の如くそのシフタ5を内側方の最大摺動位置に保持し、もう一方(図37の実施例では操向用電子制御アクチュエータSAL)についてはフル作動状態にしてそのシフタ5を外側方の最大摺動位置に配置する。そして、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fが最大値Fmaxとなるように補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを作動する(ステップS22)。駐車ブレーキ115が作動していない(駐車ブレーキスイッチ115aがOFFの)状態になると、図35の制御フローにおけるスイッチ112のON・OFFの検出ステップ(ステップS01)に移行する。 38 is incorporated in the control flow of the vehicle turning controller 10 as shown in FIG. 35 so that the steering control system 1 functions as a parking brake. That is, when it is detected that the parking brake switch 115a is ON (step S21, ON), the controller 10 selects one of the pair of steering electronic control actuators SAL and SAR (in the embodiment of FIG. 37). The steering electronic control actuator SAR is held in a non-actuated state, and the shifter 5 is held at the maximum sliding position on the inner side as described above, and the other (the electronic control actuator for steering in the embodiment shown in FIG. 37). For SAL), the shifter 5 is placed in the maximum sliding position on the outer side in a full operation state. Then, the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is operated so that the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 becomes the maximum value Fmax (step S22). When the parking brake 115 is not activated (the parking brake switch 115a is OFF), the process proceeds to an ON / OFF detection step (step S01) of the switch 112 in the control flow of FIG.
 次に、図39及び図40に示す実施例について説明する。本実施例は、車両の前後方向の傾斜状態の検出に基づく補助クラッチ8の接合力の補正制御を行うものである。まず、その目的について説明する。傾斜地で旋回する場合、特に傾斜地を横断する場合は、傾斜地の低い側に位置する車軸4に車両の自重がかかり、特にサイドクラッチ6の切れた旋回内側の車軸4については、その旋回軌跡が想定していたものよりも傾斜地の低い側へとずれる可能性が高くなる。すなわち、前上がりの傾斜地で旋回すると、旋回内側の車軸4は、低位置側となる後方にずれがちになり、一方、前下がりの傾斜地で旋回すると、旋回内側の車軸4は、低位置側となる前方にずれがちになる。この自重によるずれは、旋回内側の車軸4の進行方向への走破性を高めることで解消されると考えられ、走破性を高めるには、補助クラッチ8を介しての旋回外側の駆動列3から旋回内側の駆動列3へのトルクを増加することが考えられる。そこで、本実施例に係る操向制御システム1では、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fの設定を自動モードにしているときに、車両が傾斜状態になると、補助クラッチ8の接合力を補正すべく、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAの制御を行うものとしている。 Next, the embodiment shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 will be described. In the present embodiment, correction control of the joining force of the auxiliary clutch 8 is performed based on detection of the leaning state of the vehicle in the front-rear direction. First, the purpose will be described. When turning on sloping ground, especially when crossing sloping ground, the vehicle weight is applied to the axle 4 located on the lower side of the sloping ground, and the turning trajectory is assumed especially for the axle 4 inside the turning where the side clutch 6 is disconnected. There is a high possibility of shifting to a lower side of the slope than what was being done. That is, when turning on a slope that rises forward, the axle 4 on the inside of the turn tends to shift backward, which is on the low position side. On the other hand, if turning on a slope that is lowered forward, the axle 4 on the inside of the turn It tends to shift forward. It is considered that the deviation due to the own weight is eliminated by increasing the traveling ability of the axle 4 inside the turn in the traveling direction. To improve the traveling ability, the drive train 3 outside the turn via the auxiliary clutch 8 is used. It is conceivable to increase the torque to the drive train 3 inside the turning. Therefore, in the steering control system 1 according to the present embodiment, when the setting of the engagement force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to the automatic mode, when the vehicle is in an inclined state, to correct the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch 8, The auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is controlled.
 すなわち、本実施例では、図39に示すように、コントローラ10への入力手段として、車両の前後方向の傾斜角度(ピッチ角)Pを検出する傾斜センサ116が車両に設けられており、コントローラ10には、傾斜センサ116より傾斜角度Pの検出信号116sが入力されるものとしている。そして、図40に示すように、自動モードON(ステップS01でYES)に基づき補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAが作動されて補助クラッチ8の接合力Fが所定値Fvにセットされた状態(ステップS03)において、コントローラ10は、入力された検出信号116sを読み取り、車両の傾斜角度Pが0である(0に近い、接合力Fの補正を不要とする許容範囲内の値である場合を含む)か否かを判断する(ステップS31)。 That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, a tilt sensor 116 that detects a tilt angle (pitch angle) P in the front-rear direction of the vehicle is provided in the vehicle as input means to the controller 10. In this case, a detection signal 116 s of the inclination angle P is input from the inclination sensor 116. As shown in FIG. 40, the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA is operated based on the automatic mode ON (YES in step S01), and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is set to a predetermined value Fv (step S03). ), The controller 10 reads the input detection signal 116s, and the vehicle inclination angle P is 0 (including a case where the vehicle is at a value within an allowable range that is close to 0 and does not require correction of the bonding force F). Whether or not (step S31).
 車両が水平状態である(傾斜角度Pが0である)と判断すれば(ステップS31でYES)、接合力Fが所定値Fvとなるよう設定された補助クラッチ8の接合状態を保持したままで、車両の直進または旋回制御のための操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tの読み取り行程(ステップS04)に移行する。車両が水平状態でない(傾斜角度Pが0でない)と判断すれば(ステップS31でNO)、コントローラ10は、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAとしてのアクチュエータ141の電動モータ142への印加電圧を高めるよう指令信号142sを発し、シフタ9を摺動して、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを、その傾斜角度Pに対応する値にまで増大する(ステップS32)。こうして、当初に所定値Fvとしていた補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを傾斜角度Pに対応した値にまで増大させると、車両の直進または旋回制御のための操向レバー11の傾倒角度Tの読み取り行程(ステップS04)に移行する。 If it is determined that the vehicle is in a horizontal state (inclination angle P is 0) (YES in step S31), the engagement state of the auxiliary clutch 8 set so that the engagement force F becomes the predetermined value Fv is maintained. Then, the process proceeds to a reading process (step S04) of the tilt angle T of the steering lever 11 for the straight traveling or turning control of the vehicle. If it is determined that the vehicle is not in a horizontal state (inclination angle P is not 0) (NO in step S31), controller 10 increases the voltage applied to electric motor 142 of actuator 141 as auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA. A command signal 142s is issued, the shifter 9 is slid, and the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is increased to a value corresponding to the inclination angle P (step S32). In this way, when the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 that was initially set to the predetermined value Fv is increased to a value corresponding to the inclination angle P, the reading process of the inclination angle T of the steering lever 11 for the straight traveling or turning control of the vehicle. The process proceeds to (Step S04).
 前記自動モードでの車両の走行中は、傾斜センサ116からの検出信号116sのコントローラ10への入力を続け、コントローラ10は、傾斜角度Pの変化に対応して、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fを調整すべく、補助クラッチ用電子制御アクチュエータAAを制御し続ける。一方、スイッチ112がOFFされている場合(ステップS01でOFF)は、車両の傾斜状態の変化に関係なく、補助クラッチ8の接合力Fは、ダイヤル113での設定値Fsに固定されている(ステップS02)。 While the vehicle is traveling in the automatic mode, the detection signal 116s from the tilt sensor 116 is continuously input to the controller 10, and the controller 10 determines the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 in response to the change in the tilt angle P. Continue to control the auxiliary clutch electronic control actuator AA to adjust. On the other hand, when the switch 112 is OFF (OFF in step S01), the joining force F of the auxiliary clutch 8 is fixed to the set value Fs at the dial 113 regardless of the change in the vehicle inclination state ( Step S02).
 本発明にかかる車両操向システムは、以上に説明したように、サイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式の操向システムを採用した車両用トランスミッション等に適用されるものであり、適用対象となる典型的な車両としては、農業用コンバインがあるが、サイドクラッチ・サイドブレーキ式車両操向システムを採用するあらゆる種類の車両に適用が可能である。 As described above, the vehicle steering system according to the present invention is applied to a vehicle transmission or the like that employs a side clutch / side brake steering system, and is a typical vehicle to be applied. Can be applied to any type of vehicle that employs a side-clutch / side-brake vehicle steering system.
 1          トランスミッション
 2          車両操向用アクチュエータセット
 3(3L・3R)   駆動列
 4(4L・4R)   車軸
 5(5L・5R)   シフタ
 6(6L・6R)   サイドクラッチ
 7(7L・7R)   サイドブレーキ
 8          補助クラッチ
 9          シフタ
10          コントローラ
11          操向レバー(操向操作具)
12          レバー(補助クラッチ接合力設定手段)
13          ペダル(補助クラッチ操作具)
18(18A・18B) 牽制機構
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Transmission 2 Vehicle steering actuator set 3 (3L * 3R) Drive train 4 (4L * 4R) Axle 5 (5L * 5R) Shifter 6 (6L * 6R) Side clutch 7 (7L * 7R) Side brake 8 Auxiliary clutch 9 Shifter 10 Controller 11 Steering lever (steering operation tool)
12 Lever (Auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means)
13 Pedal (auxiliary clutch operating tool)
18 (18A / 18B) Checking mechanism

Claims (5)

  1.  一対の車軸に対し動力を分配するための一対の並列状の駆動列のそれぞれに、サイドクラッチ及びサイドブレーキを設け、操向操作具の操作に伴って旋回内側のサイドクラッチを切り、サイドブレーキを作動するように構成された車両操向システムにおいて、該一対の駆動列間にてトルクを伝達するための、接合力を可変とする補助クラッチ、及び、該補助クラッチの接合力を増大するための補助クラッチ操作具を設けるとともに、サイドブレーキの作動と補助クラッチの接合力増大とが同時に行われないための牽制機構を設けたことを特徴とする車両操向システム。 A side clutch and a side brake are provided in each of a pair of parallel drive trains for distributing power to a pair of axles, the side clutch inside the turn is turned off in accordance with the operation of the steering operation tool, and the side brake is In the vehicle steering system configured to operate, an auxiliary clutch for transmitting torque between the pair of drive trains and a variable joining force for increasing the joining force of the auxiliary clutch A vehicle steering system characterized in that an auxiliary clutch operating tool is provided, and a check mechanism is provided to prevent simultaneous operation of the side brake and increase in the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch.
  2.  前記牽制機構は、前記補助クラッチ操作具が前記補助クラッチの接合力を増大するように操作される際に、前記操向操作具の操作にかかわらず、旋回内側のサイドブレーキが作動しないように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の車両操向システム。 The check mechanism is configured such that when the auxiliary clutch operating tool is operated to increase the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch, the side brake inside the turning is not activated regardless of the operation of the steering operating tool. The vehicle steering system according to claim 1, wherein:
  3.  前記補助クラッチの接合力を所定値に設定するための補助クラッチ接合力設定手段を設けており、前記補助クラッチ操作具は、該補助クラッチの接合力を、該補助クラッチ接合力設定手段にて設定された該所定値から増大させるために操作されるものであることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の車両操向システム。 Auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch to a predetermined value is provided, and the auxiliary clutch operating tool sets the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means. The vehicle steering system according to claim 2, wherein the vehicle steering system is operated to increase the predetermined value.
  4.  前記牽制機構は、前記操向操作具が旋回内側のサイドブレーキを作動するよう操作される際に、該補助クラッチ操作具の操作にかかわらず、該補助クラッチの接合力が増大されないように構成されていることを特徴とする請求項1に記載の車両操向システム。 The check mechanism is configured such that when the steering operation tool is operated to operate the side brake inside the turning, the joining force of the auxiliary clutch is not increased regardless of the operation of the auxiliary clutch operation tool. The vehicle steering system according to claim 1.
  5.  前記補助クラッチの接合力を所定値に設定するための補助クラッチ接合力設定手段を設けており、前記補助クラッチ操作具は、該補助クラッチの接合力を、該補助クラッチ接合力設定手段にて設定された該所定値から増大させるために操作されるものであることを特徴とする請求項4に記載の車両操向システム。 Auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means for setting the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch to a predetermined value is provided, and the auxiliary clutch operating tool sets the engagement force of the auxiliary clutch by the auxiliary clutch engagement force setting means. The vehicle steering system according to claim 4, wherein the vehicle steering system is operated to increase the predetermined value.
PCT/JP2016/051407 2015-01-19 2016-01-19 Vehicle steering system WO2016117543A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201680017022.6A CN107406103B (en) 2015-01-19 2016-01-19 Wheel steering system

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2015008046A JP6651098B2 (en) 2015-01-19 2015-01-19 Steering control system
JP2015-008046 2015-01-19
JP2015-055211 2015-03-18
JP2015055211A JP6528163B2 (en) 2015-03-18 2015-03-18 Vehicle steering system
JP2015-069637 2015-03-30
JP2015069637A JP6651099B2 (en) 2015-03-30 2015-03-30 Steering control system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016117543A1 true WO2016117543A1 (en) 2016-07-28

Family

ID=56417085

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2016/051407 WO2016117543A1 (en) 2015-01-19 2016-01-19 Vehicle steering system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN107406103B (en)
WO (1) WO2016117543A1 (en)

Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0253674A (en) * 1988-08-18 1990-02-22 Kubota Ltd Steering transmission structure for work truck
JP2000072027A (en) * 1998-09-02 2000-03-07 Seirei Ind Co Ltd Side clutch type steering/braking device for work vehicle
JP2002104230A (en) * 2000-09-27 2002-04-10 Kubota Corp Transmission device of working machine
JP2002192972A (en) * 2000-12-27 2002-07-10 Kubota Corp Traveling transmission for working machine
JP2003095127A (en) * 2001-09-25 2003-04-03 Kubota Corp Transmission structure of work machine
JP2003220966A (en) * 2002-01-29 2003-08-05 Kubota Corp Transmission device for travelling of working vehicle
JP2004210221A (en) * 2003-01-08 2004-07-29 Kubota Corp Travel transmission structure of service vehicle
JP2005022648A (en) * 2004-09-17 2005-01-27 Kubota Corp Transmission device
WO2015060287A1 (en) * 2013-10-21 2015-04-30 株式会社神崎高級工機製作所 Running transmission of work vehicle

Family Cites Families (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS5850069U (en) * 1981-10-01 1983-04-05 株式会社神崎高級工機製作所 Side brake device for traveling work vehicles
JPH0187963U (en) * 1987-12-04 1989-06-09
CN1095771C (en) * 1996-12-03 2002-12-11 株式会社久保田 Running driving device for engineering vehicle
JP3541159B2 (en) * 2000-03-29 2004-07-07 株式会社クボタ Agricultural work equipment steering device
ITVR20040079A1 (en) * 2004-05-10 2004-08-10 Comac S P A SELF-PROPELLED VEHICLE PARTICULARLY TO PERFORM STEERING WITH REDUCED BENDING RAYS
JP5065935B2 (en) * 2008-02-22 2012-11-07 株式会社クボタ PTO clutch operation structure of work vehicle
JP2011208788A (en) * 2010-03-30 2011-10-20 Kubota Corp Turning transmission device for working vehicle
CN203766877U (en) * 2013-12-25 2014-08-13 江苏云马农机制造有限公司 Gearbox for cornering braking

Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0253674A (en) * 1988-08-18 1990-02-22 Kubota Ltd Steering transmission structure for work truck
JP2000072027A (en) * 1998-09-02 2000-03-07 Seirei Ind Co Ltd Side clutch type steering/braking device for work vehicle
JP2002104230A (en) * 2000-09-27 2002-04-10 Kubota Corp Transmission device of working machine
JP2002192972A (en) * 2000-12-27 2002-07-10 Kubota Corp Traveling transmission for working machine
JP2003095127A (en) * 2001-09-25 2003-04-03 Kubota Corp Transmission structure of work machine
JP2003220966A (en) * 2002-01-29 2003-08-05 Kubota Corp Transmission device for travelling of working vehicle
JP2004210221A (en) * 2003-01-08 2004-07-29 Kubota Corp Travel transmission structure of service vehicle
JP2005022648A (en) * 2004-09-17 2005-01-27 Kubota Corp Transmission device
WO2015060287A1 (en) * 2013-10-21 2015-04-30 株式会社神崎高級工機製作所 Running transmission of work vehicle

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN107406103A (en) 2017-11-28
CN107406103B (en) 2019-09-27

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2130709B1 (en) vehicle transaxle system
JP4950737B2 (en) Farm tractor
US9656547B2 (en) Vehicle
JP2008254534A (en) Working vehicle
KR100693977B1 (en) Pto operating structure of tractor
JP4966358B2 (en) Control device for work vehicle
WO2016117543A1 (en) Vehicle steering system
JP5186191B2 (en) Traveling vehicle
JP6651099B2 (en) Steering control system
JP6651098B2 (en) Steering control system
JP5202710B2 (en) Work vehicle
JP2009047044A (en) Travel control mechanism
JP5958363B2 (en) Traveling vehicle
JP6528163B2 (en) Vehicle steering system
JP2002331956A (en) Automatic transmission mechanism for working vehicle
JP3940223B2 (en) Shift operation mechanism of work vehicle
JP3583064B2 (en) Agricultural work equipment steering device
JP3389069B2 (en) Farm work vehicle
JP2003220966A (en) Transmission device for travelling of working vehicle
JP2006213189A (en) Control device for working vehicle
JP4820351B2 (en) Combined travel shifting structure
JP3590313B2 (en) Agricultural work equipment steering device
JP2006213188A (en) Control device for working vehicle
JP2007203972A (en) Power take-out device for traveling transmission mechanism
JP2016183769A (en) Travel transmission case

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 16740150

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 16740150

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1